OWNER'S RECORD

MODEL AND SERIAL NUMBER INFORMATION:

The model and serial numbers are located at the hose/gun side of the unit.
A duplicate label is provided to you in the space below.
Refer to these numbers whenever you call upon your Nordson Customer Service
Representative regarding this product.

MilNHifN
IIINE
Ultl 3400v -zEAV4D/R t---t6] W re
ru Fso/oo ffi
W IIIiEE
Erd
230883A S401H00513
E t-rrc I w

TANK AND HEATING PADS WARRANTY INFORMATION:

With respect to hot melt tanks and bulk melter heating pads with cast-in heating
elements, Nordson agrees to repair or, at it's option, replace any hot melt tank or bulk
melter heating pads determined by Nordson to have defective cast-in heaters, provided
the defect is reported in writing to Nordson within sixty(60) months of the date of
manufacture stamped on the hot melt tank or bulk meter heating pads.
THIS UNDERTAKING IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING IVERCHANTABILIry AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

UNIT INSPECTION INFORMATION:

Factory tested and approved: Date ?-/S-o //
Pump seriar number: 5,4Ct 6 /6q/a

NOTE:
Retain for your records. lnsert this document into owner's manual provided with unit.
(zz*vqs)
l^lose +' 6Lt/J
8Fr- TAolcaogSt +AD3tT /z+*v65
+ AD3'1. (z+++G s)
@ gFr- TAotc oeq 55
Nordson

Nordson Corporation

307130
.t

SERIES 34OO Y
Hot Melt Material Applicator
with 6:1 SP30 Piston Pump and Vista'Controller
r 3400V-4GAVDUX

Customer Product Manual- Part 331 1g2F

Nordson.
$
NORDSON CORPORATION o AMHERST, OH|O o USA zl-"'
\ --'/'{
l

\',;
-'ttr;:'
/
,
, ,...
tl :. (
f,-\.-".* \
 ,\
r

(€

Nordson Corporation welcomes requesls for information, comments and inquiries about its products. General
information about Nordson can be found on lhe lnternet using the following address: http://wwwnordson.com.
Address all correspondence to:
Nordson Corporation
Attn: Customer Service
1'1475 Lakefield Drive
Duluth, GA 30097

Notice

This is a Nordson Corporation publication which is protected by copyright. Original copyright date 1999. No part of
this document may be photocopied, repioduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent
of Nordson Corporation. The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice.

Trademarks

AquaGuard, Blue Box, Control Coat, Equi=Bead, FoamMelt, FoamMix, Helix, Hot Shot, Hot Stitch, Meltex,
MicroSet, MultiScan, Nordson, the Nordson logo, OmniScan, Package of Values, Porous Coat, PosFStop, ProLink,
PRX, RBX, Shur-Lock, UniScan, UpTime, and Versa-Spray are registered trademarks of Nordson Corporation.

BetterBook, CF, Controlled Fiberization, Eclipse, Saturn, Seal Sentry, Swirl Coat, and Vista
are trademarks of Nordson Corporation.

Big Orange is a registered trademark of ZEP Manufacturing Company.

Loctite is a registered trademark of Loctite Corporation.

Never Seez is a registered trademark of Bostik CorpoAtion.

ii -6-
Parker Lubricant is a registered trademark of Parker Seal. ,v
.a-l}
Teflon and Viton are registered trademarks of E.l. DuPont de Nemours & Co.
\ =t=-

1."
01 EN-01-[3V-3311 92]-1 4 O 2000 Nordson Corporation
.:*l---.. * All rights reserved
lssued
j
Nordson CorPoration

OPERATOR'S CARD
IMPORTANT
Give this coPY
P/N 229 777c to the oPerator

Series 31OO Vlg4OOYl3500 Vl3700V

Hot tMelt tVlaterial APPlicator
with Piston Pump, standard Filter, standard control

Please Note

The operator's card contains only information

necessary for daily operation and maintenance'
Foiotreiintormation, reler to the product manual
for
A copy of this operator's card and an order form
anotirer operator's card are included in the
introduction part of the operating manual'
a Always follow the instructions given in the
operator's card and operating manual'
a Always follow instructions in the material supplier's
tvtateiiat Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or material
information sheet.
a Even at recommended operating temperatures'
hot melt material may release vapors' Exceeding
prescribed processing temperatures for long

A WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto

perform the following tasks. Observe and
iollow the safety instructions in this document
periods of time can result in dangerous
decomposition by-products. Flemove vapors
by drawing them off with an exhaust system'
and all other related documentation'

Safety SYmbols
WARNING: Disconnect equipment from line
The following symbols warn against dangers or
oossible sou-rces of danger. Become familiar with @ personal injury or death.
voltirge. Failure to observe can result in
inemt faiture to heed a warning symbol can lead to
personal injury and/or damage to the unit or other WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear
equipment.
@ heat-protective
heat-protective
g,
clothi
gloves
ety
n
depending
saf gog gles, and/or
on the

A WARNING: Failure to observe can result in

equipment damage, personal injury, or death'

@
symbol or symbols shown. Failure to observe
can result in personal injury or death'

WARNING: Risk of electrical shock' Failure to

A obserue can result in personal injury or death'
A WARNING: Pressurized system or material
Release pressure. Failure to observe can
result in serious burns.

o 1 E N-O P C-[3V -229774-1

1
lssued 4/98
 Ove rvi EW of S ys tem Com p o ne nts

1
Applicator

2 1. Pump
2. Tank
3
3. Air regulator
4. Filter and drain valve
5. Controls
Additional System Components
6. Hose
8
7. Air-operated gun
8. Solenoid valve

5
6

Daily Maintenance

Clean the exterior sudaces of the applicator and

1

guns.
c. Open the drain valve over a container by
turning the valve counterclockwise.
2. Check the o-rings and gaskets for leaks.

3. Flush the manifold filter as follows:

a. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

Type A Manifotd

b Place containers under all guns and trigger

the
guns to relieve hydraulic pressure.

TypeBorSManifold
d. lncrease the pump air pressure until a clean,
steady stream of hot melt materialflows from
the drain valve.
e. Close the drain valve.
f. Return the pump air pressure to the normal
operating setting.

ol EN-oPc-[3V -229771_1
2 lssued 4/98
 Dai ly Startu p/Sh utdown
Automatic Startup/Shutdown 8. When the READY light turns on, press the PUMP
key.
With the seven-day clock and auto-energize pump
features on, the following occur:
1. The heaters turn on automatically and the pump
starts when the tank reaches either the READY
A WARNING: When the tank lid is open, hot melt
vapors may be released. Vent the application
area or wear a respirator for protection from
condition or a temperature you have selected. vapors.
2. The heaters turn off automatically and the system 9. Check the adhesive level periodically. Refill the
shuts itself down. tank before the level drops below 50%.
ManualStartup ManualShutdown
1. Check the adhesive level. lf the level is below 1. Press the PUN/P key. The PUMP light willturn off
50%, add adhesive to the tank. Fill to within and the pump will stoP.
25 mm (1 inch) of the tank toP.
? L'
PUMP
+
2. Place containers beneath all guns and trigger the
guns to relieve hydraulic pressure.
2. Close the lid immediately to prevent contamination
of the adhesive'
3. lf the POWER switch is off, turn it on.

4. Prepare each gun in your system for operation as

follows:
. Air-operated guns: turn on the operating air.
. Handguns: unlock the trigger.
o Electric guns: turn on the gun driver.
5. Press the HEATERS key. The HEATERS light will
turn on and the unit will begin to heat.
3. Use one of the following methods to prevent
accidental gun triggering:
. Air-operated guns: reduce air pressure to 0
. Handguns: place the trigger safety in the
locked position.
. Electric guns: turn off the gun driver.

,*'*'@ffis
A WARNING: Never hang a handgun by its
trigger. The gun can accidentally discharge
material, causing burns.
6. Turn on the pump air pressure and adjust it to the
4. Press the HEATERS key. The HEATERS light will
setting that works best for your system.
turn off.

r,*rens6D
\<=/ o

7. Check the temperature setting for each heated

zone.

3 o 1E N-O PC-[3V -22577n-1

lssued 4/98
 Daily Operations
Todothis...
Turn the power on
Turn the power off
Scan the temperatures
of each zone.
Monitor the temperatu re
of a zone.
Place the system in
standby.
Take the system out of
standby.
Turn the heaters on
Turn the heaters off.
Turn the 7-day clock on.
Turn the 7-day clock off.
Turn the pump on
Turn the pump off
Determine whether a
fault was corrected.
original copyright dale 2/92. Nordson is a registered trademark of Nordson corporation.
o 1 E N-O PC-[3V -2297771-1
Press this key . . . This happens . It means.
POWER The POWER switch turns on
o I The POWER switch turns
The MONITOR/SCAN light
turns on and stays on.
$lf,l'o"o c The MONITOR/SCAN light
stays on.
The STANDBY light turns on.
STANDBY
$o The STANDBY light turns off.
The HEATERS light turns on.
HEATEHS
@o The HEATERS light turns off.
The CLOCK light turns on.
CLOCK
The CLOCK light turns off
The PUMP light turns on.
FI
PUMP o
"F The PUMP light turns off
All LED lights turn on white
the system begins a
five-second test. At the end
of the test, the FAULT light
turns off.
PlEti. A All LED lights turn on while
the system begins a
five-second test. At the end
of the test, the FAULT light
stays on.
6 lssued 4/98
.
Power to the unit is on
off. Power to the unit is off
The system scans each
heated zone and displays
each zone's temperature.
The system displays the
temperature of only the
zone currently selected.
Heating zones hold at
your preset standby
temperatures.
Heating zones return to
your operating setpoint
temperatures.
The tank, hoses, and
guns are heated.
No heat is applied to
system components.
The system performs
functions controlled by
the clock.
The system does not
perform functions
controlled by the clock.
The pump draws melted
materialthrough the
system.
The pump stops drawing
melted material through
the system.
The fault was corrected.
The fault was not
corrected.
 Vista Contro! Panel

15 16 17 8

13
Vista* FAULT
A READY
J
12 t
I 50F )5tF I 19

20
J
IEMPERAIUR€

@o
Of *,-* 2a
1-u
EEfE
rl
Olo^-rt D{IEMI HE Ot'}I
2

sr O 3
"rrr $
SYSIEM
SEINNGS

4
@o qocK
O
5
OQe**.
CLOCK
Qo
o!Iffi* b
3
0
z'r
\-/ l-flz srmw
un
PUMP
'61
\y'2
O @ *'o"* INTERVAL 7
E
O @ *ro"o*
&
1
CLEAR
FAULTS
11

POWER

o 8

10 I
1. Zone indicator lights 8. POWER switch 15. Multipurpose display
2. STANDBY or SETPOINT temperature light 9. Clock feature lights 16. FAULT light
3. SYSTEM SETTINGS light 10. Control keys 17. READY light
4. Up key for system settings 11. Control lights 18. Actual temperature display
5. Down key for system settings 12. Up key for selector display 19. Down key for multipurpose
6. Move right key 13. Up key for multipurpose display display
7. Clock INTEFIVAL lights 14. Selector display 20. Enter key

o 1 E N-O PC-[3V -2297 77)-1 lssued 4/98

4
 Record of Vista Control Settings
Temperature Settings
Zone Zone 1 Temperatures Zone2 Temperatures Zone 3 Temperatures
Type
Operating Standby Band Operating Standby Band Operating Standby Band

lnternal
Hose
Gun
Zone Zone 4 Temperatures Zone 5 Temperatures Zone 6 Temperatures
Type Band
Operating Standby Band Operating Standby Band Operating Standby
Hose
Gun

Clock Settings
Heater lntervals Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
Heaters On-1
Heaters Off-1
Heaters On-2
Heaters Off-2
Standby lntervals
Standby On-1
Standby Off-1
Standby On-2
Standby Off-2

System Settings
System ready time delay: Startup: tr Sequential / tr Simultaneous
Overtemperature setpoint Auto-energize heaters: tr On / ! Off
Pump air pressure: Auto-energize pump: tr On / tr Off
Global temperature band: Warning or power output: tr Warning / E Power on
Auto-energize pump Ready or pump output: tr Ready / E Pump on
temperature setting:
Password: trOn/trOff

lssued 4/98 5 o 1 E N-O PC-[3V -2297771-1

 lntroduction

Series 3000 V Manual Configuration Code

1. Product Configuration The configuration code indicates the features included in your system
as shipped. Your system and its manual have similar, but not identical,
Codes configuration codes.

The system configuration code appears on the lD plate on the unit.

Please refer to this code when contacting Nordson to order services or
parts.

The manualconfiguration code appears on the title page and on the

spine of your product manual. This code ensures that the manual you
receive contains information about your system.

2. Understanding Your Use the following example to interpret the configuration code for your
product manual.
Manual Configuration
Code

Model
Voltage
-
Pump
Manifold
f Controller

:. f,.1:: x
I Option

M 3 4 0 0 V X E A V I

Model Voltage Pump Manifold ControllerType Options

31 00y X Voltage code D Single-acting A 4-port V Vista X alloptions other
3400v 1,2, or 3 10:1 piston pump than EMC
B 6-port P Pattern
3500v 4 Voltage code 4 E SP3O 4 EMC
14:1 piston pump C 6-port reverse-flush T Temperature
3700v
3830v F SP3O J 4-port, w/pressure control
21:1 piston pump valve
3860v
3890v G SP3O S 1 supply port, 1 return port

3930v 6:1 piston pump T 1 supply port, 1 return port,

3960v K AC gear pump reverse-flush
200 volt

L AC gear pump
240 volt

NOTE: Shaded area denotes data not pertinent to the manual configuration code.

@ '1999 Nordson Corporallon 41-3000y ol EN-02-[3V-CONFlG]-1

All riqhts reserued
lssued 2/99
 lntroduction

ol EN-02-[3V-CONFTG]-I 41-3000v @ 1 999 Nordson Corporation

lssued 2/99 All rights reserved

Congratulations on the Purchase of
Your Nordson Product
Your Safety is lmportant to
Nordson
It's Easy to Use This Product
Manual
We Welcome Your
Suggestions
@ 1994 Nordson Corporation
All rights reseNed
lntroduction
Nordson equipment is engineered and manufactured in accordance with
strict specifications, using high-quality components and state-of-the-aft
technologies that assure reliable, long-term performance. Your product
was thoroughly tested for proper operation prior to shipment.
Before unpacking and installing your new equipment, please read this
manual. lt is your guide to safe installation, productive operation and
effective maintenance. We recommend that you keep the manual
available for future reference.
Carefully read the safety instructions in the Safefy section. Your product
is designed for safe operation when used according to the published
instructions. However, potential hazards exist when operating
instructions are not followed.
This introductory section provides general information including
recommended spare parts and how the parts can be ordered.
Part A includes safety instructions as well as descriptions of product
installation, operation, maintenance and general troubleshooting
procedures.
Part B contains detailed information concerning the product and its
subassemblies.
Parts C, D and E provide information covering hot melt hoses, guns and
accessories.
The glossary and index at the end of the manual explain technical terms
and assist in locating specific information.
Data and specifications included in this manual are accurate at the time
of publication. Nordson reserues the right to change the contents of this
manual and/or specification without notice.
Nordson is committed to providing product manuals that meet the needs
of its valued customers. We invite you to use the Comments and
Corrections page included in this section to offer suggestions for
continued improvement of this manual.
olEN-o3-[XX-CONG]-1
lssued 9/94
 lntroduction

olEN{3-txx-coNcl-1 @ 1994 Nordson Corporation

lssued 9/94 All rights reserved
 Table of Contents

Manual
Table of Contents

Becommended Spare Parts

and Supplies

General Hot Melt Material

Processi n g I nstructi ons

Operator's Card

Section A 1
1. Operate Safely A 1-1

Safety 2. Safety Symbols A1-2

3. Qualified Personnel A 1-3
4. lntended Use A 1-3
5. lnstallation and Electrical Connections ... A 1-4
6. Operation .. A 1-4
Less-Obvious Dangers A 1-5
Action in the Event of Unit Malfunction A 1-5
Danger of Burns A 1-6
7. Maintenance/Repair A 1-6
8. Cleaning A 1-7
9. Thermoplastic Hot Melt Material . A 1-8
10 Equipment and Material Disposal A 1-B

Section A 2 1. lntended Use . . A2-1

Description 2. Overview A2-1
3. FunctionalDescription A2-2
Startup Mode . . A2-3
Operating Mode A2-3
Standby Mode . A2-3

@ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v Ol EN{'I-[3V-TOC7-127

All rights reserved
lssued 5/O0
ii Table of Contents

Section A 2 4. tilajor Components . . . . A2-5

Description @ontd) Tank . A 2-6
Pump A2-7
Ivlanifold A2-8
Manifold Block and Hose Connectors .. A2-8
Manifold Filter . .. A2-8
Drain Valve . A2-9
Pressure Relief Valve . A2-9
Air Pressure Regulator . A2-9
Operator Panel . . A2-9
5. ControlSystem A2-10
Features of the Operator Panel . . . A 2-10
System Status Area A2-11
FAULT Light . A2-11
READY Light . A2-11
Displays Area . A2-12
Selector Display and Up Key . . . . A2-12
Multipurpose Display and Keys . . A2-13
Actual Temperature Display ..... A2-13
Enter Key A2-13
System Setup Area . A2-14
Move Up and Move Down Keys A2-14
Move Right Key . . A2-14
TEMPERATURE ATea . A2-1s
SYSTEM SETTINGS Area ...... . A2-15
CLOCK Area A2-15
System Controls Area . A2-16
MONITOR/SCAN Key and Light . . A 2-16
STANDBY Key and Light . A2-17
HEAf,ERS Key and Light A2-18
CLOCK Key and Light A2-18
PUMP Key and Light A 2-18
CLEAR FAULTS Key.... A2-18
POWER Switch 42.'IB
6. Specifications . .. . A 2-19
7. Dimensions A2-20
8. Explanation of Configuration Code A2-21
Code Descriptions A2-22
Example A2-24

01 E N-O/I-[3V-TO C)-1 27 41-3000v o 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Table of Contents iii

Section A 3 1. lntroduction .... A3-1

lnstallation 2. Unpacking .. A 3-1
3. lnspection .. A 3-1
4. lnstallation Requirements . . . A 3-1.
Location Requirements .. ... ... . A3-2
Wiring Requirements .... A 3-3
Hose/Gun Power Requirements A 3-3
5. Mechanical I nstallation A 3-4
Mounting the Unit A3-4
lnstalling the Tank Strainer A 3-6
Connecting the Air Supply A3-7
lnstalling Guns . . A3-8
To lnstallan Air-Operated Gun . A3-8
To lnstall an Electric Gun . . A3-9
To lnstalla Hand-Operated Gun . A3-9
lnstalling Hoses A 3-'t0
6. Electrical I nstallation A 3-14
Connecting Gun and Hose Cordsets . . A 3-14
Opening the Electrical Enclosure A 3-16
Connecting a Triggering Device for the pump Solenoid
Valve . A3-1,7
Connecting Output Contacts (Optional) A 3-19.
Connecting Electrical Seruice A3-22
Closing the Electrical Enclosure A 3-25,
7. System Programming Procedures .. .. A 3-26
Programming System Controls A3-27
Programming Optional Features A 3-29r
Programming SYSTEM SETTTNGS Controls A 3-29,
ProgrammingTEMPEHATURE Controls . . .. A 3-33
]o .f 1qOrq.m Setpoi nt and Stan dby Temperatu res
lndividually A 3-36
To Program All Zones to the Same Temperature A 3-38
Programming CLOCK Controls A 3-39
To Set the Clock . A 3-40
To Set Standby and Heater Tmes . A 3-43
To Change a Standby or Heater Time . . A 3-45
To Delete a Standby or Heater Time . . A 3-46
To Delete Times for an Entire Day . . A 3-46
An Example of How to Use the Seven-Day
ClockFeature.... . A3-47

@ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All dghts reserved 41-3000v ol EN{4-[3V-TOC]-127
lssued 5/00
iv Table of Contents

Section A 3 B. System Preparation A3-47

lnstallation @ontd) Filling the Tank with Adhesive A3-47
Flushing the System A 3-48

Adjusting the Circulation ControlValve . A 3-51

9. Records of System Settings A 3-52

Record of SETPOI NT (Operatin g) Temperatu re Settings A 3-52

Record of Standby Temperature Settings A 3-53

Record of Set Times for Heaters On and Heaters Off A 3-54

Record of Set Times for Entering and Exiting Standby A 3-55

Record of Customized System Settings Features A 3-56

Record of Air Pressure Settings A 3-57

Record of System Faults A 3-58

Record of System Warnings . . . A 3-59

Section A 4 1. lntroduction A4-1

Operation 2. OperatingProcedures
,

A4-1

Turning the Seven-Day Clock On and Off ..... . A4-2

Automatically Starting the Unit A4-2

Manually Starting the Unit A 4-3

Checking the Adhesive Level and Filling the Tank A4-4

Placing the Unit ln Standby Mode . A 4-5

Taking the Unit Out of Standby Mode . . . . .. A4-5

Automatically Shutting Down the Unit . . . . A 4-6

Manually Shutting Down the Unit . . A 4-6

3. System Monitoring Procedures .. A4-6

Checking the ZoneTemperatures .... ... .. A4-7
Checking the Programmed SYSTEM SETTINGS
Features .. A4-7
Checking the Warning or Fault Log . . .. A4-8
Running a System Test . . A4-10
4. Operating Procedures for Optional Features . A4-10
5. Procedure for Changing Adhesives . A4-11

01 E N-o't-[3V-TO Cl-1 27 41 -3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Table of Contents v

Section A 5 1. lntroduction A 5-1

Maintenance 2. MaintenanceSchedule A5-2
Checking Run Time of Heaters A 5-3
3. Maintenance Procedures .. . . A 5-3
Relieving System Pressure A 5-3
Replacing Hose Connector or Plug O-Rings A 5-4
To Remove Hose Connector or Plug O-Rings A 5-4
To lnstall Hose Connector or Plug O-Rings . A 5-5
Flushing a Standard Manifold Filter. A 5-6
Cleaning a Standard Manifold Filter . A5-7
Flushing the System A 5-11
To Prepare for Flushing the System A 5-11
To Flush the System with Hot Melt Material A 5-14
To Flush the System with a Flushing Material A 5-15
To Flush the System with Type R Fluid . . . . . A 5-18
To Restore the Unit to Normal Operation . . . . A 5-20

Section B 1 1. lntroduction B 1-'l

Hydraulics 2. Overview of the Hydraulic System . . B 1-2
3. Troubleshooting . B 1-3
Troubleshooting Table B 1-3
Troubleshooting Procedures ... . B 1-5
Manifold Blockage Check ... . B 1-5
Pump Siphon Ball Seat Check B 1-6
Actuator Check B 1-7
Pump Solenoid Valve Check . B 1.8
Pump Air Section Check B 1-9
4. Pump Repair Procedures .... B 1-10
Cleaning or Rebuilding the Pump . .. .. B 1-11
Preparation for Pump Removal . .. .. B 1-11
Pump Removal B 1-11
Actuator Removal B 1-12
Pump Air Section Disassembly . .... B 1-13
Pump Hydraulic Section Disassembly B 1-16
Pump Component Cleaning . B 1-20
Pump Hydraulic Section Assembly .. . .. B 1-21
Pump Air Section Assembly B 1-22
Actuator lnstallation B 1-23
B 1-23
System Restoration B 1-24
Repositioning or Replacing the Shifter Fork B 1-25

@ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v O1E N-O/I-[3V-TO C1-1 27

All dghts reserued
lssued 5/00
vi Table of Contents

Section B'l 5. Actuator Repair Procedures . . . B 1-27

Hydraulics (contd) Replacing the Actuator . ... . B 1-27
Actuator Removal B 1-27
Actuator lnstallation B 1-28
Cleaning or Replacing the tilagnet Assembly B 1-29
Magnet Assembly Removal B 1-29
Magnet Assembly lnstallation B 1-32
Cleaning or Replacing the Air Valve . B 1-33
Air Vaive Removal B 1-33
Air Valve lnstallation B 1-35
Replacing the Bumper Assembly B 1-36

6. Pump Solenoid Valve Replacement Procedures B 1-37

Removing the Solenoid Valve . B 1-37
lnstalling the Solenoid Valve . B 1-38
7. Manifold Repair Procedures . . . . B 1-39
Replacing the Pressure Relief Valve B 1-39
Replacing the Drain Valve . B 1-40
Replacing the Manifold B 1-40
8. lllustrated Parts Lists B'.t-41
Using the lllustrated Parts List . . . . . B 1-41

UpTime Pack for Pump G B 1-42

Piston Pump Parts List . . B 1-45
Actuator Parts List B 1-48
Solenoid ValveAssembly Parts Lists . ....... B 1-50
Air Pressure Regulator and Filter Assembly Parts List B 1-52
Parts Lists for Manifold A B 1-53
Manifold Assembly Parts List B 1-54
Filter Assembly Parts List . . B 1-56

Section B 2 1. lntroduction B2-1

Control 2. Overview of the Control System . . . . B?-2
ControlAssembly B2-2
Unit-Specific Boards B 2-3

Optional lnpuUOutput Board B2-3

Control System on 480 Vac Three-Phase Units B 2-4

O1E N-Ort-[3V -T O C1-1 27 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights res€rved
lssued 5/00
 Table of Contents vii

3. TroubleshootingTables B 2-4
Electrical Safety During Troubleshooting B 2-5
Opening and Closing the Electrical Enclosure B2-5
Opening B2-6
Closing B2-7
lnternal, Hose, or Gun Zone Not Heating . . . . B 2-7
Settings Changed or Lost B 2-8
Unit Not Powering On .. B2-8
Control System lndicating a Warning B 2-10
Out-of-BandWarning :..... B 2-11
Under-Temperature (UT) Warning . . . . . . . B2-12
ControlSystem lndicating a Fault B2-14
Over-Temperature (OT) Fault B 2-15
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Fault B 2-17
Fault-Code Fault (F1 -F7) B 2-18
4. Troubleshooting Procedures . B 2-19
Checking the POWER Switch B 2-19
Checkin Distribution Board Harnesses
and the B2-20
Checking a Heater or Heater Circuit B2-22
Checking aThermostat .... B2-24
Checking an RTD or RTD Circuit . .. B 2-25
5. Repair Procedures . . . B2-29
ReplacingaFuse.. B2-29
Replacing a ControlAssembly Board B2-32
Preparation for Removal B2-32
Power Board Removal B2-32
Power Board lnstallation B 2-33
Control Board Removal B2-34
Control Board lnstallation B 2-35
Display Board Removal .. .. B 2-36
Display Board lnstallation B 2-36
System Restoration B 2-36
Replacing the Operator Panel . . . . B 2-36
OperatorPanel Removal ...... B 2-37
Operator Panel lnstallation .. ... B 2-38
Replacing the Control Assembly . . B 2-39
ControlAssembly Removal . ... B 2-39
ControlAssembly lnstallation . . B 2-41
Replacing a Unit-Specific Board .. B2-41
Replacing an FITD or a Thermostat B 2-42
RTD or Thermostat Removal B2-42
RTD or Thermostat lnstallation B 2-44

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
4'l-3000v ol EN{4-[3V-TOCI-127
lssued 5/00
viii Table of Contents

Section B 2 6. Parts . ... 82-45

Control @ontd) Using the lllustrated Parts List ... 82-45
' Hose/Gun Test Plugs . ... 82-46
Line Filter B2-46
ControlAssembly Parts List .. B 2-48

Unit-Specific Parts List B 2-50

Section B 3 lntroduction . B3-1

Tank 2. Overview of the Tank B 3-1

3. Tank and Manifold Replacement B3-2

Preparing to Replace the Tank or Manifold B 3-2

Disassembling the Thnk and Manifold B 3-3

Reassembling the Tank and Manifold . . . . . B 3-5

Restoring the Unit to Normal Operation . . . B 3-7

4. lllustrated Parts List B 3-9

Using the lllustrated Parts List .. . B 3-9

Tank Assembly Parts List . B 3-10

Frame Assembly Parts List . .. . B 3-12
Ground Stud Assembly Parts List . B 3-15

Part C
Hoses

Part D
Guns

Section E 1 1. lntroduction ... E 1-1

Senbs 3000V lnpuVOutput 2. lnpuVOutputConnections E 1-3
Board
3. AdditionalFeatures ... E1-7
4. l/O Board Replacement ... E1-9
5. Troubleshooting . .. . .. .. E 1-10
6. Parts . .. E 1-11

OI EN{'I-[3V-TOC1-127 41 -3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All righls reserved
 Table of Contents ix

Section E 2 1. lntroduction .... E2-1

Low Level lndicator 2. lnstallation .... E2-2
3. Setup .. .. . .... E2-6
4. Parts List .. E2-7

Section F 1 F 1-1
Nordson Glossary

Section F 2 1. lntroduction F 2-1

Wiring Diagrams 2. Use of Wiring Diagrams F 2-1

Voltage Code 1 and 2 Wiring Diagram

9 F 2-2

4- Voltage Code 3 Wiring Diagram ..... F 2-4

5. Voltage Code 4 Wiring Diagram .. .. . F 2-6

Section F 3 1. lntroduction . F 3-1

Calculating HoselGun 2. Procedure for Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity F 3-2
Capacity
3. Power Data Tables F 3-8

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v OI EN{/I-[3V-TOC]-127

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
x Table of Contents

ol EN4/I-[3V-TOCl-127 41-3000v O 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserued
lssued 5/O0
 lntroduction O-1

Recommended Spare Parts and Supplies

Major Assemblies Be sure to order the appropriate parts for your unit. To determine the
features and options your unit has, refer lo Explanation of Configuration
Code at the end of lhe Descripfion section.

Nordson UpTime Plus packs are prepackaged spare parts kits that
provide extensive maintenance parts for the major wear assembles of
Series 3000y units. For example, the UpTime Plus pack for a pump
contains a complete replacement pump assembly.

Pumps (select appropriate pump):

Part 336 937 UpTime Plus pack for pump D (10:1)
for Series 3500 V units
Part 336 936 UpTime Plus pack for pump D (10:1)
for Series 3700Vunits
Parl161 424 UpTime Plus packforpump E (14:1)
Part 164 683 UpTime Plus pack for pump F (21 :1)
Part 164 684 UpTime Plus pack for pump G (6:1)

Manifolds (select appropriate manifold):

Part 105 463 UpTime Plus pack for manifold A
Part 105 467 UpTime Plus pack for manifold B
Part 105 470 UpTime Plus pack for manifold C
Part 120 320 UpTime Plus pack for manifold S
Part 120 348 UpTime Plus pack for manifold T

@ 1 999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 01 EN-06-[3\rX-AXXX]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 4/99
O-2 lntroduction

Standard Circuit Boards and

Fuses for All Units Except
480 Vac Units
Standard Vista Units:
Part234 428 Vista ControlAssembly
Part234 427 Vista Power Board
Pan234 429 Vista Control Board
Part234 426 Vista Display Board
Pattern Control (PC) Units:
Parl297 710 Vista PC Control Assembly
Part234 427 Vista Power Board
Part234 429 Vista Control Board
Par1247 267 Vista PC Display Board
Temperature Control (TC) Units:
Part 305607 Vista TC ControlAssembly
Par1234 427 Vista Power Board
Parl248 043 Vista TC Control Board
Part248 044 Vista TC Display Board

Fuses (for power board):

Part 939 683 Fuse, 6.3 A (8 required)
Part 939 491 Fuse, 25 A (2 required)
Part 310 904 Fuse, 1 A (2 required)
NOTE: Your unit may have additional circuit boards if it has special features
or options. Refer to Unit-Specific Circuit Boards, Fuses, and Relays.

ol EN-06-[3V-X-AXXX]-1 41-3000v @ 1999 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights ressrved
lssued 4/99
 lntroduction O-3

Standard Circuit Boards and

Fuses for 480 Vac Units

Standard Vista Units:

Part 328 921 Vista ControlAssembly, 480 Vac
Part234 427 Vista Power Board, 480 Vac
Part 328 920 Vista Control Board, 480 Vac
Parl234 426 Vista Display Board, 480 Vac
Pattern Control (PC) Units:
Part 328 923 Vista PC Control Assembly, 480 Vac
Part234 427 Vista Power Board, 480 Vac
Part 328 920 Vista Control Board,480 Vac
Parl247 267 Vista PC Display Board, 480 Vac
Temperature Control (TC) Units:
Part 328 929 Vista TC ControlAssembly, 480 Vac
Paft234 427 Vista Power Board, 480 Vac
Paft 328 928 Vista TC Control Board, 480 Vac
Par1248044 Vista TC Display Board,480 Vac

Fuses (for power board):

Part 939 683 Fuse, 6.3 A (8 required)
Part 939 491 Fuse, 25 A (2 required)
Part 310 904 Fuse, 1 A (2 required)
NOTE: Your unit may have additional circuit boards if it has special features
or options. Refer to Unit-Specific Circuit Boards, Fuses, and Relays.

@ 1999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 01 EN-06-[3\FX-AXXX]-1

All rights reserued
lssued 4/99
O-4 lntroduction

Unit-Specific Ci rcu it Boards,

Fuses, and Relays

Unit-Specific Circuit Boards:

Part247 266 Contactor Board
Pan247 260 5/6 Hose/Gun Board
Pari 247 262 400 Vac Tank Board
Paft 333 342 480 Vac Distribution Board
Parl247 265 Grid Board
Parl247 263 Pattern Control Engine Board
Part247 264 Pattern Control Driver Board
Part 333 601 Pattern Control Driver Board, 480 Vac
Paft247 261 Standard lnpuUOutput (l/O) Board
(standard or PC units)
Part239 494 Enhanced l/O Board (standard or PC units)
Parl248 045 TC YO Board (TC units)

Fuses:
Contactor Board:
Part 939 491 Fuse, 25 A (2 required)
Paft 939 992 Fuse,30 A (1 required)

5/6 Hose/Gun Board:

Part 939 683 Fuse, 6.3 A (4 required)

480 Vac Distribution Board:

Part 939021 Fuse, 20 A (3 required)
Part297 747 Fuse, 16 A (1 required)

Pattern Control Driver Board:

Part 939683 Fuse, 6.3 A (2 required)
Part232 515 Fuse, 1 A (1 required)

Relay:
480 Vac Distribution Board:
Part 333 343 480 Vac relay

01 EN-06-[3\iX-AXXX]-1 4't-3000y @ 1999 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 4/99
 lntroduction O-5

Consumables and Wear

Items

RTD or Thermostat (tank, reservoir, or grid):

Part 249 800 Thermostat service kit
Paft 108 907 RTD service kit

O-Bings:
Manifold A:
Part 105 526 Viton O-ring, 0.38-in. tube (eight of 945 032)
Part 105 521 Viton O-ring, 0.250 x 0.375 x 0.063 in. (four of 940 101)
Part 105 527 Back-up ring, 0.25 x 0.38 in. (four of 954 036)
Part 105 524 O-ring for filter assembly (four of 941 172)

Manifold B or C:
Part 105 526 Viton O-ring, 0.38-in. tube (eight of 945 032)
Part 105 521 Viton O-ring, 0.250 x 0.375 x 0.063 in. (four of 940 101)
Par|1O972O Viton O-ring, 1.000-in. tube (four of 945 037)
Paft 105 523 Viton O-ring, 1.375 x 1.50 x 0.063 in. (four of 940 281)
Part 105 522 O-ring for filter assembly (four of 941 201)

Manifold S orT
Part 105 526 Viton O-ring, 0.38-in. tube (eight of 945 032)
Part 105 521 Viton O-ring, 0.250 x 0.375 x 0.063 in. (four of 940 101)
Part 109 720 Viton O-ring, 1.000-in. tube (four of 945 037)
Part 105 523 Viton O-ring, 1.375 x 1.50 x 0.063 in. (four of 940 281)
Part 105 522 O-ring for filter assembly (four of 941 201)
Parl l2O 297 Viton O-ring, 0.750-in. tube (four o1945 039)

Pump:
Part 940 332 Viton O-ring, 2.000 x 2.125 x 0.063 in
Part 940 133 Viton O-ring, 0.426x 0.070 in.

Pump Parts (otherthan O-rings):

Part 163 039 SP Piston cup (6:1 and 14:1 pumps)
Part 288 116 SP Piston cup (21:1 pump)
Part 952 100 Viton cup
Part 986 331 Push-on retaining ring
Part 954 013 Single back-up ring

Manifold Filter Screen:

Parl274 578 Filter screen for manifold A, B, or S, 0.006-in. mesh
Part 288 092 Filter screen for manifold C or I 0.006-in. mesh

Regu lator/Filter Assembly:

Part 165 870 Filter element kit

@ 1999 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000y o1 EN-06-[3\rX-AXXX]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 4/99
0-6 lntroduction

Software Upgrade Kit for All

Units Except 480 Vac Units

Standard and PC Vista units:

Par1234 424 Vista software chip

Vista TC Units:
Part297 707 Vista TC software chip

Software Upgrade Kit for

480 Vac Units

Standard and PC Vista units:

Part 328 919 Vista software chip, 480 Vac

Vista TC Units:
Pan328927 Vista TC software chip, 480 Vac

Supplies and Tools

Part Item
900 236 Teflon paste (for tank seals or NPT threads)
900 223 Parker lubricant (for Viton O-rings)
900 41 9 Retaining cylindrical adhesive (for non-removable washers
and screws)
900 341 Never-Seez lubricant (for removable washers and screws)
902 514 Protective gloves
901 515 Filter for air supply to pump
901 915 Nozzle cleaning kit
270755 Type-R fluid
143 958 Anti-static ground wrist strap

ol EN-06-[3\rx-Axxx]-1 41-3000v @ 1999 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 4/99
 lntroduction O-7

General Hot Melt Material

Processi ng I nstructions

NOTE: Before processing hot melt material, carefully read the material
manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or material
information sheet. Nordson supplies only general processing instructions
and is not liable for hazards associated with or damage caused by the
use of hot melt material.

Storage Store the material in dry areas at room temperature. Keep it in covered,
dust-protected containers.

Preparations for Material Keep the substrate at room temperature, dry and free of dust and
grease. Perform tests to determine the suitable hot melt material,
Application/Coating optimum operating conditions, and preliminary treatment of the substrate
for the application.

Some substrates contain plasticizers and other ingredients which

dissipate over time. ln some cases, surfaces are treated with waxes,
anti-stick oils, etc. Without adequate pretreatment, the hot melt bond in
these applications may be defective at the time of dispensing.

P rocessi n g Tem peratu re The application temperature of the hot melt material at the nozzle is
crucial for effective bonds.

Refer to the material manufacturer's MSDS or material information sheet.

Avoid unnecessary thermal stress. lf the work is interrupted, reduce the

melting temperature.

Avoid heating the hot melt material above the prescribed processing
temperature. Higher temperatures may cause charring of the hot melt
material. This results in downtime. ln addition, material may generate
dangerous vapors at excessively high temperatures. Remove these
vapors by using appropriate exhaust systems.

O 1994 Nordson Corporation o1 EN-07-[XX-PROC]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 9/94
O-B lntroduction

Danger of Burns Be carefulwhen using hot melt materials. These materials are solid at
room temperature. For proper application, they may be heated to
temperatures of up to 230 "C (450 'F). Refer to the safety instructions
in the Safety section.

Mixing Hot Melt Materials Avoid mixing different hot melt materials. Refer to Changing the Hot Melt
Mate rial in lhe Maintenance section.

Disposal of Hot Melt Materia; Refer to the supplier's MSDS or material information sheet.

olEN-o7-[xx-PRocl-l @ 1994 Nordson Corporation

All rlghts reserved
lssued 9/94
Nordson Corporation

OPERATOR'S CARD
P/N 229 777C

Series 3100 Vl3400Yl3500 V|37O0V

Hot lVlelt lVaterial Applicator
with Piston Pump, Standard Filter, Standard Control

Please Note

The operator's card contains only information
necessary for daily operation and maintenance.
For other information, refer to the product manual.
A copy of this operator's card and an order form for
another operator's card are included in the
introduction part of the operating manual.
Always follow the instructions given in the
operator's card and operating manual.
a Always follow instructions in the material supplier's
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or material
information sheet.
a Even at recommended operating temperatures,
hot melt material may release vapors. Exceeding

A WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto

perform the following tasks. Observe and
follow the safety instructions in this document
and all other related documentation.
prescribed processing temperatures for long
periods of time can result in dangerous
decomposition by-products. Remove vapors
by drawing them off with an exhaust system.

Safety Symbols

The following symbols warn against dangers or WARNING: Disconnect equipment from line
possible sources of danger. Become familiar with
them! Failure to heed a warning symbolcan lead to
@ voltage. Failure to observe can result in
personal injury or death.
personal injury and/or damage to the unit or other
equipment. WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear
@ heat-protective cloth in g, safety goggles, and/or

A WARNING: Failure to observe can result in

equipment damage, personal injury or death.
heat-protective gloves depending on the
symbol or symbols shown. Failure to observe
can result in personal injury or death.
@
A WARNING: Risk of electrical shock. Failure to
obserue can result in personal injury or death.

A WARNING: Pressurized system or material.

Release pressure. Failure to obserue can
result in serious burns.

lssued 4/98 't 2297nC

 Overview of System Components

Applicator

2
1. Pump
2. Tank
3 3. Air regulator
4. Filter and drain valve
5. Controls
Additional System Components
6. Hose
7. Air-operated gun
8
8. Solenoid valve

5 6

Daily Maintenance

1. Clean the exterior suffaces of the applicator and c. Open the drain valve over a container by
guns. turning the valve counterclockwise.

2. Check the o-rings and gaskets for leaks.

3. Flush the manifold filter as follows:

a. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

Type A Manifold

b. Place containers under all guns and trigger the

guns to relieve hydraulic pressure.

TypeBorSManifold
d. lncrease the pump air pressure until a clean,
steady stream of hot melt material flows from
the drain valve.
e. Close the drain valve.
f. Return the pump air pressure to the normal
operating setting.

229717C lssued 4/98

2
 Dai ly Startu p/Sh utdown
Automatic Startup/Sh utdown 8. When the READY light turns on, press the PUMP
key.
With the seven-day clock and auto-energize pump
features on, the following occur:
1. The heaters turn on automatically and the pump
stafts when the tank reaches either the READY
A WARNING: When the tank lid is open, hot melt
vapors may be released. Vent the application
area or wedr a respirator for protection from
condition or a temperature you have selected. vapors.
2. The heaters turn off automatically and the system 9. Check the adhesive level periodically. Refill the
shuts itself down. tank before the level drops below 50%.
ManualStartup ManualShutdown
1. Check the adhesive level. lf the level is below 1. Press the PUMP key. The PUMP light will turn off
50%, add adhesive to the tank. Fillto within and the pump willstop.
25 mm (1 inch) of the tank top.
E
25 mm
5Oo/"
PUMP

+o
e

l
2. Place containers beneath all guns and trigger the
guns to relieve hydraulic pressure.
2. Close the lid immediately to prevent contamination
of the adhesive.

3. lf the POWER switch is off, turn it on

4. Prepare each gun in your system for operation as

follows:
3.
. Air-operated guns: turn on the operating air.
. Handguns: unlock the trigger.
. Electric guns: turn on the gun driver.
5. Press the HEATERS key. The HEATERS light will
turn on and the unit will begin to heat.
Use one of the following methods to prevent
accidental gun triggering:
o Air-operated guns: reduce air pressure to 0
. Handguns: place the trigger safety in the
locked position.
o Electric guns: turn off the gun driver.

,*r=*@:pf
A WARNING: Never hang a handgun by its
trigger. The gun can accidentally discharge
material, causing burns.
6. Turn on the pump air pressure and adjust it to the
4. Press the HEATERS key. The HEATERS light will
setting that works best for your system.
turn off.

,*r.rs6E
.: o

7. . Check the temperature setting for each heated

zone.

lssued 4/98 3 2297nC

 Vista Control Panel

15 16 17

14

13
Vista"
19
12 t
I 5CF 5t I
J
I rer*rrenerune

Y"qfi'on@ o
Of t,o* 2u
1-tl-
E
LI 1

Ofr**o 2

srnnort
fl O 3
srSIEu
sEmMis
4
,*rtta@ o
O** 5
O @e.''ou'
Qo
Otrffi* 6
F0
o o It m** '@,
O@ *""'* IAITERVAL
7
E E
CLEAR \A/ 1 2
FAULTS O @'*'oto*
11 A

P()WER

0 rdso o 8

10 I
1. Zone indicator lights 8. POWER switch 1 5. Multipurpose display
2. STANDBY or SETPOINT temperature light 9. Clock feature lights 16. FAULT light
3. SYSTEM SETTINGS light 10. Control keys 17. READY light
4. Up key for system settings '11. Control lights 1 8. Actual temperature display

5. Down key for system settings 12. Up key for selector display 19. Down key for multipurpose
6. Move right key 13. Up key for multipurpose display display
7. Clock INTERVAL lights '14. Selector display 20. Enter key

2297nC 4 lssued 4/98

 Record of Vista Control Settings
Temperature Settings
Zone Zone l Temperatures Zone 2 Temperatures Zone 3 Temperatures
Type
Operating Standby Band Operating Standby Band Operating Standby Band
lnternal
Hose
Gun
Zone Zone 4 Temperatures Zone 5 Temperatures Zone 6 Temperatures
Type
Operating Standby Band Operating Standby Band Operating Standby Band
Hose
Gun

Clock Settings
Heater lntervals Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday
Heaters On-1
Heaters Off-1
Heaters On-2
Heaters Off-2
Standby lntervals
Standby On-1
Standby Off-1
Standby On-2
Standby Off-2

System Settings
System ready time delay: Startup: E Sequential / E Simultaneous
Overtemperature setpoint: Auto-energize heaters: tr On / tr Off
Pump air pressure: Auto-energize pump: tr On / tr Off
Global temperature band: Warning or power output: E Warning / E Power on
Auto-energize pump Ready or pump output: E Ready / E Pump on
temperature setting:
Password: trOn/trOff

lssued 4/98 5 229TnC

 Daily Operations

To do this. . . Pressthis key... This happens... It means

Turn the power on. POWER The POWEFI switch turns on. Power to the unit is on.
Turn the power off. o The POWER switch turns off. Power to the unit is off

Scan the temperatures The MONITOF/SCAN light The system scans each
of each zone. turns on and stays on. heated zone and displays
each zone's temperature.
Monitor the temperature
Bblll'on@ c The MONITOR/SCAN light The system displays the
of a zone. stays on. temperature of only the
zone currently selected.
Place the system in The STANDBY light turns on Heating zones hold at
standby. your preset standby

Take the system out of

standby.
STANDBY
e"@ The STANDBY light turns off
temperatures.
Heating zones return to
your operating setpoint
temperatures.
Turn the heaters on. The HEATERS light turns on The tank, hoses, and
guns are heated.
Turn the heaters off
HEATERS@ c The HEATERS light turns ofi No heat is applied to
system components.
Turn the 7-day clock on The CLOCK light turns on. The system performs
functions controlled by
the clock.
Turn the 7-day clock off
CLOCK o The CLOCK light turns otf. The system does not
perform functions
controlled by the clock.
Turn the pump on. The PUMP light turns on. The pump draws melted
materialthrough the
3 system.
PUMP
0 ()
Turn the pump off The PUMP light turns off The pump stops drawing
"E;" melted material through
the system.
Determine whether a All LED lights turn on while The fault was corrected
fault was corrected. the system begins a
five-second test. .At the end
of the test, the FAULT light
turns off.
CLEAR
FAULTS
A All LED lights turn on while
the system begins a
The fault was not
corrected.
five-second test. At the end
of the test, the FAULT light
stays on.

Original copyright date 2197. Nordson is a registered trademark of Nordson Corporation

2297nC 6 lssued 4/98

 Part A, Section 1

Safetlr

@894 Nordson Corporation A1 EN-02-[XX-SAFE]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 11/94
A 1-0 Safety

A1 EN-02-[XX-SAFE]-1 €994 Nordson Corporatlon

lssued 11/94 All rights reserved
 Safety A 1-1

Section A 1
Safety

1. Operate Safely Safety instructions contained in this section and throughout this
document apply to tasks that may be performed with or on the unit.
Warnings related to specific safety concerns are included within the text
as appropriate. lt is very important that these safety instructions are
always followed. Failure to do so could result in persbnal injury and/or
damage to the unit or other equipment.

With this in mind, here are some basic safety recommendations:

a Read and become familiar with this Safefysection prior to installing,

operating, maintaining, or repairing the unit.

a Read and follow the warnings which appear within the text and are
related to specific tasks.

a Store this document within easy reach of personnel operating or

maintaining the unit.

a Wear personal protective equipment and clothing such as safety

goggles and gloves.

a Familiarize yourself with and follow all safety instructions prescribed

by your company, general accident-prevention regulations, and
government safety regulations.

@ 1994 Nordson Corporatlon Al EN-02-[XX-SAFE]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 11/94
 A1-2 Safety

2. Safety Symbols The following symbols are used to warn against dangers or possible
sources of danger. Become familiar with them! Failure to heed a
warning could lead to personal injury and/or damage to the unit or other
equipment.

A WARNING: Failure to observe may result in personal injury

death, or equipment damage.

A WARNING: Risk of electrical shock. Failure to observe may

result in personal injury death, or equipment damage.

WARNING: Disconnect equipment from the line voltage.

@ WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

@ safety goggles, and/or heat-protective gloves depending on the

symbols shown.

@
@
a WARNING: Risk of explosion or fire. Fire, open flames, and
smoking prohibited.

A WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve pressure

Failure to observe may result in serious burns.

A CAUTION: Failure to observe may result in equipment

damage.

A CAUTION: Hot surface. Failure to observe may result in

burns.

A1 EN-o2-[XX-SAFE]-l €tr)94 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 11/94
 Safety A 1-3

3. Qualified Personnel "Qualified personnel" is defined here as individuals who thoroughly

understand the equipment and its safe operation, maintenance, and
repair. Qualified personnel are physically capable of performing the
required tasks, familiar with all relevant safety rules and regulations, and
have been trained to safely install, operate, maintain, and/or repair the
equipment. lt is the responsibility of the company operating the
equipment to see that its personnel meet these requirements.

4. lntended Use The unit is designed and intended to be used only for the purpose
described in lhe Description section. Uses not in accordance with that
section or as described in this document are considered unintended uses
and not in accordance with governing regulations.

WARNING: Use of this equipment in ways other than

described in this document may result in personal injury death,
or equipment damage.

The following actions of the owner or operator of the unit are some, but
not all, examples of unintended use which would permit Nordson to claim
it is not responsible for personal injury or property damage arising from
such unintended use:

a Unapproved modifications or changes to the unit

a Failure to comply with the safety instructions

a Failure to comply with instructions concerning installation, use,

operation, maintenance, or repair, or when these tasks are carried out
by unqualified personnel

a Use of inappropriate or incompatible foreign materials or auxiliary

equipment

a Failure to obserue workplace safety rules or regulations issued by

government authorities or safety councils

@ 1994 Nordson Corpoiation

All rights reserued
Al EN{2-[XX-SAFE]-1
lssued'11/94
A1-4 Safety

5. lnstallation and Electrical WARNING: Failure to follow the safety procedures can result in
injury or death.
Connections
a All electrical, pneumatic, gas, and hydraulic connections and
installations of hot melt equipment may only be carried out by
qualified personnel. Be sure to observe installation instructions for
components and accessories.

Equipment must be properly grounded and fused according to its

rated current consumption (see lD plate).

Cables which run outside the unit must regularly be checked for wear
or damage.

a Power supply wire gauge and insulation must be sufficient to handle

rated current consumption.

a Cables must never be squeezed or pinched. Do not locate cables or

hoses in high traffic areas.

6. Operation The unit should be operated by qualified personnel in accordance with

the instructions presented in this document.

WARNING: Failure to follow the safety procedures can result in

injury or death.

a Never allow the unit to be operated by personnel under the influence

of substances which reduce their reaction times, or who are not able
to operate the equipment for physical reasons.

a Prior to each start-up of the unit, check protection and warning

devices and make sure they are fully functional. Do not operate the
unit if these devices are not functioning properly.

a When the removal of safety equipment is required for installation,

maintenance, or repair of the unit, it must be re-connected
immediately upon completion of the work.

a Prior to start-up of the unit, check to make sure all safety guards and
safety equipment are in place and functioning properly.

Al EN-02-[XX-SAFE]-1 O 1994 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 11/94
 Safety A 1-5

6. Operation @ontd.)
a ln a humid environment, only equipment featuring a corresponding
class of protection may be operated.

a Do not operate the unit in an explosive environment.

a Keep parts of the body or clothing away from rotating parts. Do not
wear loose articles of clothing when operating or seruicing units with
rotating parts. Take off wrist watches, rings, necklaces, or similar
pieces of jewelry and pin up or cover long hair before performing any
work on or with the unit.

a To carry out measurements on work pieces, switch off the unit and
wait until it comes to a standstill.

a Never point hand guns or applicator nozzles at yourself or other

persons.

Less-Obvious Dangers WARNING: An operator or seruice technician working with the

unit should be aware of less-obvious dangers that often cannot
be completely minimized at production sites:

Exposed surfaces of the unit which cannot be practically

safeguarded. They may be hot and take time to cool after the unit
has been operating.

a The possibility that electrical potentials may remain in the unit after
the unit was de-energized

a Hot melt material and vapors

a Hydraulically or pneumatically operated parts of the unit

a Parts winding something up or down which are not covered

Action in the Event of Unit lf the unit malfunctions, switch it off immediately.
Malfunction
. Turn the circuit breaker or main power switch OFF.

. Have the unit repaired by qualified personnel only.

@ 1994 Nordson Corporation A1 EN-02-[XX-SAFE]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 11/94
A 1-6 Safety

Danger of Burns Contact with hot melt materials or hot areas of the unit may produce a
severe skin burn.

WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

safety goggles, and/or heat-protective gloves depending on the
symbols shown.

a Be extremely carefulwhen using hot melt material. Even solidified

material may still be very hot.

a Always wear protective clothing which safely covers all exposed parts
of the body.

ln case of burns:

. lmmediately cool affected skin areas using cold, clean water

. Do not forcefully remove hot melt materialfrom the skin.

. lmmediately seek medical attention.

7. Maintenance/Repair Allow only qualified personnelto perform the procedures described in this
document. When performing such tasks, wear protective clothing, and
equipment.
WARNING: Even when the circuit breaker or main power
switch is OFF, the unit is still electrically energized. Complete
the following steps prior to maintenance or repair:

a Disconnect, lock out, and tag external power supply

To ensure the external power supply is disconnected, attempt to

operate the unit. lf the unit does not energize, proceed with
maintenance or repair work.'

a lf the unit energizes, repeat the disconnect, lock out, and tag
procedure. Re-test the unit.

AI EN{2-[XX-SAFEI-1 @ '1994 Nordson Corporation

lssued 11/94 All rights reserved
 Safety A'l-7

7. Maintenance/Repair a Follow the specific instructions provided in this manual to relieve the
(contd.) system pressure in the entire unit.

a Secure pneumatically- or hydraulically-operated equipment against

uncontrolled movement.

a Only use parts which do not compromise the safety of the unit. Only
use genuine Nordson pafts.

Always use tools with insulated handles when removing or installing

components.

8. Cleaning NOTE: Always refer to the material manufacturer's Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) or material information sheet before working with any
material.

WARNING: Never clean any aluminum part or flush any

system using halogenated hydrocarbon fluids. Examples of
common halogenated hydrocarbons are: dichloromethylene,
1,1,1-trichloroethylene, and perchloroethylene. Halogenated
hydrocarbons may react violently with aluminum parts.

WARNING: Fire, open flame, and smoking are prohibited when

cleaning fluids are used. Observe allexplosion prevention
regulations. Cleaning fluids may only be heated using
temperature-controlled and explosion-protected heaters.

a Never use an open flame to clean the unit or components of the unit.

a Use only cleaning fluids designed or intended to be used with the hot
melt material being used in the unit. Never use paint fluids under any
circumstances.

a Note the flash point of the cleaning fluid used. Only use a controlled
heating method to heat fluids.

Ensure sutficient room ventilation to draw off generated vapors.

Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors.

@ 1994 Nordson Corporalion A1 EN-02-[XX-SAFE]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 11/94
A 1-8 Safety

9. Thermoplastic Hot Melt NOTE: Always refer to the material manufacturer's Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) or material information sheet before working with any hot
Material melt material.

a Ensure the work area is adequately ventilated.

a Do not exceed recommended processing temperatures. Doing so

creates a danger to personnel due to decomposition of the material

10. Equipment and Material Dispose of equipment and materials used in operation and cleaning
according to local regulations.
Disposal

Al EN-02-[XX-SAFE]-1 O 1994 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 11/94
 Part A, Section 2

Description

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model 3400v
Voltage Ail
Pump Piston (E, E or e)
Manifold Ail
Control Vista Standard (V)

@899 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000y A2EN43-[3V-4-AXXVI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 2/99
A 2-0 Description

A2 E N-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41 -3000y @899 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 2/99
 Description A2-1

Section A 2
Description

1. lntended Use Series 3400Vapplicators may be used only to melt and pump hot melt
material. They are not intended for use with polyurethane-reactive hot
melt material. Use the applicators only as described in this manual.

2. Overview This manual describes how to install, operate, and service a Series
3400Vapplicator. lt also explains how the applicator works with other
major components of a hot melt system.

This section of the manual describes the key parts of the applicator and
how they work. lt includes the following topics:

Fu nctional Description

Major Components

ControlSystem

a Specifications

a Dimensions

a Explanation of Configuration Code

For information about any options or accessories you may have ordered
with your unit, refer lo the Options section.

@ 1999 Nordson Corporation 41 -3000y A2 E N-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2

All dghls reserved
lssued 2/99
A2-2 Description

3. Functional Description The Series 34007applicator is the main component of your hot melt
system. The applicator melts the adhesive, controls it at your setpoint
(operating) temperatures, and pumps it through hoses to the dispensing
guns. The dispensing guns apply the adhesive to the surface of your
product or package.

Figure A 2-1 shows a Series 34007applicator along with other key

components of a hot melt system.

41XOO21

Fig. A 2-1 Hot Melt System with a Series 3400VApplicator

The applicator has three basic modes of operation:

. the startup mode
. the operating mode
. the standby mode
Each mode is briefly described in the following paragraphs.

A2EN-03-[3V{-AXXVI-2 41-3000y @ 1999 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 2/99
 Description A2-g

Startup Mode During a sequential stafiup, when the clock timer or an operator turns the
system on, the tank and hoses begin to heat first. After the temperatures
of the tank and hoses are all within 19.5 "C (35 'F) of their setpoint
temperatures, the guns begin to heat. When the tank, hoses, and guns
are within 3 'C (5 "F) of their setpoint temperatures, a time delay begins.
The time delay, which you can adjust, provides additional time for the
material in the tank to melt. At the end of the time delay, the green
READY light turns on, indicating that the system is ready for operation.
You can program the system so the pump starts automatically, either
when the READY light turns on or when the tank reaches the
temperature you have specified. Or you can program the system so the
pump must be started manually.

The capability to heat all zones simultaneously is also available

Operating Mode When you trigger a gun, the pump draws in the melted adhesive and
sends it through a manifold, a filtet and a hose to the gun, which then
applies the adhesive to the product or package surface. Figure A2-2
shows the components of a typical hot melt system and the path that
melted adhesive follows when being pumped through the system. ln
most systems, an air-operated automatic gun is used to apply the melted
adhesive. An electrically driven gun or a handgun (shown in dotted lines
in Figure A2-2) may also be used to apply adhesive.

Standby Mode When you place the applicator in the standby mode, the controlsystem
disables the pump and reduces the temperature of all heating zones to
the standby temperature setpoints you have selected. You can use the
standby mode to keep the adhesive warm when normal operation must
be interrupted for a while. The lower temperature reduces char formation
and conserves energy.

@899 Nordson Corporation 4't-3000v A2 E N-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2

All dghts reserved
lssued 2/99
A2-4 Description

I
10

13
11

12 4'103990

Fig. A2-2 Adhesive Flow Path of a Typical Hot Melt System (standard filter shown)
1. Air piston 6. Tank 11. Hose
2. Air cylinder 7. Pressure relief valve 12. Air-operated gun
3. Pump 8. Manifold 13. Handgun and hose
4. Air pressure regulator 9. Manifold filter
5. Hydraulic plunger 10. Drain valve

A2EN43-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41-3000y @D999 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 2/99
 Description A2-5

4. Major Components The major components of the applicator are briefly described on the
following pages.

2-3 Major Components

Fig. A of a Typical Series 3400VApplicator
1. Pump 4. Manifold components
2. Tank 5. Operator panel
3. Air pressure regulator

€D999 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v A2 E N-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2

All dghts reserued
lssued ?99
A 2-G Description

TanR The tank melts the adhesive and holds it until it is pumped to the
dispensing guns. With its aluminum construction, cast-in heaters, and
integral melting fins, the tank is designed for efficient heat transfer. A
strainer in the tank prevents unmelted adhesive from blocking the pump
inlet when you fill the tank. lt also prevents pieces of cardboard and
other small objects from entering the pump.

The standard tank is Teflon-coated for easy cleaning. A non-coated tank

is available on some units.

Refer to Specifications in this section for the tank storage capacity and
other key information about the tank.

4 3

atanTAl

Fig. A2-4 Key Parts of the Tank

1. Tank casting 3. Melting fins
2. Strainer 4. Heater connectors

A2 EN-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41 -3000v Gr999 Nordson Corporatlon

lssued 2/99 All rights reserved
 Description A2-7

Pump The pump transfers the melted adhesive from the tank to the dispensing
guns. With its dual-acting design, the piston pump delivers adhesive to
the product or package surface on both the upstroke and the downstroke.

The pump has three main parts:

. an air motor
. a hydraulic section
. an actuator
Refer to Specitications in this section for the pump delivery rate and other
key information about the pump.

at3n6so

Fig. A 2-5 Key Pafts of the Pump

1. Air motor
2. Hydraulic section
3. Actuator

@ 1999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A2 E N-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 2/99
A 2-8 Description

Manifold The manifold directs the flow of adhesive from the pump to the filter and
from the filter to the hoses and guns.

The manifold has four main parts:

. a manifold block with hose connectors
. a manifold filter
. a drain valve
. a pressure relief valve

3 2
,tcnAce

Fig. A 2-6 Key Parts of the Manifold

1. Manifold block with hose 3. Manifold filter
connectors 4. Pressure relief valve
2. Drain valve

Manitold Block and Hose Connectors

The manifold block has a 45-degree face for either horizontal or vertical
hose routing. A maximum of four hoses can be connected to the
manifold.

Manifold Filter
The manifold filter traps any char or foreign material, keeping it from
being pumped to the hoses and guns. The applicator is shipped with a
0.1S-mm (0.006-in.) filter screen. Other screen sizes are available.

A2 E N-03-[3V-/I-AXXVJ-2 41-3000y @ 1999 Nordson Corporallon

All dqhts reserved
lssued 2/99
 Description A 2-9

Drain Valve
The drain valve allows you to drain the tank and manifold or to flush char
and debris from the filter screen. Operators can perform the filter flushing
procedure without removing the filter from the manifold.

Pressure Relief Valve

The pressure relief valve prevents system hydraulic pressure from
exceeding 10,400 kPa (1500 psi). At this pressure, the valve opens and
returns adhesive to the tank.

Air Pressure Regulator The air pressure regulator allows you to adjust the system air pressure,
which controls the hydraulic pressure.

The regulator assembly has three main parts:

1
o a regulator
. a filter
. a gauge
The gauge indicates the air pressure and the filter removes contaminants
from the plant air supply.

2
3

4130666

Fig. A2-7 Key Parts of the Air

Pressure Regulator
1. Regulator
2. Filter
3. Air pressure gauge

Operator Panel The operator panel provides the controls and indicators you need to,
program, operate, and monitor your hot melt system. The key functions
of the operator panel are described in the next part of this section,
ControlSystem.

@ 1999 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000y A2 EN-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2

All dghts reserved
lssued 2/99
A 2-10 Description

5. Control System The control system regulates alltemperature settings and controls how
the unit functions. The operator panel allows you to program the system
to meet changing needs:

a Heated zones are controlled individually, giving you more flexibility in

setting up your system.

a With the seven-day clock feature, you can tailor operations for a week
at a time, with different schedules for each day of the week.

The control system is designed so that a brownout or power failure will

not cause a loss of your programmed settings.

Features of the Operator Panel
The operator panel provides the controls, indicators, and messages
needed to operate the system. lt is divided into four functional areas:
. System Status
o Displays
o System Setup
. System Controls

Vlstr EFAULT
A fI
EADY
1

5A 35tF I
2
A V <J
IlIE^w
Of* iSrr
EEE
O!.*

oQffi A
(r"* 3
OO'q-*
4- o&m-
obm-
\J':
o@*** I{BA
c)E
o@o-* 12

4103925

Fig. A 2-8 Operator Panel

1. System Status area 3. System Setup area
2. Displays area 4. System Controls area

A2EN{3-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41-3000v O '1999 Nordson Corporalion

All rights resewed
lssued 2/99
 Description A2-11

System Status Area The System Status area of the operator panel gives you a quick
summary of the status of your system. The FAULT and READY lights let
you know if the system is prepared for operation.

1 2

Vista* FAULT
A READY
J
alnaorA

Fig. A 2-9 System Status Area

1. FAULT light 2. READY light

FAULT Light
The red FAULT light indicates different types of fault conditions. Refer to
Table A 2-1.

Table A 2-1 System Notification of FAULT Conditions

FAULT Light Status (see Note) System Condition
FAULT light turns on and stays A heater zone is overtemperature.
on

FAULT light flashes for two A resistance temperature detector

minutes, then stays on.
FAU[T light flashes continuously.
(RTD) in any zone is open or
shorted.
A heater zone is out of band,
either high or low.
A heater zone is more than
19.5'C (35 "F) underthe
setpoint temperature.

NOTE: When the FAULT light turns on and stays on, the system
removes heater power for all zones. When the FAULT light flashes,
heater power stays on.

READY Light
The green READY light turns on when the following conditions exist:
. All zones are within +/- 3 'C (+/- 5 'F) of the setpoint temperatures.
. The system-ready time delay has elapsed.
. No faults exist.

@ 1999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A2 E N-03-[3V-4-AXXV1-2

All righls reserved
lssued 2/99
 A2-12 Description

Displays Area The Displays area of the operator panel gives you detailed information
about the status of your system. When you are running the system, it
shows the status of each heating zone. When you are customizing the
system, it shows your current system setup.

1 2 3

I
l 15frF )5tF I
*J
6 5 4

Fig. A 2-10 Displays Area

1. Selector display 4. Enter key
2. Multipurpose display 5. Up and Down keys
3. Actualtemperaturedisplay 6. Up key

Selector Display and Up Key

The Selector display allows you to access information about the status of
your system during operation and system setup. The display

a shows the selected zone number when used with TEMPERATURE

and when scanning

a shows the day when used with CLOCK

a shows the feature number when used with SYSTEM SETTINGS

The Up key, which is located below the Selector display, changes the
value of a setting.

o
A2 EN-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41-3000y @ 1999 Nordson Corporalion
All righls reserved
lssued ?99
 Description A 2-13

Multipurpose Display and Keys

During normal operation, the Multipurpose display shows the setpoint
temperature for a selected zone. This allows you to compare the actual
temperature of the displayed zone with its targeted temperature.

Actu al Temperatu re Display

The ActualTemperature display shows the actualtemperature of the
heated zone. When the scan mode is enabled, each zone is displayed in
sequence. When the scan mode is disabled, only the temperature for the
selected zone is displayed.

Enter Key
The Enter key saves the number shown in the Multipurpose display.

@999 Nordson Corpctction 41-3000v A2 E N-03-[3V{I-AXXVI-2

All righls reserved
lssued 2/99
4,2-14 Description

System Setup Area The System Setup area of the operator panel allows you to customize the
system to your needs. From this area you can control
. the temperature at which each zone operates (TEMPERATURE)

*"*
TEMPERAIURE
3 o how the unit operates (SYSTEM SETTINGS)
Of r-ti-tt
E EE
o when the system operates (CLOCK)
O[ro'"o 0mru rcow
To customize system controls, use the keys in the System Setup area in
4 conjunction with the keys in the Displays area.

o Ow* Move Up and Move Down Keys

1
The Move Up and Move Down keys select features within the System
5
@ c.oo< Setup area, allowing you to tailor the system to your needs. You can
2 select the following features using the Move Up and Move Down keys:
O Qe*,o
nFm
. SETPOINT temperature
\-/ l, smry . STANDBY temperature
oFm* . SYSTEM SETTINGS
'@. . SET TIME
O@*** INTEF/AL
EE O ENTER STANDBY
O @ *,o,o*
12 . EXIT STANDBY
. HEATERSON
. HEATERS OFF
Fig. A 2-11 System Setup Area
1. Move Up and Move Down keys
2. Move Right key
3. TEMPERATUREaTea
4. SYSTEM SETTINGS area
5. CLOCK area

Move Right Key

The Move Right key selects features within the System Setup area,
allowing you to tailor the system to your needs. You can select the
following features using the Move Right key:
. INTERNAL zone
o HOSE zone
. GUN zone
. INTERVAL 1
. INTERVAL 2

A2 EN-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41-3000v @ '1999 Nordson Corporation

lssued 2/99 All rights reserved
 Description A2-15

TEMPERATURE ATea
From the TEMPERATURE area you can program the setpoint and
standby temperatures for three types of heated zones: internal, hose, or
gun.

When used in the TEMPERATURE area,

o The Move Up and lt/ove Down keys select SETPOINT or STANDBY

a The Move Right key selects the zone type (internal, hose, or gun) for:
prog ram min g temperatu res (standby or setpoi nt).

SYSTEM SETTINGS Area

From the SYSTEM SETTINGS area you can customize or check the
settings of the following system features:
. password enable
. system-ready time delay
o overtemperature setpoint
o Celsius or Fahrenheit units
o globaltemperaturebands
o individualtemperaturebands
o sequential startup or simultaneous startup
. display heater proportioning
. warning or power notification
. ready or pump notification
o auto-energize pump
o auto-energizeheaters
o time with heaters on
o fault log display
. auto-energize pump temperature setting

CLOCK Area
From the CLOCK area you can program the system to turn heaters on or
off or to place the system in standby or operating mode at a time that you
select. The clock stores two sets of times, referred to as intervals. Each
interval stores four settings as shown in Table A2-2.

Table A 2-2 lnterval Settings

INTERVAL 1 INTERVAL 2
Standby Settings Enter Enter
Exit Exit
Heater Settings On On
off off

@ 1999 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000y A2 EN-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 2/99
A 2-16 Description

System Controls Area The System Controls area of the operator panel allows you to control
basic system operations and override programmed controls. The lights in
this area tell you whether a feature is on or off. Using the keys and
switches in this area, you can

Monitor the status of a particular zone, or scan each zone to check its
1
status.
2 a Take the system into or out of standby.
!o 3
a Turn the heaters on or off.
4
a Turn the clock feature on or off. (This is useful when you do not want
Oo o the system to start automatically.)
5
e
+o o t
a Turn the pump on or off.
7
ffiA a Run a system test to determine whether a fault that the system has
detected was corrected.

@ a Turn main power to the applicator on or off

41

Fig. A2-12 System Controls Area

1. MONITOF/SCAN key and light
2. STANDBY key and light
3. HEATERS key and light
4. CLOCK key and light
5. PUMP key and light
6. CLEAR FAULTS key
7. POWER switch
MONITOR/SCAN Key and Light
Pressing the MONITOR/SCAN key places the system in the monitor or
scan mode. ln the scan mode,

a The system scans each heated zone, displaying each zone's

temperature in sequence.

a lf the system-ready time delay feature is active, the system shows the
number of minutes remainin! until the system is ready for operation.

a The MONITOR/SCAN light turns on and stays on.

A2EN-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41 -3000v @ 1999 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 2/99
 Description A2-17

MONITOR/SCAN Key and Light (contd.)

ln the monitor mode,

a The system displays the temperature of only the zone currently

selected.

a lf the system-ready time delay feature is active and is currently

selected for monitoring, the system shows the number of minutes
remaining until the system is ready for operation.

a The MONITORiSCAN light stays on

STANDBY Key and Light

Pressing the STANDBY key when the HEATERS tight is on takes the
system into or out of the standby mode. When the standby feature is
active,

o The STANDBY light turns on.

o The READY light turns off.

. The pump turns ofi.

. Temperatures on allzones drop untilthe temperature of each zone

reaches the preselected standby temperature.

o The HEATERS light remains on.

lf the HEATERS light is not on, you cannot place the system in the
standby mode.

When the standby feature is disabled,

o The STANDBY light turns off.

o The heaters turn on and all zones begin heating.

lf the auto-energize pump feature is active, the pump turns on either

when the system reaches the ready condition or when the tank
reaches the temperature you have specified.

a After all zones have reached their preselected setpoint temperature,

the READY light turns on.

@ 1999 tlordson Corporation

All rights reseryed
41-3000y A2EN43-[3V-4-AXXVI-2
lssued 2/99
A2-18 Description

HEATERS Key and Light

Pressing the HEATERS key turns power to the heaters on and off. The
heaters must be turned on for the unit to operate.

The HEATERS light turns on when this feature is active.

NOTE: lf the system is set for auto-energize heaters, the heaters are
automatically enabled and the HEATERS light turns on when the
POWER switch is turned on.

CLOCK Key and Light

Pressing the CLOCK key turns the seven-day clock on and off. When
the clock is on, the system is controlled by the settings for ENTER
STANDBY EXIT STANDBY HEATERS ON, and HEATERS OFF.

The CLOCK light turns on when this feature is active.

NOTE: lf the clock feature is enabled when the POWEH switch is turned
otf, it will automatically be enabled when the switch is turned back on.
The CLOCK light will turn on to show that the clock feature is enabled.

PUMP Key and Light

Pressing the PUMP key turns the pump on and off. The PUMP light
turns on when this feature is active.

NOTE: lf the system is set for auto-energize pump, the pump turns on
either when the READY light turns on or when the tank reaches the
temperature you have specified.

CLEAR FAULTS Key

Pressing the CLEAR FAULTS key runs a system test. The test lasts five
seconds and verifies that the problem causing a system fault was
corrected. lf the problem was corrected, the FAULT light in the System
Status area of the operator panel will turn off once the test is completed.
lf the problem was not corrected, the FAULT light will stay on.

POWER Switch
Pressing the POWER switch turns power to the applicator on or off.

A2 EN-03-[3V-/I-AXXVI-2 41-3000v GD999 Nordson Corporallon

All righls reserved
lssued 2/99
 Description A 2-19

6. Specifications
Table A 2-3 Applicator Specifications
!tem Specification Notes
General
Weight of Empty Unit 200-240 Yac 3A and 400/230 Yac 3A units: 38 kg (83 lb) A
400 Vac 3A and 480 Vac 32 units: 68 kg (151 lb)
Weight of Full Unit 200-240 Yac 3A and 400/230 Vac 3A units: 43.4 kg (95 lb) A
400 Vac 3A and 480 Vac 32 units: 74 kg (163 lb)
Hose Ports 4
Melt Rate 6.8 kg/hr (1s lb/hr)
Work Place Temperature Range H0 0c (32-104.F)
Noise Level 64 dB (A) at maximum pump speed B
ElectricaUControls
Electrical Service 200-240 Vac 1A or 3A A
230 Vac (with neutral) 1A or 4001230 Vac (with neutral) 30
400Yac3A
48OYac3A C
Hose/Gun Heating Capacity 2 or 4 hose/gun pairs c
Control Temperature Range 38-1232.C ('t00-450.F)
Control Temperature Accu racy +/- 0.5'C (+/- 1 'F)
Pump
Air Pressure while Running 70-620 kPa (10-90 psi)
Viscosity 800-30,000 mPa.s (up to 30,000 cps)
Hydraulic Pressure (maximum while 6:1 pump:3700 kPa (540 psi) D
running) 14:1 pump:8700 kPa (1260 psi)
Air Consumption at 415 kPa (60 psi) 6:1 pump: 20 l/min (0.7 standard ft3/min1 D
and Maximum Pump Speed 14:1 pump: 46 l/min (1.6 standard fts/min;
Displacement 6:1 pump: 16.00 ml/stroke (1.00 in.3/stroke) D
14:1 pump: 7.20 ml/stroke (0.44 in.3/stroke)
Output Rate (maximum) 6:1 or 14:1 pump: 0.54 kg/min (1.2|blmin) E
Speed (maximum) 6:1 pump: 40 strokes/min D
14:1 pump: 90 strokes/min
Tank
Capacity 5.4 kg (12|b)
Volume 5.6 liters (340 in.3)
NOTE A: To determine the electrical service of your unit, refer lo Explanation of Configuration Code at the end of this section.
B: The noise level is measured at a distance of 1 m from the surface of the unit and at a height of 1.6 m from the
access platform.
C: To determine the number of hose and gun pairs that your unit can heat, refer to Explanation of Configuration Code
at the end of this section.
D: To determine the air motor ratio of the pump on your unit, referto Exptanation of Configuration Code althe end of
this section.
E: The output rate is based on a material density of 0.84 g/ml (0.03 lO/in.3) and a specific gravity of 0.84.

GD999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v EN-03-[3V-4-AXXVJ-2

A2
All rights reserved
lssued 299
A2-2O Description

7. Dimensions
l
tD

-T-
t N
c
_l_
J

EEHE
F.=Effil

B
F1
F2
I K
L H

F3
l'-t- n t
F4
F5

4130848A

Fig. A 2-13 References for Applicator Dimensions and Clearances

Table A 2-4 Series 3400VApplicator Dimensions in Millimeters (lnches)

Dimension mm (in.) Note Dimension mm (in.) Note Dimension mm (in.) Note
A 207 (8.16) 1 F1 381 (15.00) 6 K
B 2e8 (11.75) 2 G 343 (13.50) L 62 (2.24) 7
C 38 (1.50) 3 H 24e (9.80) M 110 (4.32)
D 237 (e.33) 4 322 (12.6e) N 165 (6.50) 8
E 51e (20.42) 5 J 55e (22.00)
NOTE 1: Clearance needed to remove filter.
2. Clearance needed to open control panel.
3. Clearance needed to remove electrical enclosure cover.
4. Clearance needed to remove pump cover.
5. 400 Vac 3Z units = 595 (23.42). 480 Vac 32 units =774 (30.47).
6. F2=432(17.00),F3=457 (18.00),F4=584(23.00),andF5=635(25.00). 400Yac3A units=F3. 480Yac3A
units can be installed to fit footprints F1 through F5.
7. 480 Vab 3Z units = 64 (2.50).
8. Size of tank opening = '140 mm x 125 mm (5.50 in. x 4.9'1 in.).

A2EN{3-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41-3000y €u)99 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserued
lssued 2/99
 Description A2-21

8. Explanation of To determine the features, options, and specifications your unit has,
check the unit number (configuration code) printed on your shipping order
Configuration Code or on your unit. To find the code on your unit, look at the identification
plate located above the hose ports (see Figure A2-14).

Once you have located the configuralion code, refer to the following code
descriptions and example to determine the specific features and options
of your unit.

654321
oo o

NORDSON CORP. , AMHERST, OHIO, POWER REQUIREMENTS

UNIT NO. VOLTS (ac)
TEMP HZ AMPS (Mat<.) @
SERIAL NO. 0 WATTS (Max.)

4t30667

Fig. A2-14 Location of Unit Number (Configuration Code)

@999 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
41-3000v A2 EN{3-[3V-/I-AXxvl-2
lssued 2/99
A2-22 Description

Code Descriptions To determine the features and options specific to your unit, match the
code in each code position (Boxes 1-11) to the codes in the following
chart. The chart provides a description for each code. For more
information, see the example following the chart.

MEEET EEII@
ffi ffi ffi ffi ffi n
EEIreItr

il 2 g tit ta td f/ !EI

EIIII
il Model Code
Series 3100 Y 3100v
Series 3400V 3400v
Series 3500Y 3500v
Series 3700V 3700v
Series 3830Y 3830V
Series 3860Y 3860V
Series 3890Y 3890V
Series 3930Y 3930V
Series 3960Y 3960V

!I9l!!
2 Voltage Code
2OO-240 Vac 1A ot 3Q 1

230 Vac (with neutral) 10, or 4001230 Vac (with 2

neutral) 3Z
400Yac3A 3
48OYac3A 4

lEran
F] Pump/Drive Code
6:1 piston pump G
14:1 piston pump E
21:1 piston pump F
1tshp,24O Vac drive gear pump L
1/3 hp, zOO Vac drive gear pump K

I:Iix
tt ManifolcUFilter Code
Non-circulating 4-port manifold with standard filter A
Non-circulating 6-port manifold with standard filter B
Non-circulating 6-port manifold with reverse-flush filter c
Non-circulating 4-pon manifold with standard filter and J
pressure control valve
Externally circulating 2-port manifold with circulation S
control valve and standard filter
Externally circulating 2-port manifold with circulation T
control valve and reverse-flush filter

A2EN{3-[3V-4-AXXVI-2 41-3000y o 1999 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 2/99
 Description A2-23

Code Description @ontd.)

ffi ffi ffi ffi ffi

ftFTTI IIGIIEE gIiE@

I a EI EI td a
!l z LEN

:f-tl
n E Vista Controls Code
Vista control (standard) V
Vista pattern control (PC) P
Vista temperature control (TC) T

tElrtt
r.l Electrical Control Capacity Gode
2 hose/gun pairs 2
4 hose/gun pairs 4
6 hose/gun pairs 6

IErifi
E z Language Tags Code
English/German D
English/French F
English/Japanese N

ffi Options
Low-level indicator
Code
A
lnpuUoutput board (standard) G
lnpuUoutput board with hose/gun disable (enhanced) H
lnpuUoutput board for TC controller J
CE certification R

@ 1999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A2 E N-03-[3V-4-AXXVI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 2/99
A2-24 Description

Example The following example shows how the code 3400V-2EAV4D/AR can be
used to determine the features and options of the unit.

I
hvtGFllll

a4oovE
trEE
ffi ffi ffi ffi ffi n
EEEEEE

AR
il 2 FI m 5 71 t:EI

Table A 2-5 Explanation of Example Configuration Code

Box Description Note
1 Series 3400V
2 230 Vac (with neutral) 1O service or 4001230 Vac (with neutral) 3A service A
3 14:1 piston pump
4 Non-circulating 4-port manifold with a standard filter

5 Standard Vista control system

6 Electrical capacity for heating 4 hose/gun pairs

7 Unit tags in English and German

8 Low-level indicator included as an option

I CE certification included as an option
NOTE A: All units are shipped ready for three-phase operation but include a voltage plug (and a wiring harness
on some units) that allows you to quickly convert from three-phase operation to single-phase operation
Refer to Preparing the Unit for Single-Phase Operation in the lnstallation section.

A2EN{3-[3ViI-AXXVI-2 41-3000v @tr 99 Nordson Corporation

lssued 2/99 All rights resewed
 Part A, Section 3

lnstallation

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model 3100y
3400v
3500v
Voltage 4
Pump Piston (E, E or G)
Manifold 4-Port (A)
6-Port (B or C)
2-Port (S orT)
Control Vista Standard (V)

@O00 Nordson Corporallon .;.- 41-3000v A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXV]-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-0 lnstallation

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXyj-1 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-1

Section A 3
!nstallation

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform the

following tasks. Follow the safety instructions in this document
and all other related documentation.

1. lntroduction This section of the manual describes how to

. installthe unit, hoses, and guns
. program system settings
. prepare the unit for operation
lf you have purchased optional features with your unit, such as a
low-level indicator or an inpuVoutput (l/O) board, refer to the Options
section of this manual for installation instructions.

2. Unpacking Besides using normal care, you need no special instructions to unpack
the unit or the equipment you purchased with it. All hoses and guns are
shipped in separate packages.

3. lnspection After unpacking the equipment, inspect it for any damage that may have
occurred during shipping. Look for dents and scratches and make sure
all fasteners are tight. Report any damage to your Nordson
representative.

4. lnstallation This part of the installation section gives you the installation requirements
and recommendations that you need to know before installing your unit.
Requirements It includes
. LocationRequirements
o Wiring Requirements
. Hose/Gun Power Requirements
Other requirements and recommendations are provided in the installation
procedures when they are needed.

O 2000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 A3-2 lnstallation

Location Requirements Carefully select the location for the unit and its associated guns and
hoses. Make sure that the location meets the following requirements:

a There is enough room to open the tank lid, open the electrical
enclosure, remove the filter assembly, remove the pump enclosure,
and make electrical connections for the hoses. For unit dimensions
and recommended clearances, refer to Dimensions in lhe Description
section of this manual.

a An operator can reach all controls.

a Maintenance personnel have room to service and repair the unit.

a lnstallers can route the hoses without bending them. The minimum
bend radius for hoses is shown in Figure A 3-7.

a The mounting surface can support the weight of the unit when the unit
is filled with adhesive. Refer lo Specificatlons in lhe Description
section of this manual.

a The mounting surface is level.

The mounting surface is raised at least 152 mm (6 in.) for draining

adhesive. See Figure A 3-1.

a The drain valve projects over the edge of the mounting surface.

152 mm
(6.0 in.)

413068sA

Fig. A 3-1 Required Clearance for Draining and Filter Flushing

ASEN-04-[3V-X-4XXV]-1 3 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00

Wiring Requirements
Hose/Gun Power Requi rements
@ 2000 Nordson Corporation
All rights reserved
lnstallation A 3-3
Follow these guidelines when installing wiring to the unit:
Allow enough room to route your electrical service line to the unit.
You can use either of the two access holes in the base of the unit for
electrical seruice. One hole is for rear access and the other is for
bottom access.
Route any wires away from AC power lines, solenoid output lines,
and electrical equipment such as motors, contacts, and relays.
a Make connections with the minimum length of wire needed. A long
wire can act as an antenna for electrical noise.
The power requirements of your hoses and guns must be determined to
make sure that you do not overload the unit. lf your Nordson
representative has not already checked to see that your unit can support
all of the hoses and guns you plan to install, you need to calculate your
hose/gun power requirements now. You also need to check your
calculations if you change your system configuration or add new hoses
and guns.
To determine your hose/gun power requirements, refer lo Calculating
Hose/Gun Capacity al the end of this manual. lf you need help with this
procedu re, contact you r Nordson representative.
41-3000v A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3
lssued 5/00
A 3-4 lnstallation

5. Mechanical lnstallation This part of the installation section gives you the procedures for installing
the unit mechanically. lt includes
o Mounting the Unit
o lnstalling the Tank Strainer
. Connecting the Air Supply
. lnstalling Guns
o lnstalling Hoses
On some units, you will not be required to complete all of these
procedures. For electrical installation procedures, referto Electrical
lnstallation later in this section.

Mounting the Unit Use this procedure to mount your unit.

1. Flemove the bolts that secure the unit to the shipping pallet. Save the
bolts for later use.

2. For installation within the European Community, find the packet of

adhesive-backed, local-language warning tags that was shipped with
the unit. Overlay the non-English language part of the tags already
on this unit with the tags from the packet in your own language.
Carefully follow the instructions in the packet for the correct
placement of the tags.

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXyj-1 3 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights resewed
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-5

WARNING: Take care when lifting the unit. Using inadequate

means to lift the unit can cause equipment damage, personal
injury or both.

3. Using a suitable lifting device that is capable of lifting the unit, position
the unit on the mounting surface. To determine the weight of your
unit, refer lo Specificafions in the Descripfion section of this manual.

4. Check to see that the unit is level. Provide shims as needed.

5. Using the unit's base as a guide, drillfour holes in the mounting

surface for 8-mm (5/16-in.) mounting bolts.

6. See Figure A 3-2. Secure the unit to the mounting surface with the
bolts you removed in step 1.

(E) TED

Fig. A 3-2 Securing the Unit to the Mounting Surface

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXyJ-1 3

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-6 lnstallation

lnstalling the Tank Strainer
This procedure describes how to install the tank strainer on Series 3000y
units that have tank strainers. The following units have tank strainers:
. Series 3100Y
. Series 34O0V
. Series 3500 Y
The model number of each unit is listed on the front panel of the unit. lf
your unit does not have a strainer, go to the next procedure, Connecting
the Air Supply. lf it has a strainer, complete this procedure.

1. Locate the tank strainer that was shipped with your unit. lf you have
a Series 3500Vunit, you willfind two strainers.

2. Serles 3500V units only: See Figure A 3-3. Determine the correct
strainer to use for your adhesive, the small strainer or the large
strainer. lf the solid adhesive form you plan to use is small enough to
pass through the holes in the strainers (both strainers have the same
size holes), use the large strainer. lf the solid adhesive is too large to
pass through the holes, use the small strainer.

o
o
o
o
o
o o
o o

o
o
o o
o o
o o
o o o
o o o o
o o o o
4130686

Fig. A 3-3 Small Strainer (left) and Large Strainer (right)

3. Remove allwrapping from the strainer. Small pieces of wrapping can

cause blockage in the pump.

4. Open the tank lid.

5. Place the strainer on the fins in the bottom of the tank. Position the
cutout in the strainer around the pump.

6. Close the tank lid

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 41 -3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-7

Connecting the Air Supply Follow this procedure to connect the air supply to your unit.

1. See Figure A 3-4. lnstall the air pressure regulator, gauge, and filter
that were shipped with your unit.

2. Turn the regulator fully counterclockwise (off).

NOTE: Noidson recommends installing a shutoff valve with a

lock-out in the air supply line to isolate the unit from the air supply for
maintenance procedures.

3. Connect a supply of clean, dry air to the input air fitting or shutoff
valve.

NOTE: To achieve the rated adhesive output of the unit, you must
connect a plant air supply that is capable of providing the maximum
air pressure specified on the unit. The maximum air pressure is either
483 kPa (70 psi) or 620 kPa (90 psi), depending upon the type of
pump your unit has. To find the maximum air pressure for your unit,
check the air pressure tag, which is located next to the inlet air port,
above the hose connectors.

4130014A

Fig. A 3-4 Installing the Air Pressure Regulator, Gauge, and Filter

e000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-8 lnstallation

lnstalling Guns This part of the installation section refers you to the correct installation
procedure for the type of gun you plan to install. Use Figure A 3-5 to
determine which type of gun you are installing, an air-operated gun, an
electric gun, or a hand-operated gun. Then refer to one of the following
procedures:
o To lnstallan Air-Operated Gun
. To lnstall an Electric Gun
o To lnstalla Hand-Operated Gun

NOTE: Air-operated and electric guns are also referred to as automatic

guns.

4130692

Fig. A 3-5 Air-Operated Gun (left), Electric Gun (center), and Hand-Operated Gun (right)

To lnstall an Air-Operated Gun

Follow the instructions in the manual shipped with the gun to complete
these procedures:
. Mount the gun on the production line.
o lnstall the gun solenoid valve.
o Connect air to the solenoid valve.
. Connect a triggering device to the solenoid valve.
. Connect a hose to the gun.
lnstructions for connecting the hose and gun cordsets are given later in
this section. Refer to Connecting Gun and Hose Cordsets.

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 4't-3000v O 2000 Nordson Corporalion

lssued 5/00 All righls reserved
 lnstallation A 3-9

To lnstall an Electric Gun

Follow the instructions in the manual shipped with the gun to complete
the following procedures:
o lvlount the gun on the production line.
. lnstallthe gun driver.
. Connect power to the driver.
o Connect a triggering device to the driver.
. Connect a hose to the gun.
lnstructions for connecting the hose and gun cordsets are given later in
this section. Refer to Connecting Gun and Hose Cordsets.

To lnstall a Hand-Operated Gun

Follow the instructions in the manual shipped with the gun to connect the
hose to the hand-operated gun. One end of the hose is wired to the gun;
the other end connects to the unit. lnstructions for connecting the hose
and gun cordsets are given later in this section. Refer to Connecting Gun
and Hose Cordsets.

o 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3EN.04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 A 3-10 lnstallation

lnstalling Hoses Follow this procedure to route the hoses and connect them to the guns
and the unit.

lf your system is designed for external circulation of the adhesive, which

requires both supply and return hoses, you must follow a different
procedure for installing hoses. Go to lnstallation Procedures for
Externally Circulating Systems at the end of this section.

1. Follow the instructions in the gun manual to connect a hose to each

gun, but do not connect the gun cordsets at this time.

2. Determine whether your unit has a four-poft or a six-port manifold.

Figure A 3-6 shows both manifolds and the hose port numbers on
each type of manifold. Note that the first hose port on a six-port
manifold is located on the back side of the unit.

654321 6s4321

H H

o
((o)) (c< r(G 1

432 1 65432 4130688

Fig. A 3-6 Four-Port Manifold (left) and Six-Port Manifotd (right)

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-1 3 41 -3000v q00 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All righls reserved
 lnstallation A 3-11

3. Decide where to install the first hose by referring to the following

table. Choose the instructions that apply to the type of manifold on
your unit. '
Type of Manifold lnstructions
Four-port manifold Use hose port number 1.

Six-port manifold Use hose port number 1 or 2. ll

you plan to install six hoses
(either now or in the future), use
hose port number 1 for the first
hose (see Note A). lf you plan to
install less than six hoses, you
can use hose port number 2 for
the first hose.

NOTE A: To install six hoses, your unit must have the ability to heat
six hoses. Check to see if your unit has six hose electrical
receptacles. Units can be ordered with two, four, or six
receptacles.

CAUTION: Failure to connect the first hose as instructed

I
a
creates a dead area where char builds up, causing downtime.

WARNING: Hose ports that are unused must be closed with a

plug. Removing plugs can cause hot adhesive to spray or flow
from the port and injure operators.

4. Route the hose from the gun back to the unit. Make sure the hose
does not contact sharp or abrasive surfaces. Follow the hose-routing
guidelines shown in Figure A3-7.

e000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reseled
lssued 5/00
 A3-12 lnstallation

lnstalling Hoses @ontd.)

P/N 111 940

X=13 mm (0.50 in.) I

IH
R=203 mm (8.00 in.)

{ .J

P|N271486-8 mm (5/16 in.)

PIN 274 174 - 16 mm (5/B in.)
PIN 274 174 - 29 mm (1 1/8 in.)

:::)..

592001

Fig. A 3-7 Hose lnstallation Guidelines

A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-1 3 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporatlon

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-13

5. Remove the O-ring plug from the hose port where you plan to install
the first hose. Keep the O-ring plug for later use during maintenance
and servicing procedures.

6. See Figure A 3-8. Take one of the hose-connector fittings that was
shipped with the unit and apply an anti-seize compound to the
threads. Thread the fitting into the hose por1.

41033984

Fig. A 3-8 Threading the Hose Connector Fitting into the Hose Port

7. Tighten the fitting with a wrench

8. Connect a hose to the fitting. Use two wrenches to tighten the hose
as shown in Figure A3-7.

9. lnstall any additional hoses by repeating steps 4-8. Be sure to

connect a second hose next to the first, working from right to left.
Depending upon your unit, you can connect a maximum of four or six
hoses this way.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
A 3-14 lnstallation

6. Electrical lnstallation This part of the installation section includes procedures that require
installing wiring or making electricalconnections. Before making any
electrical connections, first make the required mechanical connections.
Refer to Mechanical lnstallation in this section.

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform electrical

connections. Observe the safety instructions.

CAUTION: lf you are adding hoses and guns to an existing

I
a
system, make sure that you do not exceed the maximum power
capabilities of your unit. Refer tolhe Calculating Hose/Gun
Capacity section of this manual.

Connecting Gun and Hose
Cordsets
Follow this procedure to connect gun and hose cordsets.
1. See Figure A 3-5. Determine whether you are installing an automatic
gun or a hand-operated gun. An automatic gun is either air-operated
or electrically operated. A hand-operated gun is manually operated.

2. Follow the instructions below that apply to the type of gun you are
installing.

CAUTION: lf you are connecting a hand-operated gun, take

t
a
care not to connect the heater wires to the resistance
temperature detector (RTD)wires. Otherwise, the control
system or RTD will be destroyed when the system is placed in
operation.

Type of Gun Connection

Automatic Connect the gun cordset to the electrical
connector at the end of the hose.

Hand-operated Follow the instructions in the gun manual to

connect the cordset and wires at the end of the
hose to the gun. Be sure not to connect the
wires for heater power to the RTD. Otherwise,
the controlsystem or RTD will be destroyed
when the system is placed in operation.

3. lf you installed hoses for an externally circulating system, you must

follow a ditferent procedure to connect hose cordsets. Go to
lnstallation Procedures for Erternally Circulating Systems at the end
of this section. Return here and go to step 6.

AsEN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporatlon

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved
 lnstallation A 3-15

4. See Figure A 3-9. Find the hose plug of the first hose you connected
to the manifold.

5. Connect this hose plug to electrical receptacle number '1

on the unit.

6. lf you have additional guns and hoses, continue connecting gun and
hose cordsets. Connect the cordset of the next hose (the hose
closest to the rear of the unit) to the hose electrical receptacle labeled
number 2 on the unit. Continue connecting gun and hose cordsets,
working from the rear of the unit to the front of the unit, until you have
connected all gun and hose cordsets.

li

4103958A

Fig. A 3-9 Connecting a Hose Cordset to the Unit

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-16 lnstallation

Opening the Electrical To make the electrical connections inside the unit, follow this procedure
Enclosure to open the unit and access the electrical enclosure.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit.

1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position and disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch.

2. See Figure A 3-10. Loosen the captive screws on the electrical

enclosure lid, lift the lid from the unit, and prop it against the pump
cover. Take care not to disconnect the ground wire.

3. Make sure the support strap is not wrapped around any board
components. Untangle the strap if necessary.

4. Loosen the two captive screws on either side of the control-end frame
and lower the frame. You may need to pull the front and rear panels
apart to release the frame.

5. Avoid direct contact with internal electrical connections, components,

or wiring.

6. Make sure allground wires are securely connected

t'
t

41308494

Fig. A 3-10 Opening the ElectricalEnclosure

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXUI-1 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights resewed
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-17

Connecting a Triggering Device
for the Pump Solenoid Valve
lf your unit has a triggering solenoid valve on the pump, follow this
procedure to connect a24YDC triggering device to the center frame
terminal block. See Figure A 3-11 to determine whether your pump has a
triggering solenoid valve (1). lf your pump does not have this valve, skip
to the next procedure, Connecting Output Contacts (Optional).

O1O 2 1

O 20 3 2
3
3
4
4

4130879A

Fig. A 3-11 Connecting a Triggering Device for the Pump Solenoid Valve
1. Triggering solenoid valve 3. Wires trom24 VDC triggering 4. Strain relief
2. Center frame terminal block device

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3 EN-04.[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-18 lnstallation

Connecting a Triggering WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

Device for the Pump Solenoid death. lnstall a strain relief to protect wires from being
Valve @ontd1 damaged by the edges of the knockout hole.

CAUTION: Circuit boards can be easily damaged. Avoid any

T contact with circuit boards when removing a knockout hole plug.
a

1. See Figure A 3-11. Remove and discard the plug from a knockout
hole on either the back side or the bottom of the unit (whichever is
most convenient for your operation) and install a strain relief (4) in the
hole. Refer to the following table for the appropriate size strain relief.

NOTE: Your unit may have several knockout holes. You should route
your triggering device wires through a larger hole.

Size of Knockout Size of Strain Relief to lnstall

23 mm (1s/16 in.) PG-16 or 112-in. trade size
29.5 mm (15/32 in.) PG-21

35 mm (13/s in.) 1-in. trade size

CAUTION: Use 0.34-0.25 mm2 (22-24 AWG) wire. Using a

I
a
different wire size can cause internal stress-related damage to
the unit.

2. Floute the wires from a 24VDC triggering device (3)through the

strain relief and connect them to terminals 3 and 4 on the center
frame terminal block (2).

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson CoDoralion

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved
 lnstallation A 3-19

Connecting Output Contacts Follow this procedure to connect the standard output contacts that are
(Optional) provided on all units. lf you do not wish to connect any outputs, skip to
the next procedure, Connecting Electrical Seruice.

Output contacts allow you to automatically activate other equipment or to

activate devices for remote monitoring of the unit's operations.
Table A 3-1 describes the standard output contacts. lf your unit has an
optional inpuVoutput (l/O) board, there are additional outputs and several
inputs you can connect. Refer to Series 3000V lnput/Output Boardinlhe
Options section.

Table A 3-1 Standard Output Contacts

Output Contact Function
System Warning Used to signal a device that will alert remotely
located operators of a warning condition
System Fault Used to signal a device that will alert remotely
located operators of a system fault condition. This
output is typically used to turn on a light or to sound
an alarm.
System Ready Used to signal a device that will alert remotely
located operators that the system is ready for
operation (up to temperature) or that the unit's
pump is on. This output is typically used to send a
ready signal to a production line so that the line
turns on only when the unit is ready to pump
adhesive.

3. lf you have not already done so, open the electrical enclosure. Refer
lo Opening the Electrical Enclosure in this section.

4. lf you have not already done so, carefully remove a knockout hole
plug from one of the larger holes on either the back side or the bottom
of the unit (whichever is most convenient for your operation). Avoid
contact with any printed circuit boards.

5. To protect the wiring, install a strain relief in the hole. Refer to the
following table for the appropriate size strain relief.

Table A 3-2 Strain Relief Sizes for Knockouts

Size of Knockout Hole Size of Strain Relief to lnstall
23 mm (15/16 in.) PG-16 or1/2-in. trade size
29.5 mm (1sl32 in.) PG-21

35 mm (13/s in.) 1-in. trade size

@000 llordson Corporation 41-3000y A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-20 lnstallation

Connecting Output Contacts WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

(Optional) @ontd1 death. For a proper and safe installation, make sure you meet
the requirements in the following step.

6. See Figure A 3-12. Route the output contact wires (2) through the
strain relief (1) to terminal block TB2 (3). Make sure your installation
meets these requirements:
. Use 0.34-0.25 mm2 (22-24 AWG) stranded wire that is suitable
for National Electrical Code (NEC) Class 1 remote control and
signaling circuits. Output contacts are rated for 250 VAC, 2 A
maximum.

a Use the proper length of wire and route the wires so they do not
touch any of the printed circuit boards. Make sure the wires reach
terminal block TB2 when the electrical enclosure is opened.

dt aooraa

Fig. A 3-12 Connecting Output Contacts

1. Strain relief 3. TB2 terminal block
2. Output contact wires

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporalion

All r,ghls reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-21

7. Connect the output wires to the plug for terminal block TB2 from the
ship-with kit. Refer to Table A 3-3.

Table A 3-3 Output Contact Connections

Output Contact as Behavior of Contact TB2 Positions
Labeled on Power (see Note A)
Board Unit Power Off Unit Power On
Warning Contact Open Closed Open 1 , 2
(System Warning) (no warning) (warning exists)

Fault Contact Open Closed Open 3,4

(System Fault) (no fault) (fault exists)

Ready Contact Open Open Closed 5,6

(System Ready) (unit not ready) (unit ready)

NOTE A: The output contacts are not polarity sensitive. lt does not matter which wire is inserted into a position.

8. Connect the plug to TB2. See Figure A 3-12 for the location otTB2.

9. Go to the next procedure, Connecting ElectricalSeruice.

@00 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All ights reserved lssued 5/00
 A3-22 lnstallation

Connecting Electrical Seruice Follow this procedure to connect electrical service to your unit.

1. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening the Electrical

Enclosure.

2. See Figure A 3-13. Locate the identification plate on your unit.

54321

Ci]"HHHH

o o

41306904

Fig. A 3-13 Location of ldentification Plate

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Operate the unit only

I at 480 VAC.

3. See Figure A 3-14. Make sure the VOTTS (ac) portion (1) of the
identification plate contains the following voltage information:
3AC 480 V.

4. Size your electrical service line based on the maximum amperage

shown in the AMPS (max.) portion (2) of the identification plate. The
line must also meet local electrical code requirements.

NORDSON CORP. , AMHERST, OHIO, POWER REOUI

UNIT NO. VOLTS (ac)
TEMP: HZ AMPS (Max.) @
SERIAL NO. o WATIS (Max.)

alenARqa

Fig. A 3-14 Unit ldentification Plate

1. VOLTS (ac) portion 2. AMPS (max.) portion

A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-l 3 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporalion

All rlghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-23

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. lnstall a strain relief to protect wires from being
damaged by the edges of the knockout hole.

GAUTION: Circuit boards can be easily damaged. Avoid any

I contact with circuit boards when removing a knockout hole plug.

5. lf you have not already done so, remove and discard the plug from a
knockout hole on either the back side or the bottom of the unit
(whichever is most convenient for your operation) and install a strain
relief in the hole. Refer to the following table for the appropriate size
strain relief.

NOTE: Your unit may have several knockout holes. You should route
your electrical service wiring through a smaller hole.

Size of Knockout Hole Size of Strain Relief to lnstall

23 mm (1s40 in.) PG-16 or1l2-in. trade size
29.5 mm (1s/32 in.) PG-z'l
35 mm (13i8 in.) '1-in. trade size

WARNING: Flisk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Use the appropriate length of electrical service line to
prevent the line from being disconnected when you open the
electrical enclosure.

6. See Figure A 3-15. Route the electrical service line through the strain
relief to TB1 on the 480 VAC distribution board (1) and the ground
terminal (2). Be sure to follow the routing guidelines in Wiring
Requiremenfs at the beginning of this section.

q00 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000y A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A3-24 lnstallation

Connecting Electrical Seruice

(contd.)

3-15 Routing the Electrical Service Line to TB1

Fig. A
1. TB1 on the 480 VAC distribution 2. Ground terminal
board

7. See Figure A 3-16. Connect the electrical seruice line to TB1 and to
the ground terminal.

@ @ @

L1 12 L3

@ @ @
PE

=! 4130853A

Fig. A 3-16 Electrical Service Connections

8. Close the electrical enclosure. Refer to the next procedure, Closing

the Electrical Enclosure.

A3EN.04-[3V-X-4XXV]-1 3 41 -3000v @000 Nordson Corporalion

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-25

Closing the Electrical After you have completed electrical installation, follow this procedure to
Enclosure close the electrical enclosure.

1. Reconnect any ground wires that may have become disconnected

during electrical installation.

2. Raise the control-end frame into place and tighten the captive screws
on each side of the frame. You may need to pull the front and rear
panels apart to position the frame.

3. Position the electrical enclosure lid on top of the unit and secure it
with the captive screws.

4. Remove the lock-out and turn on the power at the branch circuit
disconnect switch.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
A 3-26 lnstallation

7. System Programming Before running your unit, follow the procedures in this part of the
lnstallation section to program the unit for your operations. All
Procedures programming is done from the System Setup area of the operator panel.
From the System Setup area, you can program
. how the unit operates (SYSTEM SETTINGS)
o the temperature at which each zone operates (TEMPERATURE)
t rerrreenarune
. when the system operates (CLOCK)
Of ttt*'* 2q
r -IJ-
EEE
tt You will probably find it helpful to read Control Systeminthe Description
O lt *o"ott INIERML HOSE GUN section of this manual before programming any system controls. Control
System briefly describes the function of each control you will program.

o o il+r#,
O cr-ocr
O QQ""u'
o fr HFB,,
o & $1,,.\, 'c.
O@ HEArEasoN INTERVAL

EE
12
O@ HEATER..FF

41

Fig. A 3-17 System Setup Area of the

Operator Panel

A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All dghts reserved
 lnstallation A3-27

Programming System Controls The system controls determine how the unit will operate.

1. To begin programming system controls, first turn power on to the unit

by pressing the POWEB switch. The following occur:

a The system scans each heated zone, displaying each zone's

temperature in sequence.

ro@ a The Multipurpose display shows four dashes (- - - -) for each

zone until a setpoint temperature is entered. After a setpoint is
@ entered, the display will show the setpoint that was entered as the
Oo o default when power is turned on.
* *.@
a The ActualTemperature display shows the room temperature
xD because no heat has been applied to the zones.

@ 2. Customize the system to your operations by completing the

procedures listed below. Refer to Table A 3-4 for a summary of all the
features that you can customize.
. Programming Optional Features
. Programming SYSTEM SETT/NGS Controls
. Programming TEMPERATURE Controls
. Programming CLOCK Controls

4103986

Fig. A 3-18 Turning the Power On

O 2000 tlordson Corporatlon 41-3000v A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-28 lnstallation

Programming System
Controls @ontd1
Table A 3-4 Summary of Features to Customize
ControlArea Features to Customize

SYSTEM SETTINGS From SYSTEM SETTINGS you can customize the following features, which are explained
in more detail in Table A 3-5:
o Password Enable
o System-Ready Time Delay period
. Overtemperature Setpoint
o Celsius or Fahrenheit display
. GlobalTemperature Band setting
. lndividual Temperature Bands setting
o Sequential or Simultaneous Startup
. Display Heater Proportioning
o Warning or Power notification
. Ready or Pump notification
. Auto-Energize Pump (piston pump units only)
o Auto-Energize Pump Temperature setting (piston pump units only)
o Auto-Energize Heaters
. 'llme with Heaters On

TEMPERATURE SETPOINT Temperature: This feature sets the temperature that a zone will maintain
during normal operation.

STANDBY Temperature: This feature sets the desired temperature to which a zone will
be reduced when the system is in the standby mode.

CLOCK SET TIME: This feature keeps the current day and time. The clock must be on before
you can use the HEATERS ON, HEATERS OFF, ENTER STANDBY and EXIT STANDBY
features.

ENTER STANDBY and EXIT STANDBY This feature sets the time that you want the
system to automatically enter and exit the standby mode.

HEATERS ON and HEATERS OFF: This feature sets the time that you want heaters to
automatically turn on and off.

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-1 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-29

Programming Optional lf your unit has an optional l/O board, you can program additional
Features features. Refer to Series 3000V lnput/Output Board in the Opfions
section for information on programming these additionalfeatures.

Programming SYSTEM Use this procedure to program the SYSTEM SETTINGS features shown
SETTINGS Controls in Table A 3-4.

1. lf you have not already done so, turn power on to the unit by pressing
the POWER switch.

2. See Figure A 3-19. Press the Move Up (1) and Move Down (2) keys
untilthe SYSTETU SETTINGS light turns on. When you select
SYSTEM SETTINGS, the following occur:

a The values in the Displays area change

a The number in the Selector display changes to a feature number.

The Multipurpose display changes to the current value for the

feature selected,

1
SYSTEM
,g1o SETTINGS

4103988

Fig. A 3-19 Selecting SYSTEM SETTINGS Features

1. Move Up key 2. Move Down key

NOTE: lf you have enabled the password feature, you must

change the number in the Multipurpose display (500) to the
password (321) and press the Enter key before the system will
allow you to change any SYSTEM SETTINGS features.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 A 3-30 lnstallation

Programming SYSTEM 3. Determine which SYSTEM SETTINGS feature to customize. Refer to

SEI7TIVGS Controls (contd.) Table A 3-5 for a list of defaults and options for customizing each
feature.

WARNING: Risk of fire. The default for the overtemperature

setpoint is 218 "C (425'F). lf the lilaterial Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) for your adhesive gives a flash point that is below
218 "C (425 "F), be sure to reset the overtemperature setting to
at least 42 "C (75 "F) below the flash point.

4. See Figure A 3-20. Press the Up key (1) below the Selector
display (2) until the number of the feature you want appears on the
display. As the feature number changes, the Multipurpose display (3)
changes to show the setting of each feature selected.

5. Press the Up or Down keys (4) below the Multipurpose display to

change the setting. The display flashes.

6. Press the Enter key (5) to save the new setting. The display stops
flashing.

2 3

1
l I fr5F I
*J
4 5

Fig. A 3-20 Changing the Setting of a Selected Feature

1. Up key 4. Up and Down keys
2. Selector display 5. Enter key
3. Multipurposedisplay

7. Record your setting in the forms provided at the end of this section
Refer to Records of System Settings.

8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for each feature you wish to change.

9. To exit the System Setup area, press the MONITOF/SCAN key.

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 41-3000v @ 2000 Nodson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved
 lnstallation A 3-31

Table A 3-5 SYSTEM SETTINGS Features

Feature Feature Description Default Optional Settings
No. Setting
0 Password Provides a password if the password enable feature is 321 none
turned on. The password (321) cannot be changed.
1 Password Enable Allows you to turn the password enable feature on or 0 0 (off)
off. When the password enable feature is on,
(off) 1 (on)
operators can view the settings for TEMPERATURE,
SYSTEM SETTINGS, or CLOCK. To change the
settings, operators must enter the correct password
(321). When the feature is off, operators can change
all settings without entering a password.
2 System-Ready Allows you to specify the amount of additional time 18 (minutes) G-60 (minutes)
Time Delay needed for the adhesive to melt after all zones have
reached their setpoint temperatures. At the end of the
time delay, the READY light turns on.
3 Overtemperature Allows you to specify the maximum temperature any 2',t81425 52-2461125475
Setpoint zone can reach before the system initiates a fault
condition. This setting should be at least 14 'C
(.c/.F) ('cl'F)
(25 'F) above the highest operating setpoint. The
system will not allow you to set the overtemperature
setpoint lower than this, or the operating setpoint
higher. (See Note A.)
4 Celsius/ Allows you to display temperature measurements in F (Fahrenheit) F (Fahrenheit)
Fahrenheit Celsius or Fahrenheit.
C (Celsius)
5 Global Allows you to specify the degree to which a 17t30 6-2811 0-50
Temperature temperature may deviate from any zone before the
Band system indicates an out-of-band warning. (See
("c/.F) ('cl'F)
Note B.)
6-19 lndividual Allows you to specify the degree to which a 17t30 6-2811 0-50
Temperature temperature may deviate for an individual zone before ('cl"F) ('cl'F)
Bands the system initiates a warning. (See Note C.)
(See Note D.)
20 Sequential or Allows you to specify whether the system will perform 1 0 (simultaneous)
Simultaneous a sequential startup (internal zones and hose zones (sequential) 1 (sequential)
Startup heat first, then gun zones) or simultaneous startup (all
zones heat at once).
21 Display Heater Allows you to display the heater proportioning (a 0 0 (no display)
Proportioning flashing INTERNAL, HOSE, or GUN light). (no display) 'l (show display)
22 System Warning Allows you to change the System Warning output 1 0 (power)
or Power contact to aleft remotely located operators that a '1
(warning) (warning)
Notification system warning has occurred or that power is on.
23 System Ready or Allows you to change the System Ready output 1 0 (pump)
Pump Notification contact to alert remotely located operators that the
(ready) 1 (ready)
system is ready (up to temperature) or that the pump
is on.
NOTE A: The overtemperature setting should be at least 42 "C (75 "F) below the flash point temperature.
B: lf you enter a setting that is higher than the tank setpoint, the pump will start when the tank reaches its setpoint.
C: lf you enter a new setting for this feature, the new setting is immediately entered for the individual zones (Feature
Nos. 6-19). However, it is not saved as the setting for Feature No. 5. Feature No. 5 always returns to the default
setting of 6 oC (10 'F).
D: Feature No. 6 = tank, Feature No. 7 = grid, Feature Nos. &-13 = hoses 1-6, Feature Nos. 14-1g = guns 1-6

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation

41-3000v A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXyJ-1 3
All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-32 lnstallation

Programming SYSTEM
SETTINGS Controls (contd.)
Feature Feature Description Default Optional
No. Setting Settings
24 Auto-Energize Piston pump units only: Allows you to turn the 1 0 (off)
Pump auto-energize pump feature on or off. lf this feature is on, (on) 1 (on)
the system turns the pump on automatically once the tank
reaches the preset temperature of Feature No. 32. lf the
auto-energize pump feature is off, you must turn the pump
on by pressing the PUMP key until the PUMP light turns on.
25 Auto-Energize Allows you to turn the auto-energize heaters feature on or 1 0 (off)
Heaters off. lf the feature is on, the system turns heaters on (on) (on)
1
automatically once the POWER switch is turned on.
However, if you have programmed the system to turn
heaters on and off automatically, using the clock feature,
your clock settings override the auto-energize heaters
feature. lf the auto-energize heaters feature is off, you must
turn heaters on manually, or allow any clock settings you
have programmed to turn heaters on or off.
26 Time With Allows you to display the total time (in hours) that the See Note A none
Heaters On heaters have been running to assist with servicing and
maintenance. Refer lo Checking Run Time of Heatersin
lhe Maintenance section of this manual.
27 Fault Log (most Allows you to display the cause of the most recent system See Note A none
recent) fault. Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault Login lhe
Operation section for a list of fault codes.
28 Fault Log Allows you to display the cause of the second most recent See Note A none
(second most system fault. Referto Checking the Warning or Fault Login
recent) lhe Operation section for a list of fault codes.
29 Fault Log (third Allows you to display the cause of the third most recent See Note A none
most recent) system fault. Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault Log in
lhe Operation section for a list of fault codes.
30&31 Auto Standby These features are available only on units with an l/O
Timeout and ln board. Refer to Seres 3000V lnput/Output Boardinlhe
Standby Options seclion of this manual for information on
Tlmeout customizing these features.
32 Auto-Energize Piston pump units only: Allows you to determine when the 0 (ready) 0 (ready
Pump pump automatically starts if you are using the auto-energize condition) or
Temperature pump feature (Feature No. 24). You can have the pump
1-23211450
Setting start either when the system reaches the READY condition
or when the tank reaches a temperature you have specified. ('c/'F)
(See Note B.)
34 Remote Pump This feature is available only on units with an l/O board.
Enable/Remote Refer to Series 3000V lnput/Output Boardinlhe Options
Heaters On section of this manual for information on customizing this
feature.
35 Warning Log Allows you to display the cause of the most recent system See Note A none
(most recent) warning. Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault Log in lhe
Operation section for a list of warning codes.
36 Warning Log Allows you to display the cause of the second most recent See Note A none
(second most system warning. Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault
recent) Log in the Operation section for a list of warning codes.
37 Warning Log Allows you to display the cause of the third most recent See Note A none
(third most system warning. Refer to Checking the Warning or Fault
recent) Log in the Operation section for a list of warning codes.
NOTE A: Features 26-29 and 35-37 are always on. There is no default setting.
B: lf you enter a setting that is higher than the tank setpoint, the pump will start when the tank reaches its setpoint.

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41 -3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-33

P rogram mi ng TEM PE RATU R E From the operator panel you can control each of the system's heated
Controls components at a temperature specific to your needs. You can program
individual setpoints for the tank, each hose, each gun, and, on Series
3900Vunits, the grid. For programming purposes, each heated system
component is referred to as a zone.

ln addition to being able to heat each zone individually, you can assign
two different temperature settings to each active zone; a setting for the
setpoint (operating) temperature and one for the standby temperature.

Table A 3-6 Types of Temperature Settings

Setting Description
Setpoint Temperature Desired temperature of a zone during
normal operation.

Standby Temperature Temperature to which a zone will be

reduced when the system is in the standby
mode.

lf you do not enter standby temperatures, the standby default of OFF will
remain in effect for each zone. lf you place the system in the standby
mode, the zones will coolto room temperature (while the HEATERS light
remains on). lf you make the standby temperatures equal to the
setpoints, pressing the STANDBY key will have no effect on the
temperatures, but it willturn the READY light off and disable the pump.

NOTE: The default setting for allzones is OFF (less than 38 "C or
100 "F). To turn a zone on, set the setpoint temperature to
38 "C (100 'F) or higher.

@ 2000 Nordson Corpoialion 41-3000y A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/O0
A 3-34 lnstallation

P rogrammi ng TEM PEBATU RE Because Series 3000 V units can have up to six hose and gun zones and
Controls (contd.) one or two internal zones, zone numbers are used to identify specific
zones of each type. When you program TEMPERATURE settings, the
number in the Selector display represents a particular zone number.

Table A 3-7 Heating Zone Numbers

Zone Number Zone Type
(See Note A)
INTERNAL HOSE GUN
0 Set All
(See Note B)

1 Tank Hose 1 Gun 1

2 Hose 2 Gun 2

3 Hose 3 Gun 3

4 Hose 4 Gun 4

5 Hose 5 Gun 5
(See Note C)

b Hose 6 Gun 6
(See Note C)

NOTE A: Your unit may be able to controlthe temperature of two, four,

or six hoses and guns, depending upon the unit and features
you have selected.
B: Use Set Allto set allzones to the same temperature. Only
zones that are turned on are affected.
C: Some units can accept only four hoses and four guns.

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41-3000v @00 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-35

Follow these guidelines when programming temperature settings:

a Check the Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for the

recommended operating temperature of the adhesive that you will
use.

a For a zone to be on, the operating temperature must be set at

38 'C (100 "F) or higher.

Set the standby temperature 56 "C (100 'F) lower than the operating
temperature.

a Before programming any temperature settings, make sure that the

overtemperature setpoint is at least 14 "C (25'F) higher than the
highest operating setpoint used. Refer to Table A 3-5, Feature No. 3.

Use this tip to program temperature settings quickly:

Zone Procedure
All zones to the same Follow the procedure To Program All
temperature Zones to the Same Temperature.
Most zones to the same 1. First, follow the procedure Io
temperature Program All Zones to the Same
Temperature.
2. Then, follow the procedure Io
Program Setpoint and Standby
Te m p e ratu re s I nd ivid u ally to
change the settings that you wish

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-36 lnstallation

To Program Setpoint and Standby Temperatures lndividually

Follow this procedure to set the setpoint and standby temperatures for
each zone.

1. lf you have not already done so, turn power on to the unit by pressing
the POWER switch.

2. ln the System Setup area, press the Move Up and Move Down keys
until the SETPOINT or STANDBY light turns on. The system defaults
to the internal zone type and the INTERNAL light turns on.

NOTE: lf you have enabled the password feature, you must change
the number in the Multipurpose display (500) to the password (321)
and press the Enter key before the system will allow you to change
any of the temperature setpoints.

3. lf you want to select the hose-zone type or the gun-zone type instead
of the internal-zone type, press the Move Right key until the light
beneath the zone type you want to set turns on.

4. See Figure A 3-21 . ln the Displays area, press the Up key (1) below
the Selector display (2) until the zone number you want appears on
the display. (Refer to Table A 3-7.) The Multipurpose display (3)
changes to show the current temperature setting for the zone you
selected.

5. ln the Displays area, press the Up or Down key ( ) below the

Multipurpose display to change the temperature. The display flashes.

NOTE: Pressing the Up or Down keys in the Displays area once

changes the number shown in increments of one. Pressing and
holding the key changes the number in increments of five.

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-37

6. Press the Enter key (5) to save the setting. The display stops
flashing.

2 3

I
1
l 5 F I
<J
4 5
4to3q31

Fig. A 3-21 Using the Displays Keys to Set the Temperature ol aZone
(Displays Area)
1. Up key 4. Up and Down keys
2. Selector display 5. Enter key
3. Multipurposedisplay

7. Flecord your setting in the forms provided at the end of this section
Refer to Records of System Seftings.

B. Press the Up key below the Selector display to select the next zone
number for the zone.that you wish to customize, and repeat this
procedure until you have set temperatures for all zones.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/0O
A 3-38 lnstallation

To Program All Zones to the Same Temperature

Follow this procedure to set all zones to the same temperature. Also use
this procedure along with the procedure To Program Setpoint and
Standby Temperatures lndividually to set most zones to the same
temperature.

NOTE: This procedure works only for zones that have been previously
turned on. The default setting for all zones is OFF. To turn a zone on,
refer to the previous procedure, To Program Setpoint and Standby
Temperatures lndividually, and set the temperature of each zone you
want to turn on to at least 38 'C (100 'F).

1. lf you have not already done so, turn power on to the unit by pressing
the POWER switch.

2. See Figure A 3-22. ln the System Setup area, press the Move Up (1)
and Move Down (2) keys until the SETPOINT or STANDBY light turns
on. The system defaults to the internal-zone type and the INTERNAL
light turns on.

NOTE: lf you have enabled the password feature, you must change
the.number in the Multipurpose display (500) to the password (321)
and press the Enter key before the system will allow you to change
any of the temperature setpoints.

I lweruBE
-Hr smrM lSt
-E-E
r-,
EI J
O fro**

4130305A

Fig. A3-22 Selecting the Set All Feature (System Setup Area)
'1. Move Up key 2. Move Down key

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporalion

lssued 5/00 All dghts reserved
 lnstallation A 3-39

3. ln the Display area, press the Up key below the Selector display
until 0 (Set All) appears on the display. All three zone-type lights tum
on and the Multipurpose display shows a default temperature of
177 "C (350.F).

4. Press the Up or Down keys below the Multipurpose display to change

the temperature. The Multipurpose display flashes.

5. Press the Enter key to change the temperature setting of all zones
that are turned on to the temperature shown in the tilultipurpose
Display. The display stops flashing.

NOTE: When you exit the Set Allfeature, it always returns to the
default setting ot 177 'C (350 "F).

6. Record your setting in the forms provided at the end of this section
Refer to Records of System Settings.

Prog ram m i ng C LOC K Controls The seven-day clock feature turns the heaters on and off or takes the unit
into and out of the standby mode at preset times that you program. This
feature works in conjunction with the clock on the unit, which keeps the
correct day and time. lt does not matter whether you set the current day
and time first, or set the standby and heater times. However, both
features must be set for the heaters to turn on and off correctly.

NOTE: lf you experience a power outage, the unit's internal clock will
continue to keep time. Once power is restored and the unit is turned on,
the unit will resume normal operations. You do not need to reprogram
any features controlled by the clock.

NOTE: The clock does not automatically adjust for seasonal time shifts,
such as daylight savings time.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All riqhts reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-40 lnstallation

To Set the Clock

Follow this procedure to set the clock for the current time and day.
1
NOTE: The clock uses a seven-day, 24-hour format.
2
Qcrox

@Q*''*u
1. lf you have not already done so, turn power on to the unit by pressing
the POWER switch.
olrffi*
2. See Figure A 3-23. ln the System Setup area, press the Move Up
o ! fllou, 'd\ and Move Down keys (1) until the SET TIME light (2) turns on.
\l
O @ '***o" INIEE'AL
E E NOTE: lf you have enabled the password feature, you must change
'I 2
the number in the Multipurpose display (500) to the password (321)
O@ "**'* and press the Enter key before the system will allow you to change
4103934
the clock settings.

Fig. A 3-23 Selecting SET TIME

1. Move Up and Move Down keys
2. SET TIME light

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-41

3. Check the Selector display. The display flashes a number

representing the day of the week as shown in Table A 3-8.

Table A 3-8 Selector Display Codes Shown

When Clock Feature is Activated
Day Code Day of Week Represented

1 Monday

2 Tuesday

3 Wednesday

4 Thursday

5 Friday

6 Saturday

7 Sunday

1
23

I
I =\ ,I t[ I
*J
6 5 4
4r0393s

Fig. A 3-24 Setting the Correct Day and Time

1. Day code (Selector display) 4. Enter key
2. Hours (Multipurpose display) 5. Up and Down keys
3. Minutes (Multipurpose display) 6. Up key

@000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000y A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
A3-42 lnstallation

To Set the Clock (contd.)

4. See Figure A3-24. Check that the day code (1) is correct.

Correct? Action:
Yes Press the Enter key (4) to save the setting.

No Press the Up key (6) below the Selector display until

the correct code appears on the display; then press
the Enter key to save the setting.

5. When you press the Enter key, the Selector display stops flashing
and the hour (2) shown in the Multipurpose display begins flashing.
Check that the hour shown in the Multipurpose display is correct.

NOTE: Clock hours must be set to come on between 01:00 and

24:00 hours. lf the clock is set from 00:01 to 00:59, it will not operate.

Correct? Action:
Yes Press the Enter key to save the setting.

No Press the Up or Down key below the Multipurpose

display until the correct hour appears on the display;
then press the Enter key to save the setting.

AsEN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 41 -3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-43

6. When you press the Enter key, the hour shown in the Multipurpose
display stops flashing and the minutes (3) shown begin flashing.
Check that the minutes shown in the Multipurpose display are correct.

Correct? Action:
Yes Press the Enter key to save the setting.

No Press the Up or Down key below the Multipurpose

display untilthe correct minutes appear on the display;
then press the Enter key to save the setting.

NOTE: Once the clock is set, all displays stop flashing.

To Set Standby and Heater Times

The clock feature turns the heaters on or off, or takes the unit into and
out of the standby mode at preset times. Using a seven-day, 24-hour
format, the clock can store two sets of times, referred to as intervals, for
each day of the week. Each interval can store four time settings:
. one to enter standby
. one to exit standby
. one to turn the heaters on
. one to turn the heaters off
Follow this procedure to set times for entering and exiting standby and for
turning heaters on and off. After you have programmed the clock, use
the CLOCK key to turn the clock feature on and off. The CLOCK light
turns on when the clock feature is active.

NOTE: lf you have enabled the password feature, you must change the
1 number in the Multipurpose display (500) to the password (321) and
O c.oc^ press the Enter key before the system will allow you to change the clock
settings.
O@{**
ol1ffi* 1. See Figure A 3-25. ln the System Setup area, press the Move Up
2 and Move Down keys (1) until the light next to the feature you wish to
o&ffi,* '@ set turns on.

O @'**o" NOTE: When you select any of the standby or heater on/off settings,
12 the unit selects an interval. The INTERVAL 1 light (2) turns on as a
O @'*'*o* default.
4103935

Fig. A 3-25 Selecting Standby and

Heater Times
1. Move Up and Move Down keys
2. INTERVAL lights

O 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 A3-44 lnstallation

Io Set Standby and Heater Times (contd.)

2. Check the Selector display. The display flashes a number (the day
code) representing the day of the week as shown in Table A 3-9.

Table A 3-9 Selector Display Codes Shown

When Clock Feature is Activated
Day Code Day of Week Represented
1 lvlonday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
7 Sunday

1
23

I
I ,I t[ I
<J
6 5 4
4103935

Fig. A 3-26 Setting the Correct Day and Time

1. Day code (Selector display) 4. Enter key
2. Hours (Multipurpose display) 5. Up and Down keys
3. Minutes (Multipurpose display) 6. Up key

A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXV]-1 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights resewed
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-45

3. See Figure A 3-26. Press the Up key below the Selector display to
select the day code (1)for which you want to set a time.

4. Press the Enter key (4) to save the day code setting. The Selector
display stops flashing and the hour (2) shown in the Multipurpose
display flashes.

5. Press the Up or Down keys (5) below the Multipurpose display until
the hour for which you want to set a time appears in the display.

6. Press the Enter key to save the hour setting. The hour shown in the
Multipurpose display stops flashing and the minutes flash.

7. Press the Up or Down keys until the minutes (3) for which you want to
set a time appear on the Multipurpose display.

L Press the Enter key to save the minutes setting. All displays stop
flashing.

9. Record your setting in the forms provided at the end of this section
Refer to Records of System Settings.

10. To set a second time for the same day, press the Move Right key until
the INTERVAL 2 light turns on. Press the Enter key to save the day
and repeat steps 5 through 9.

To Change a Standby or Heater Time

To change a set time, follow the procedure for setting the standby and
heater times.

@0O0 Nordson Corpotalion 41-3000y A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
A 3-46 lnstallation

To Delete a Standby or Heater Time

Follow this procedure to delete a Standby or Heater set time.

1. From the System Setup area, press the Move Up and Move Down
keys until the light next to the feature you wish to change turns on.

NOTE: lf you have enabled the password feature, you must change
the number in the Multipurpose display (500) to the password (321)
and press the Enter key before the system will allow you to change
the clock settings.

2. Check the Selector display. The display flashes the day code
representing a day of the week.

3. Refer to llable A 3-9, and press the Up key below the Selector display
until the day code of the day that you want to change appears in the
Selector display.

4. Press the Enter key to save the setting. The Selector display stops
flashing and the hour shown in the Multipurpose display flashes.

5. Press the Up or Down keys below the Multipurpose display until four
dashes (- - - -) appear on the display. (The dashes indicate that no
setting has been entered.)

6. Press the Enter key to save the setting. All displays stop flashing.

7. Record your setting in the forms provided at the end of this section.
Refer to Records of System Settings.

To Delete Times for an Entire Day

To delete times for an entire day, follow the procedure To Delete a
Standby or Heater Time and turn the clock otf for each feature: entering
standby, exiting standby, turning heaters on, turning heaters off.

A3EN-04.[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 4'l-3000v e000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved
 lnstallation A3-47

An Example of How to Use the Seven-Day Clock Feature

At one company, the production line runs for two shifts each day and
shuts down on weekends. Both shifts shut down for 45 minutes twice
each day: once at 12:00 noon for lunch and again at 6:00 in the evening
for dinner. By using the clock feature, the company can have the unit
start and stop by setting the clock feature to

a Put the unit into the standby mode (ENTER STANDBY) at 12:00 P.M.
(INTEHVAL 1) and again at 6:00 P.M. (INTERVAL 2).

a Take the unit out of the standby mode (EXIT STANDBY) at 12:30 P.M.
(INTERVAL 1) and at 6:30 P.M. (INTERVAL 2), allowing 15 minutes
for the system to reach application temperature.

a Turn the heaters on (HEATERS ON) Monday through Friday

30 minutes before the start of the first shift (INTERVAL 1).

a Turn the heaters off (HEATERS OFF) Monday through Friday at the
end of the second shift (INTERVAL 1).

NOTE: The clock is not set for Saturday or Sunday when the company is
closed.

8. System Preparation Follow these procedures to flush the system and prepare it for first
operation. This part of lhe lnstallation section also includes the
procedure for adjusting the pressure control valve on gear pump units.

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto operate the unit.

Filling the Tank with Adhesive Use this procedure to fill the tank with unmelted adhesive. Before
continuing, refer to General Hot Melt Material Processing lnstructions at
the beginning of this manual.

1. lf you have not already done so, program your unit. Refer to System
Programming Procedures in this section.

2. Open the tank lid

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y ASEN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3r

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-48 lnstallation

Filling the Tank with Adhesive WARNING: Use a metal or plastic scoop to fillthe tank with
(contd.) adhesive. Never use your bare hands.

3. See Figure A3-27. Use a metal or plastic scoop and fillthe tank with
adhesive to within 25 mm (1 in.) of the top of the tank.

4. Close the tank lid.

5. As the system scans through the system settings, check that all
temperatures are set as recommended by your adhesive supplier,

6. Go to the next procedure, Flushing the System

4103270

Fig. A3-27 Filling the Tank with

Adhesive

Flushing the System Before operating your unit for the first time, flush the system by pumping
adhesive through it to remove trapped air and residue left during factory
testing.

1. Use one of the following methods to prevent accidental gun

triggering:
. Air-operated guns: turn off the operating air.
o Electric guns: turn off the gun driver.
o Hand-operated guns: lock the trigger.

WARNING: Hot! Flisk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

safety goggles, and heat-protective gloves.

2. Place a drain pan under each gun and remove all gun nozzles.

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-49

3. lf the unit is not already on, press the power switch to turn the unit on
Allow the unit to reach operating temperature.

4. See Figure A 3-28. Clean the manifold filter by following the

filter-cleaning procedure that applies to your filter. Determine whether
your system has a standard filter (1-3) or a reverse-flush filter (4).
Then refer to Table A 3-10 for the correct filter cleaning procedure.

1 2

3 4
Fig. A 3-28 Standard Filters (1-3) and Reverse-Flush Filter (4)

Table A 3-10 Filter Cleaning Procedures

Filter Type Cleaning Procedure
Standard Refer to Cleaning a Standard Manifold Filterinthe
Maintenance section of this manual.

Reverse-flush Refer to Cleaning a Reverse-Flush Manifold Filterin

lhe Maintenance section of this manual.

@00 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-50 lnstallation

Flushing the System @ontd.) 5. Prepare each gun in your system for operation as follows:

. Air-operated guns: increase the operating air pressure to 240 kPa

(35 psi).

o Electric guns: turn on the gun driver.

o Hand-operated guns: unlock the trigger.

WARNING: Trapped air may still be in the hoses and guns.

Shield the area and operator from splashing adhesive.

6. Trigger the guns, keeping them open so that no pressure builds up

NOTE: You may need to adjust the gun air pressure depending on
the viscosity of the adhesive and the gun response.

7. Flush the system. lf the PUMP light is not on, press the PUMP key.
Gradually increase air pressure to the pump by turning the air
pressure regulator clockwise. Allow adhesive to flow out of the guns
until alltrapped air, cleaning solution, and impurities are flushed out of
the system. lf the pump slows noticeably or stops, increase pump air
pressure slightly.

8. Stop triggering the guns.

9. Reduce pump air pressure to 0 by turning the air pressure regulator

fully counterclockwise.

10. Trigger the guns momentarily to relieve trapped hydraulic pressure.

WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

safety goggles, and heat-protective gloves.

11. Attach the nozzles to the guns

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 41 -3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-51

12. Adjust the pump air pressure regulator until the air pressure is at the
desired operating setting. Test adhesive patterns as necessary.

13. Air-operated guns only. adjust the gun air pressure regulator until the
air pressure is at the desired operating setting. Test adhesive
patterns as necessary.

14. lf your system has an air-operated pump or gun, record the initial air
pressure settings in the Becords of System Settings at the end of this
section.

15. Refer to the gun product manual for additional setup information for
the specific gun.

Adjusting the Circulation lf you have an externally circulating system, adjust the circulation control
ControlValve valve. Refer to Adjusting the Circulation Control Valvein tnstaltation
Procedures for Externally circulating systems at the end of this section.

@000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000y

All rights reserved A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-'| 3
lssued 5/00
A 3-52 lnstallation

9. Records of System Use these forms to record your system settings. This record will be
useful if you ever need to reprogram the system. Store the forms in a
Settings convenient place. You may want to give a copy to others in your
workplace who need the information.

Record of SETPOINT
(Operati ng) Temperatu re
Settings
Table A 3-11 Record of SETPOINT (Operating) Temperature Settings
Zone Zone Zone Default Setpoint Range of Setpoints Revised Setpoint
Type Number Name (See Note B) (See Note C)
(See
Note A)
lnternal '1
Tank 38-232"C
(100-450.F)
2 Grid 38-232"C
(100-450.F)
Hose 1 Hose 1 38-232'C
(100-450 "F)
2 Hose 2 38-232.C
(100-450.F)
3 Hose 3 38-232.C
(100-450.F)
4 Hose 4 38-232"C
(100-450'F)
5 Hose 5 38-232"C
(100-450.F)
6 Hose 6 38-232.C
(100-450 "F)
Gun 1 Gun 1 38-232"C
(100-450 "F)
2 Gun 2 38-232'C
(1 00-450 "F)
3 Gun 3 38-232.C
(100-450 "F)
4 Gun 4 38-232.C
('100-450 "F)
5 Gun 5 38-232'C
(100-450.F)
o Gun 6 38-232 ."C
(100-450 "F)
NOTE A: Only Series 3900Vunits have a grid zone (internal zone number 2). Your unit may be able to control
the temperature of two, four, or six hoses and guns, depending on your unit's features.
B: Four dashes C - - -) show that the heaters for this zone have not been programmed.
C: For azone to be on, the operating temperature must be set at or above 38 "C (100'F). o
A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXV]-1 3 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporalion
All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-53

Record of STANDBY
Temperature Seffings

Table A 3-12 Record of STANDBY Temperature Settings

Zone Zone Zone Default Setpoint Range of Setpoints Revised Setpoint
Type Number Name (See Note B) (See Note C)
(See Note A)
lnternal 1 Tank 38-232"C
(100-450 "F)
2 Grid 38-232"C
(100-450 "F)
Hose 1 Hose 1 38-232"C
(100-450.F)
2 Hose 2 38-232"C
(100-450 .F)
3 Hose 3 38-232'C
(10H50 "F)
4 Hose 4 38-232'C
(10H50 "F)
5 Hose 5 38-232"C
(100-450 "F)
6 Hose 6 38-232"C
(100-450 "F)
Gun 1 Gun 1 38132"C
(1 00-450 "F)
2 Gun 2 38-232"C
(1oo-450.F)
3 Gun 3 38-232"C
(10H50 .F)

4 Gun 4 38-232'C
(1 00-450 "F)
5 Gun 5 38-232'C
(1 00-4s0 .F)
6 Gun 6 38-232 "C
(10H50 "F)
NOTE A: Only Series 3900Vunits have a grid zone (internalzone number 2). Your unit may be able to control
the temperature of two, four, or six hoses and guns, depending upon the unit and features you have
selected.
B: Four dashes C - - -) show that the heaters for this zone have not been programmed.
C: For a zone to be on, the operating temperature must be set at or above 38 'C (100 "F).

@00 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
A 3-54 lnstallation

Record of Set Times tor

HEATERS ON and HEATERS
OFF

Table A 3-13 Record of Settings for.Automatically Turning Heaters On and Off

Revised Times
Day Code Default Times Range of Times
(Dav) (See Note A) INTERVAL 1 INTERVAL 2
lnterval 1 lnterval2 On off On off
1 On at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00
(Monday) 6:00 n.u.
Off at
5:00 p.na.

2 On at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00

(Tuesday) 6:00 n.ru.
Off at
5:00 p.vt.

3 On at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00

(Wednesday) 6:00 n.rr,t.
Off at
5:00 p.na.

4 On at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00

(Thursday) 6:00 n.u.
Off at
5:00 p.tvt.

5 On at - - - - and 00:0'1 to 24:00

(Friday) 6:00 n.ru.
Off at
5:00 p.rra.

6 - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00

(Saturday)
7 - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00
(Sunday)
NOTE A: Four dashes C - - , show that the heaters on feature has not been programmed for the indicated day of
the week.

AsEN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporallon

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-55

Record of Set Times for

Entering and Exiting Standby

Table A 3-14 Record of Settings for Automatically Entering and Exiting Standby
Revised Times
Day Code Default Times Range of Times
(Day) (See Note A) INTERVAL 1 INTERVAL 2
lnterval 1 lnterval2 Enter Exit Enter Exit
'1
Enter at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00
(Monday) 12:00 p.v.
Exit at
1:00 p.nlt.
2 Enter at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00
(Tuesday) 12:00 p.nlt
Exit at
1:00 p.r'l.
3 Enter at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00
(Wednesday) 12:00 p.u.
Exit at
1:00 p.tvt.
4 Enter at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00
(Thursday) 12:00 p.rra.
Exit at
1:00 p.u.
5 Enter at - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00
(Friday) 12:00 p.na.
Exit at
1:00 p.rr,t.
6 - - - - and 00:01 to 24:00
(Saturday)
7 - - - - and 00:0'l to 24:00
(Sunday)
NOTE A: Four dashes C - - -) show that the standby feature has not been programmed for the indicated day of
the week.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y AsEN-04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-1 3

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
A 3-56 lnstallation

Record of Customized SYSTEM

SEITTruGS Features
Table A 3-15 Record of Customized SYSTEM SETTINGS Features
Feature Default Options Available Revised Setting
(Programming Code)
Password Enable off (0) Off (0) or On (1)

System-Fleady Time 18 minutes From 0 to 60 minutes

Delay
Overtemperature Setpoint 218'C (425.F) From 52 to 246 "C
(From 125 to 475"F)
Celsius/Fahrenheit Fahrenheit Celsius or Fahrenheit
Global Temperature Band 17 'C (30.F) From 6 to 28'C
(From 10 to 50'F)
lndividual Temperature 17 "C (30 "F) From 6 to 28'C
Bands (From 10 to 50'F)
Sequentialor Sequential(1) Sequential (1) or
Simultaneous Startup Simultaneous (0)
Display Heater No display (0) No display (0) or
Proportioning Show display (1)
Warning or Power Warning (0) Warning (0) or
Notification Power (1)
Ready or Pump Ready (1) Pump (0) or
Notification Ready (1)
Auto-Energize Pump on (1) On (1) or Otf (0)
(piston pump units only)
Auto-Energize Heaters on (1) On (1) or off (0)

Auto-Energize Pump READY condition (0) READY (0)or

Temperature Setting From 1 lo232"C
(piston pump units only)
(From 1 to 450'F)
Auto-Standby T'imeout 0 minutes From 0 to 1440 minutes
ln Standby Timeout 0 minutes From 0 to 1440 minutes

A3 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41 -3000y @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-57

Record of Air Pressure

Settings

Table A'3-16 Record of Air Pressure Settings

System Component Air Pressure Setting
Pump (piston pump units only)
Gun 1

Gun 2
Gun 3
Gun 4
Gun 5
Gun 6

eO00 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-1 3

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
A 3-58 lnstallation

Record of System Faults

Table A 3-17 Record of System Faults

Fault Code Day Action Taken Additional Notes
(See Note A) Occurred

NOTE A: Fault Code 0 = No fault has occurred.

'Fault
Code 1 =Zone is below setpoint temperature.
Fault Code 2 = RTD is open.
Fault Code 3 = RTD is shorted.
Fault Code 4 =Zone is overtemperature.
Fault Code 5 = Control board is bad.
Fault Code 6 = Brownout has occurred.

ASEN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-1 3 41-3000y e000 Nordson Corporation

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 lnstallation A 3-59

Becord of System Warnings

Table A 3-18 Record of Warnings

Warning Day Action Taken Additional Notes
Code Occurred
(See Note A)

NOTE A: Warning Code 0 = No warning has occurred.

Warning Code 1 = Not used.
Warning Code 2 = RTD is open.
Warning Code 3 = RTD is shorted.
Warning Code 4 = Temperature out of band.
Warning Code 5 = Not used.
Warning Code 6 = Not used.

@000 Nordson Corpo'ration 41-3000y A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-l 3

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
A 3-60 lnstallation

A3EN-04-[3V-X-4XXV]-l 3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Part A, Section 4

Operation

@000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v A4EN{6-[3V-A-AAXV]-1

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
A 4-0 Operation

A4EN{6-[3V-A-AAXV]-1 4't-3000v @000 Nordson Corporatlon

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Operation A 4-1

Section A 4
Operation

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto per{orm the

following tasks. Follow the safety instructions in this document
and all other related documentation.

1. lntroduction This section describes how to operate your unit and monitor your system.
Before you operate your unit, you must first program it and prepare it for
first operation. Refer to Sysfem Programming Procedures and System
Preparationinthe lnstallaflon section of this manual.

2. Operating Procedures This part ol lhe Operafion section includes the following routine operating
procedures:
. Turning the seven-day clock on and off
. Starting the unit automatically or manually
. Checking the adhesive level and filling the tank
. Placing the unit in standby mode
o Taking the unit out of standby mode
o Shutting down the unit automatically or manually
Refer to System Monitoring Procedures in this section for procedures on
checking the zone temperatures, checking the programmed settings,
checking the fault log, and running a system test.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
41-3000v A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXV]-1
lssued 5/00
A4-2 Operation

2. Operating Procedures Figure A 4-1 shows the Vista operator panel keys and displays.
(contd)

Vlsta" E
FAULT
A E
REAI)Y
1

, 5B 5' I
2
l\ A V .J
ll@w
ffi*@o Of* iU*
ECfE
r
glrm @rcil
**"r$o o
oQm*
," rot@o o (r"* V
O@** -3
4- ".o"* @o o ot.lffi-
3
o o&m- 'A
PUMP
-t- O@*** m&
EE
12
Flffi A O@o*-

Fig. A 4-1 Operator Panel

1. System Status area 3. System Setup area
2. Displays area 4. System Controls area

Turning the Seven-Day Clock Press the CLOCK key to turn the seven-day clock on and off. The
On and Off CLOCK light turns on when the clock is on. lf the clock is not turned on,
the unit's automatic, clock-related functions will not occur.

Automatically Starting the Unit
When the seven-day clock is on, the heaters turn on automatically. lf your
unit has a piston pump and if the auto-energize pump feature is on, the
pump will automatically start either when the system reaches the READY
condition or the when tank reaches a temperature you have selected. lf
your unit has a gear pump, press the PUMP key afier the READY light
turns on to start the pump.

A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXV]-1 41 -3000v @00 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Operation A 4-3

Manually Starting the Unit lf you have not programmed your unit to staft automatically; use this
procedure to manually start your unit. lf you have programmed your unit
to start automatically, you will still need to start the unit manually when

a you need to start the unit before it is time for automatic stafiup
to occur

a you need to start the unit on a day for which the clock is turned off

. you need to start the unit because the clock was not turned on

1. lf the power is off, press the POWER switch to turn the unit on.

2. lf the auto-energize heaters feature is not on, press the HEATERS

key. The HEATERS light will turn on and unit will begin to heat.

3. Prepare each gun in your system for operation as follows:

o Air-operated guns: turn on the operating air.
o Electric guns: turn on the gun driver.
o Hand-operated guns: unlock the trigger.
4. Piston pump units only: turn on the pump air pressure and adjust it to
the setting that works best for your system.

5. Check the temperature setting for each heated zone.

6. Piston pump units only: lt the auto-energize pump feature is not on,
press the PUMP key after the READY light turns on. The PUMP light
willturn on and the pump will start.

7. Gear pump units only: When the READY light turns on, press the
PUMP key. The PUMP light willturn on and the pump will start.

The system is ready for routine operation.

o 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A4EN46-[3V-A-AAXV]-l

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A4-4 Operation

Checking the Adhesive Level Use this procedure to check the adhesive level and to refill the tank if
and Filling the Tank necessary.

WARNING: Risk of personal injury. When the tank lid is

opened, vapors may be released. Vent the application area or
wear a respirator for protection from vapors.

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Exposing melted

I
a
adhesive to air can accelerate the curing process, causing char.
Refer to General Hot Melt Material Processing lnstructions al
the beginning of this manual for adhesive material handling
guidelines.

1. Open the tank lid and check the adhesive level

2. Refillthe tank before the adhesive level drops below 50%. Use a
metal or plastic scoop to add unmelted adhesive to within 25 mm
(1 in.) of the top of the tank.

25 mm (1 in.)
50T"

1 2 3
4'130773

Fig. A 4-2 Filling the Tank

1. Refill level 2. Tank filling 3. Tank-fulllevel

3. Close the lid immediately after filling

A4EN{6-[3V-A-AAXVJ-1 41 -3000v @00 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Operation A 4-5

Placing the Unit ln Standby To place the unit in standby mode, press the STANDBY key. The
Mode STANDBY light willturn on and the READY light willturn off. The pump
will stop and the zone temperatures will drop. The heaters will maintain
heated zones at their standby temperature setpoints.

You can also program the unit to automatically enter the standby mode at
a specified time. Refer lo Programming CLOCK Controlsinthe
lnstallation section.

Taking the Unit Out of Standby To remove the unit from standby mode, press the STANDBY key. The
Mode STANDBY light willturn off and the unit will heat each active zone to its
operating temperature setpoint.

You can also program the unit to automatically exit the standby mode at a
specified time. Refer lo Programming CLOCK Controlsinlhe lnstallation
section.

@000 Nordson Coporatlon 41-3000v A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXV]-l

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 4-6 Operation

Automatically Shutting Down lf the CLOCK light is on and the system is programmed to turn the
the Unit heaters off automatically, the system willshut itself down.

Manually Shutting Down the Use this procedure to shut the unit down manually at any time.
Unit
1. Press the PUMP key. The PUNIP light will turn off and the pump will
stop.

2. Place a container under all guns and trigger the guns to relieve
system pressure.

3. Shut down all guns as follows:

. Air-operated guns: turn off the operating air.
o Electric guns: turn off the gun driver.
. Hand-operated guns: lock the trigger.
4. Piston pump units only: turn off the pump air pressure.

5. Press the HEATERS key. The HEATERS light willturn off

3. System Monitoring This part of lhe Operafion section contains the following system
monitoring procedures:
Procedures
o Checking the zone temperatures
. Checking the programmed settings
. Checking the fault log
. Running a system test
See Figure A 4-1 for the Vista operator panel keys and displays

A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXV]-I 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

lssued 5/00 All rights reseryed
 Operation A 4-7

Checking the Zone The Vista control system allows you to check the temperatures of all
Temperatures zones in sequence (to scan) or to continuously monitor the temperature
of a single zone (to monitor). When the unit is turned on, the
MONITOR/SCAN light turns on and the unit scans through the heated
zones and displays the temperature of each zone sequentially.

Press the MONITOR/SCAN key to take the unit out of the scan mode.
The MONITOR/SCAN light will stay on, but the unit will monitor only the
selected zone.

NOTE: Selecting a setting in the System Setup area willtake the unit out
of the monitor/scan mode and the MONITOR/SCAN light will turn off.
Press the MONITOF/SCAN key to return the system to monitor/scan
mode. lf no action is taken within two minutes, the control system will
automatically return to the monitor/scan mode.

Checking the Programmed lf you did not keep a record of the programmed settings, use this
SYSTEM SEI7TMS Features procedure to check the settings.

1. Press the Move Up and Move Down keys until the SYSTEM
. SETTINGS light turns on.

2. Press the Up key below the Selector display until the feature number
for the feature you want to check appears in the display. Refer to the
SYSTEM SETTINGS Features Table in lhe lnstallation section for a
description of each feature number.

3. Check the Multipurpose display to determine the setting for the

feature.

4. To change the setting for the feature, refer to Programming SYSTEM

SEfflNGS Controlsinthe lnstallafion section of this manual.

@000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v A4EN{6-[3V-A-AAXVI-I

All righls reseryed
lssued 5/00
A 4-8 Operation

Checking the Warning or Fault Use this procedure to check the warning or fault log. These logs list the
Log causes of the three most recent warnings or faults. The actual
temperature display shows the length of time the heaters have been on
when the warning/fault occured.

1. Press the Move Up and Move Down keys until the SYSTEM
SETTINGS light turns on.

2. Press the Up key below the Selector display until the feature number
of the warning or fault you want to check appears in the display.
Flefer to Table A 4-1 or A 4-2.

NOTE: Press the right arrow key to scroll through the features in
increments of 10.

Table A 4-1 Warning Log Feature Numbers

Feature No. Warning Displayed

35 The zone number and warning code for the

most recent warning will be displayed in the
Multipurpose display.
36 The zone number and warning code for the
second most recent warning will be
displayed in the Multipurpose display.
37 The zone number and warning code for the
third most recent warning will be displayed
in the Multipurpose display.

Table A 4-2 Faull Log Feature Numbers

Feature No. Fault Displayed

27 The zone number and fault code for the

most recent fault will be displayed in the
Multipurpose display.
28 The zone number and fault code for the
second most recent fault will be displayed
in the Multipurpose display.

29 The zone number and fault code for the

thiid most recent fault will be displayed in
the Multipurpose display.

A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXV]-1 41 -3000v e000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Operation A 4-9

3. Check the Multipurpose display to determine the warning or fault

code of the warning or fault currently displayed; then refer to
Table A 4 -3 and either Table A 4-4 or A 4-5 to determine the meaning
of the warning or fault code.

Multipurpose Display Actua! Temperature Display

zone number - code heaters on time when
faulVwarning occurred.

For example, 3-2 in the multipurpose display would indicate that

hose 2 has an open RTD and the number in the temperataure display
would indicate how long the heaters had been on when the warning or
fault occurred.

Table A 4-3 Zone Codes for Warning and Fault Logs

# Zone # Zone # Zone
0 Tank 5 Hose 4 10 Gun 3
1 Grid 6 Hose 5 11 Gun 4
2 Hose 1 7 Hose 6 12 Gun 5
3 Hose 2 I Gun 1 13 Gun 6
4 Hose 3 I Gun 2

Table A 4-4 Meaning of Warning Codes

Warning Code Meaning of Warning Code
0 No fault has occurred.
1 Not used.
2 An RTD is open.
3 An RTD is shorted.
4 A zone temperature is out of band.
5 Not used.
6 Not used.

Table A 4-5 Meaning of Fault Codes

Fault Code Meaning of Fault Code
0 No fault has occurred.
1 A zone is below the setpoint temperature.
2 An RTD is open.
o An RTD is shorted.
4 A zone is overtemperature.
5 The control board is bad.
6 A brownout has occurred.

e000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXVI-1

All righls resewed
lssued 5/00
A 4-10 Operation
Checking the Warning or Fault
Log (contd)
Running a System Test
4. Operating Procedures for
Optional Features
A4EN{6-[3V-A-AAXV]-1
NOTE: Refer to the following sections of this manual for additional
troubleshooting and repair information:
a The Hydraulbs section contains troubleshooting and repair
procedures for the pump and manifold assemblies.
a The Control section contains troubleshooting and repair
procedures for system board and heating zone problems.
4. To clear the warning log, pressing the CLEAR FAULTS key.
After you have corrected a problem that caused the unit to register a
fault, press the CLEAR FAULTS key to run a system test. During the
five-second test, the following occur:
. All lights on the operator panelturn on.
o lnformation in the Displays area changes.
Problem corrected? Result:
Yes The FAULT light turns off when the test is
complete and the system will enter the
monitor/scan mode.
No The FAULT light stays on when the test is
complete. Refer to Checking the Fault Log
in this section.
lf your unit has special features or options, such as a low-level indicator
or an inpuVoutput board, refer to lhe Options section of this manual for
any operating procedures.
41 -3000v o 2000 Nordson Corporation
All dghls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Operation A 4-11

5. Procedure for Changing Contact your material supplier about the compatibility of the old and new
materials. lf the old and new adhesives are compatible, add the new
Adhesives adhesive to the tank. lf the new adhesive is not compatible with the old
one, ask your supplier for an acceptable flushing material to thoroughly
clean the system.

Use this procedure to clean the system before changing to an adhesive

that is incompatible with the old one.

1. Ensure that the unit is at operating temperature.

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve system

pressure. Failure to obserue may result in serious burns.

2. Relieve system pressure. Referto Relieving System Pressureinlhe

Maintenance section of this manual.

3. Drain the unit by pumping as much adhesive from the tank as

possible using one of the following methods.

Method of Draining Description

Gun Place a suitable container under each gun

nozzle. Remove each nozzle from its gun.
Turn on the pump by pressing the PUMP
key and pump the adhesive out through the
gun.
Manifold Pump the adhesive out through the
manifold. Refer to the filter flushing
procedure for your filter in lhe Maintenance
section of this manual.
Hose Disconnect a hose from its gun. Replace
the dust cover, which was removed during
installation, on the hose electrical
receptacle. Position the hose over a
suitable waste container and secure it.
Turn the pump on by pressing the PUMP
key and pump the adhesive out through the
hose.

@O00 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXV]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
A 4-12 Operation

5. Procedure for Changing

Adhesives @ontd)

4 103998

Fig. A 4-3 Methods of Draining the Unit

1. Draining through the gun 2. Draining through the manifold 3. Draining through the hose
(typical manifold shown)

4. lf you have not already done so, disconnect each hose in the system
from its gun.

5. Clean each automatic gun and hand-operated gun as needed. Refer

to the gun manualfor information on gun disassembly, cleaning, and
rebuilding.

6. Flush the system with the flushing material recommended by your

adhesive supplier. Refer to the procedure To Flush the System with a
Flushing Materialor the procedure To Flush the System with Type R
. Fluidinlhe Maintenance section of this manual.

A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXV]-1 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Operation A 4-13

7. Check the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for the recommended
operating temperature of the new adhesive. lf the temperature is
different from the old adhesive, reprogram your unit's temperature
settings. Refer to Table A 4-6.

Table A 4-6 Temperature Programming Procedures

Type of Temperature Setting Programming Procedure

Overtemperatu re setpoint Refer to Programming SYSTEM

SETPOINT or STANDBY
temperature setpoint
SEF/NGS Controlsinthe
lnstallation section of this manual.
Refer to Programming
T E M P E R AT U R E Co ntro I s in lhe
lnstallation section of this manual

The unit is ready for routine operation. Refer to Operating Proceduresin

this section.

@000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v A4EN-06-[3V-A-AAXVI-1

All riqhls reseNed
lssued 5/00
A 4-14 Operation

A4EN{6-[3V-A-AAXV]-1 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserued
lssued 5/00
 Part A, Section 5

Maintenance

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model 3100v
3400v
3500v
3860y
3890v
3930v
Voltage Ail
Pump Piston (D, E, F, or G)
Manifold 4-Port (A)
Control Vista Standard (V)
Vista Pattern (PC)
Vista Temperature (TC)

q898 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v A5 EN-07-[3V-X-AXAX]-5

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
A 5-0 Maintenance

A5EN{7-[3V-X-AXAE-5 41-3000v @98 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
 Maintenance A 5-1

Section A 5
Maintenance

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform the

following tasks. Follow the safety instructions in this document
and all other related documentation.

1. lntroduction Performing routine maintenance can extend the life of your unit and
decrease the downtime caused by repairs. This section of the manual
describes how to
. schedule maintenance activities
. check the run time of the heaters
. relieve system pressure
. replace the o-rings on hose connectors and plugs
o flush the manifold filter
o clean the manifold filter
o flush the system
For information on repairing your unit, refer to the repair procedures in
lhe Hydraulics, Control, or Tanksections of this manual.

@ 1998 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A5EN-07-[3V-X-AXAXFS

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
A 5-2 Maintenance

2. MaintenanceSchedule Use Table A 5-1 to develop a maintenance schedule for your unit. Adjust
how often you perform maintenance based on your operating
environment. You may find that more or less frequent maintenance is
required in some cases.

Table A 5-1 Recommended Maintenance Schedule

Frequency Based on Description of Maintenance
Run Time of Heaters
(See Note A)

Every 8 hours Clean the exterior surfaces of the unit and guns.
Check the system for leaks. To replace damaged hose connector or plug o-rings, refer
lo Replacing Hose Connector or Plug O-Rings in this section.
Flush the manifold filter. Refer to Flushing a Standard Manifold Filterin this section.
Every 40 hours Clean the manifold filter. Refer to Cleaning a Standard Manifold Filterin this section.
Clean removable nozzles. Refer to the nozzle cleaning procedure in the maintenance
section of the gun manual.
Every 160 hours Check all electrical connections and terminal blocks for tightness, including those
inside the electrical enclosure.
As needed Clean the air regulator filter element.
Clean the inside of the electrical enclosure.
Check electrical connections and terminal blocks for tightness.
Check the hose connections.
Flush the system with a flushing material. Refer to Ftushing the System in this section

NOTE A: To find out how many hours your system has been running with the heaters on, refer lo Checking Run
Time of Heafers in this section.

AsEN{7-[3V-X-AXAX]-s 41-3000y €998 Nordson Corporatlon

lssued 9/98 All rights reserved
 Maintenance A 5-3

Checking Run Time of Heaters Use this procedure to check the total number of hours that the heaters
have been running.

1. Press the Move Up or the Move Down key until the SYSTEM
SETTINGS light turns on.

2. Press the Up key below the Selector display until feature number 26
appears in the display.

3. Check the displays above the Multipurpose keys and above the Enter
key. Read them from left to right to see the total number of hours that
the heaters have been running, up to 999,999 hours.

3. Maintenance Procedures This part of the manual contains the maintenance procedures referenced
in Table A 5-1 and the procedure for relieving system pressure.

Relieving System Pressure System pressure must be properly relieved before you can safely
proceed with many of the maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair
procedures in this manual. Follow this procedure whenever you are
instructed to relieve system pressure.

WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

safety goggles, and heat-protective gloves. Hot melt material
may be released under pressure.

1. Ensure that the unit is at operating temperature.

2. Turn the air pressure regulator fully counterclockwise to reduce the

pump air pressure to 0.

3. Place a container under all guns and the manifold drain valve.

4. Trigger one or more guns until adhesive stops flowing.

5. See Figure A 5-1. Open the manifold drain valve and allow some
adhesive to drain from the manifold.

6. Close the manifold drain valve.

4103997

Fig. A 5-1 Opening the Manifold

Drain Valve

@998 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v AsEN-07-[3V-X-AXAXI-s

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
A 5-4 Maintenance

Replacing Hose Connector or Use this procedure to replace damaged hose connector or plug o-rings.
Plug O-Rings Refer to Recommended Spare Parts and Supplies at the front of this
manual for o-ring part numbers.

To Remove Hose Connector or Plug O-Rings

1. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure in this

section.

2. To remove the o-ring from a hose-port plug, complete steps 3 and 4

To remove the o-ring from a hose connector, complete steps 5-8.

3. See Figure A5-2. Use an Allen wrench to remove the o-ring plug
from the hose port on the manifold.

4. See Figure A5-2. Bemove the o-ring from the plug.

4130552

Fig. A 5-2 Removing a Hose Plug

and O-Ring

5. Disconnect the hose electrical connector from the electrical

receptacle directly above the hose connection.

6. Disconnect the hose from the hose connector using two wrenches.
Select the wrenches using Table A 5-2 and use them as shown in
Figure A 5-3.

4130s94

Fig. A 5-3 Correct Way to Remove

or Tighten a Hose

Table A 5-2 Wrench Sizes Needed for Hose Connections

Hose Size Connector Hose-Fitting Wrench
(lnternal Diameter) Wrench Size Size
8 mm (s/16 in.) 16 mm (s/e in.) 18 mm (11/16 in.)
16 mm (s/a in.) 32 mm (11/+ in.) 32 mm (11/4 in.)
29 mm (11/8 in.) Use large, adjustable wrenches.

AsEN-07-[3V-X-AXAX]-s 41-3000v @898 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
 Maintenance A 5-5

7. See Figure A 5-4. Use an open-end wrench to remove the hose

connector from the hose port.

8. Remove the o-ring from the hose connector.

4103397

Fig. A 5-4 Removing a Hose

Connector

To lnstall Hose Connector or Plug O-Rings

CAUTION: Use only Nordson Viton o-rings. Other o-rings can

cause leaks.

1. Check that the new o-ring and the threads of the hose port are free of
debris. Lubricate the o-ring groove with o-ring lubricant.

CAUTION: Do not stretch the o-ring more than necessary.

Stretching the o-ring can cause leaks.

2. Stretch the o-ring and roll it over the threads of the hose connector or
plug so that it rests in the o-ring groove.

3. Lubricate the threads of the hose connector or hose plug with Teflon
paste.

4. See Figure A 5-5. Thread the connector or plug by hand into the port
on the unit.

4t03398

Fig. A 5-5 Threading a Hose

Connector into a Hose
Port

@998 Nordson Corporation 41 -3000y A5EN-07-[3V-X-AXAX]-5

All rights reserved lssued 9/98
A 5-6 Maintenance

To lnstall Hose Connector or Plug O-Rings (contd.)

5. Tighten the hose connector or hose plug.

To tighten a... Do this

Hose connector Select two wrenches using

Table A 5-2 and use them as
shown in Figure A 5-3.
Hose plug Use an Allen wrench.

6. Torque the connector or plug to 0.79-1 .13 N.m (7-10 lb-in.).

7. Remove the lockout and restore power to the system.

8. After the unit reaches READY status, purge the system of trapped air
by removing the gun nozzles and triggering the guns.

9. Reassemble the nozzles onto the guns.

Flushing a Standard Manifold Use this procedure to flush the manifold filter. Flushing the manifold filter
Filter removes excess dirt and charred materialthat can clog the system and
cause poor system performance.

WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

safety goggles, and heat-protective gloves. Hot melt material
may be released under pressure.

1. Ensure that the unit is at operating temperature.

2. Turn the air pressure regulator fully counterclockwise to reduce the

pump air pressure to 0.

3. Place containers under all guns and the manifold drain valve. lf
necessary open the manifold filter and drain valve cover.

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve system

pressure. Failure to obserue may result in serious burns.

4. Trigger the guns to relieve system pressure.

5. See Figure A 5-1. Open the manifold drain valve.

A5EN{7-[3V-X-AXAE-s 41-3000y @ 1998 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
 Maintenance A5-7

6. lncrease the pump air pressure by turning the air pressure regulator
clockwise until a clean, steady flow of adhesive flows from the drain.
Allow adhesive to flow until no traces of char are present.

7. Return the pump air pressure to 0.

8. Close the manifold drain valve.

9. Return the pump air pressure to the operating setting.

Cleaning a Standard Manifold Use this procedure to clean the manifold filter. Cleaning the filter
Filter removes excess dirt and charred material that can clog the system and
cause poor system performance

WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

safety goggles, and heat-protective gloves. Hot melt material
may be released under pressure.

1. Ensure that the unit is at operating temperature.

2. Flush the manifold filter. Refer to Flushing a Standard Manifold Filter

in this section.

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve pressure.

Failure to observe may result in serious burns.

3. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure in this

section.

4. See Figure A 5-6. Loosen the filter using a wrench. A socket-type

wrench is recommended.

c,,,",*
Fig. A 5-6 Loosening the Filter

@898 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v As E N-07-[3V-X-AXAX]-5

All dghts reserved
lssued 9/98
A 5-8 Maintenance

Cleaning a Standard Manifold 5. See Figure A5-7. Pull the filter assembly out of the manifold
Filter @ontd1

41

Fig. A 5-7 Removing the Filter

Assembly

6. See Figure A 5-8. Remove the screw in the back of filter assembly
and separate the filter screen from the assembly.

Fig. A 5-8 Removing the Filter Screen

As EN-07-[3V-X-AXAXI-5 41 -3000v @998 Nordson Corporalion

lssued 9/98 All rights reserved
 Maintenance A 5-9

7. Use one of the following methods to clean the filter components

WARNING: Risk of fire. Do not heat Nordson Type R cleaning

fluid above 246 "C (475'F). Do not heat cleaning fluid with an
open flame or in an unregulated heating device (for example, a
small pan on an unregulated hot plate). A fire hazard exists if
an open flame or an unregulated heating device is used to heat
cleaning fluid. Use only a controlled heating device (such as a
small, deep fat fryer or thermostatically-controlled hot plate) to
heat the fluid above the melting temperature of the hot melt ma-
terial.

CAUTION: Do not use a metal brush to clean a manifold filter

screen. Doing so can damage the screen and prevent the filter
from operating properly.

a Place the components (except for the o-ring) in a container of

Type R cleaning fluid and heat the fluid until it is above the melting
point of the adhesive. Scrub the components with a fine-bristled
brush. Remember to scrub the filter screen inside and out. Wipe
the components with a clean, dry cloth.

a Use a flameless, electric heat gun or compressed hot air to heat

the components. Wipe the components with a clean, dry cloth.

a Use an ultrasonic cleaner filled with cleaning fluid to soak the

components, then wipe the components with a clean, dry cloth.

8. lnspect the filter screen and o-ring for damage. A dent or break in the
filter screen mesh means that the screen is damaged beyond repair
and should be replaced.

@ 1998 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v A5EN-07-[3V-X-AXAX]-5

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
A 5-10 Maintenance

Cleaning a Standard Manifold 9. See Figure A 5-9. Reassemble the filter,

Filter @ontd.)

,tn?oo,

Fig. A 5-9 Assembling the Manifold Filter

CAUTION: Ensure that the unit is at operating temperature

before reinstalling the filter. Cold materialfrom the filter or
manifold walls can cause the filter screen to collapse if it is
tightened in a cold system.

1. Ensure that the unit is at operating temperature.

2. Slide the filter assembly into the manifold and tighten it until it is
finger-tight only.

3. Follow these steps to flush the manifold again:

g. Open the manifold drain valve.
h. Turn the air pressure regulator fully counterclockwise to reduce
the pump air pressure to 0.
i. lncrease the pump air pressure by turning the air pressure
regulator clockwise until a clean, steady flow of adhesive flows
from the drain. Drain approximately 0.25 L (8 oz) of adhesive.
j. Return the pump air pressure to 0.
k. Close the manifold drain valve.
4. Tighten the filter assembly until it seats. Do not overtighten.

5. Return the pump air pressure to the normal operating setting.

AsEN{7-[3V-X-AXAX]-5 41-3000v @E)98 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
 Maintenance A 5-11

Flushing the System Use this procedure to periodically flush the system with hot melt material,
a flushing material, or Type R cleaning fluid. System flushing removes
excess dirt and charred materialthat can clog the system and cause poor
system performance. You should also flush the system when you switch
to a new type of hot melt materialthat is incompatible with the old
material. lf you are unsure whether the materials are compatible, contact
your material supplier.

To Prepare for Flushing the System

1. Ensure that the unit is at operating temperature

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve system

pressure. Failure to observe may result in serious burns.

2. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure in this

section.

3.' See Figure A 5-10. Drain the unit by pumping as much hot melt
material from the tank as possible using one of the following methods

Method of Draining Description

Gun Place a suitable container under each gun
nozzle. Remove each nozzle from its gun.
Return the pump air pressure to its normal
setting and pump the hot melt material out
through the gun.
Manifold Pump the hot melt material out through the
manifold. Refer to Flushing a Standard
Manifold Filterin this section.
Hose Disconnect a hose from its gun. Replace
the dust cover, which was removed during
installation, over the hose electrical
receptacle. Position the hose over a
suitable waste container and secure it.
Return the pump air pressure to its normal
setting and pump the hot melt material out
through the hose.

@998 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A5 E N-07-[3V-X-A XAX]-s

All dghts reserued
lssued 9/98
A 5-12 Maintenance

To Prepare for Flushing the System (contd.)

4103998

Fig. A 5-10 Methods of Draining the Unit

1. Draining through the gun 2. Draining through the manifold 3. Draining through the hose

4. lf you have not already done so, disconnect each hose in the system
from its gun.

5. Clean each automatic gun and handgun as needed. Refer to the gun
manualfor information on gun disassembly, cleaning, and rebuilding.

6. Refer to Table A 5-3 to determine which method of flushing the

system is best for your operation.

A5EN47-[3V-X-AXAX]-5 41 -3000y @998 Nordson Corporation

lssued 9/98 All dghls reserved
 Maintenance A 5-13

Table A 5-3 Advantages and Disadvantages of System Flushing Procedures

Flushing Procedure
Using hot melt material
Using a flushing material
recommended by your
adhesive supplier and
approved by your Nordson
representative
Using Type R fluid
NOTE A: Time needed varies depending on how much char must be removed.
B: Because operating conditioris vary from plant to plant, you may find that more or less frequent flushing
is required.
Time Needed Best Used for...
(See Note A) (See Note B)
About t hour Routine cleaning when the
system is relatively free of
char.
From2ll2to 5 hours Occasional cleaning when
there is some char
buildup.
From 3 to 13 hours Thorough cleaning when
there is significant char
buildup.
Advantages and
Disadvantages
The advantage of this
method is that it requires
less downtime. However,
it is not as thorough as the
other two methods.
Although this method
requires more downtime,
it does a good job of
removing char buildup
from the system.
However, to remove all
char you may need to
scrub the tank. You will
also need to purchase and
store flushing material,
which may have special
storage and disposal
requirements.
This procedure is the most
thorough way to remove I
char. You may also need
to scrub the tank to
remove allchar.
Disadvantages are that
you cannot flush Type R
fluid through the hoses;
accidentally doing so can
cause later downtime.
Type Fl fluid is expensive
but can be reused several
times if the used fluid is
strained into a storage
container. The fluid is
considered a regulated
waste.

€N)98 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y A5EN{7-[3V-X-AXAX]-5

All righls reserved
lssued 9/98
A 5-14 Maintenance

To Prepare for Flushing the System (contd.)

7. Refer to the appropriate procedure for the flushing method you have
selected:
. To Flush the System with Hot Melt Material
. To Flush the System with a Ftushing Ailaterial
. To Flush the System with Type R Fluid

To Flush the System with Hot Melt Material

1. Before beginning this procedure, first complete the procedure Io
Prepare tor Flushing the System earlier in this section.

NOTE: This procedure describes how to flush all hoses at once

However, for maximum cleaning of badly charred hoes, use this
procedure and flush each hose one at a time.

2. See Figure A 5-11. lf you have not already done so, secure the free
end of each hose (1) to a container (2) that will be used to collect the
hot melt material.

4904034

Fig. A 5-11 Securing a Hose to a

Waste Container
1. Hose
2. Waste container

3. Using a metal or plastic scoop, fill the tank to within 25 mm (1 in.) of

the top with fresh, clean hot melt material.

4. Allow the unit to reach operating temperature.

5. Gradually increase pump air pressure by turning the air pressure

regulator clockwise to pump hot melt materialthrough the system
until the material is free of char and contaminants.

6. Decrease pump air pressure to 0 by turning the valve fully

counterclockwise.

AsEN-07-[3V-X-AXAX]-5 41-3000y @ 1998 Nordson Corporation

All rights resewed
lssued 9/98
 Maintenance A 5-15

CAUTION: Using a metal brush or scraper can damage

Teflon-coated tanks. Use a stiff-bristled, nonmetal brush when
cleaning a Teflon-coated tank.

7. Use a stiff-bristled, non-metal brush or similar tool to scrub the tank or

dislodge as much char and debris as possible. Do not use a metal
brush or scraper on Teflon-coated tanks.

NOTE: lf this procedure does not remove allthe charred material,

you may need to replace the tank. Refer to the procedure for
replacing the tank in the Tanksection of this manual.

B. Clean the manifold filter. Refer to Cleaning a Standard Manifold Filter

in this section.

9. Go tothe procedure To Restore the Unitto Normal Operationin this

section.

To Flush the System with a Flushing Material

WARNING: Use the flushing material at the manufacturer's

recommended temperature, which will be below the hot melt
material's flash point. Failure to obserue this warning can
cause a fire.

WABNING: Never flush your system or clean any aluminum

components with halogenated hydrocarbon cleaning solutions.
These cleaning solutions are e)dremely dangerous when used
to clean aluminum components in a pressurized fluid system.

CAUTION: Do not use this procedure to flush your system with

Type R fluid. This procedure instructs you to pump flushing
material through the hoses. Flushing Type R fluid through
hoses can cause large pieces of char to break off and clog the
nozzles during later operation. lf you plan to use Type R fluid to
flush your system, refer the procedure To Flush the System with
Type R Fluidin this section.

Gtr)98 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v AsEN{7-[3V-X-AXAXI-s

All dghts reserued
lssued 9/98
A 5-16 Maintenance

To Flush the System with a Flushing Material (contd.)

CAUTION: Certain flushing materials can damage seals and

o-rings, resulting in poor pump performance. Be sure that the
flushing material you use has been approved by your Nordson
representative. To determine the best flushing material to use,
contact your adhesive supplier.

1. Before beginning this procedure, first complete the procedure Io

Prepare for Flushing the System earlier in this section.

NOTE: This procedure describes how to flush all hoses at once.

However, for maximum cleaning of badly charred hoses, use this
procedure and flush each hose one at a time.

2. See Figure A 5-11. lf you have not already done so, secure the free
end of each hose to a container that will be used to collect the hot
melt material.

3. Set the tank and hose temperature to the recommended temperature

of the flushing material. Refer to System Programming Proceduresin
lhe lnstallation section of this manual.

4. Pour the flushing material into the empty tank to within 25 mm (1 in.)
of the top of the tank.

5. When the unit reaches the preset temperature, gradually increase

pump air pressure by turning the air pressure regulator clockwise and
pump materialthrough the system untilthe flushing material starts to
come out.

6. Decrease pump air pressure to 0 by turning the valve fully

counterclockwise.

7. Allow the remaining material to drain from the hoses.

8. See Figure A5-12. Remove the hoses from the collection container,
place them over the tank, and secure them.

410ts422

Fig. A 5-12 Securing a Hose to the

Tank

A5EN{7-[3V-X-AXAX]-5 41-3000v q898 Nordson Corporation

All ,ights reserved
lssued 9/98
 Maintenance A 5-17

9. Slowly increase pump pressure by turning the air pressure regulator

clockwise so the flushing material circulates through the system
without splashing out of the tank. Allow the system to circulate for
one and one-half to four hours.

10. Decrease pump air pressure to 0 by turning the air pressure regulator
fully counterclockwise and wait for material to finish draining from the
hoses.

1'1. See Figure A 5-11. Remove the hoses from the tank, secure them
over a waste container and drain the flushing materialfrom the tank
into the container.

CAUTION: Using a metal brush or scraper can damage

Teflon-coated tanks. Use a stiff-bristled, nonmetal brush when
cleaning a Teflon-coated tank.

12. Use a stiff-bristled, nonmetal brush or similar tool to scrub the tank or
dislodge as much char and debris as possible. Do not use a metal
brush or scraper on Teflon-coated tanks.

NOTE: lf this procedure does not remove allthe charred material,

you may need to replace the tank. Refer to the procedure for
replacing the tank in the Iank section of this manual.

13. Using a metal or plastic scoop, fillthe tank to within 25 mm (1 in.) of

the top with fresh, clean hot melt material.

'14. Set the temperature of the tank to the lowest temperature that the
adhesive can be pumped at. Refer lo System Programming
Procedures inlhe lnstallaflon section of this manual.

15. Wait for the unit to reach the preset temperature, then drain 3/a of the
adhesive through the hoses into the waste container.

16. After you have drained 3/a of the material, reduce the pump air
pressure to 0 by turning the air pressure regulator fully
counterclockwise.

Gtr)98 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y AsEN-07-[3V-X-AXAE-s

All rights reserued
lssued 9/98
A 5-18 Maintenance

To Flush the System with a Flushing Material (contd)

17. Place a container under the manifold drain valve, open the valve, and
drain the remaining adhesive.

18. Clean the manifold filter. Refer to Cleaning a Standard Manifold Filter
in this section.

19. Go to the procedure Io Restore the Unit to Normal Operation in this

section.

To Flush the System with Type R Fluid

1. Before beginning this procedure, first complete the procedure Io
Prepare for Flushing the System earlier in this section.

2. Set the tank temperature 14-17'C (25-30 "F) higher than the
recommended application temperature of the adhesive. Refer to
System Programming Proceduresinlhe lnstallation section of this
manual.

3. PourType R fluid intothe emptytankto within 25 mm (1 in.) of the

top of the tank.

4. Use a clean paint brush or similar tool to apply fluid to areas not
submerged'in the fluid.

5. Allow the fluid to heat in the tank for 2-12 hours

6. As needed, use a wooden or plastic strainer to skim off the char and
adhesive that floats to the top of the tank.

CAUTION: Do not pump Type R fluid through hoses. Fluid

absorbed by char in the hoses may leach out or cause large
pieces of char to break off and clog a nozzle during later
operation.

7. Place a container under the manifold drain valve, open the valve, and
drain the fluid from the manifold.

NOTE: You can reuse the fluid if you place a strainer on the top of
the container used to collect it.

A5EN{7-[3V-X-AXAXI-s 41-3000y @998 Nordson Colporalion

lssued 9/98 All rights reserved
 Maintenance A 5-19

B. Close the manifold drain valve

9. Using a metal or plastic scoop, place several pounds of fresh, clean

hot melt material into the empty tank.

10. Set the temperature of the tank and hoses to the lowest temperature
that the adhesive can be pumped at. Refer to System Programming
Proceduresin lhe lnstallation section of this manual.

11 . See Figure A 5-11 . Secure the free end of the hose to a container
that will be used to collect the hot melt material.

12. When the tank and hoses reach their setpoint temperatures, gradually
increase pump pressure by turning the air pressure regulator
clockwise to pump adhesive through the hoses.

13. Continue pumping adhesive into the waste container until a clean,
steady stream of materialflows from each hose.

14. When material has finished draining, reduce the pump air pressure to
0 by turning the valve fully counterclockwise.

15. Clean the manifold filter. Refer lo Cleaning a Standard Manifold Filter
in this section.

16. Go to the procedure Io Restore the Unit to Normal Operation in this

section.

@898 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v A5EN{7-[3V-X-AXAX]-5

All dghts resewed
lssued 9/98
A 5-20 Maintenance

To Restore the Unit to Normal Operation

After flushing your system with hot melt material, a flushing material, or
Type R fluid, follow this procedure to restore your unit to normal
operation.

1. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit.

2. Reconnect each gun to its hose both electrically and mechanically

Refer to Mechanical lnstallation and Electrical lnstallationinlhe
lnstallation section of this manual.

3. Remove the lock-out and restore power to the unit.

4. lf you have changed the unit's temperature setpoints or if the

recommended operating temperature of the new adhesive is different
from the previous adhesive, reprogram the temperature settings.
Refer to System Programming Proceduresinlhe lnstallation section
of this manual.

5. Use a metal or plastic scoop to fill the tank with adhesive. Refer to
Filling the Tank with Adhesiveinthe lnstallation section of this
manual.

6. Return the pump air pressure to the operating setting

7. Resume normal operation

A5EN{7-[3V-X-AXAXI-5 41-3000y @998 l,lordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 9/98
 Part B, Section 1

Hydraulics

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model 3100y
3400y
3500v
3700v
Voltage Ail
Pump Piston (G)
Manifold 4-Port (A)
6-Port (B or C)
2-Porl (S orT)
Control Vista Standard (V)
Vista Pattern (PC)
Vista Temperature (TC)

@000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000y 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All rights resewed
lssued 5/00
B 1-0 Hydraulics

Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-1

Section B 1
Hydraulics

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform the

following tasks. Follow the safety instructions in this document
and all other related documentation.

1. lntroduction This section of the manual describes how to troubleshoot and repair the
hydraulic system. lt includes the following information:

a an overuiew of the unit's hydraulic system

a troubleshooting guidelines and procedures

a pump, actuator, solenoid valve, and manifold repair procedures

a pump, actuator, solenoid valve, air pressure regulator, and manifold

assembly parts lists

Refer to the parts lists at the end of this section for the part numbers of
any components that need to be replaced.

lf you try all the suggestions in this section and still need assistance
solving hydraulic system problems, call your Nordson representative.

Refer to the following sections of this manual for additional information on

the hydraulic system:

a Description includes pump specifications

a lnstallation includes the procedures for connecting the air supply to

the pump and installing hoses.

To replace the tank and manifold, refer to Tank. Iank includes the tank
assembly parts lists.

@ 2000 Nordson CoIporation

41-3000v 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2
All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-2 Hydraulics

2. Overview of the Two major assemblies make up the hydraulic system: an air-driven
piston pump and a manifold. See Figure B 1-1. The pump assembly
Hydraulic System includes an air section, a hydraulic section, and an actuator. The
manifold assembly, which is indirectly heated by the tank, includes an
aluminum manifold with hose ports, a filter assembly, a drain valve, and a
pressure relief valve.

4130033

Fig. B 1-1 Key Parts of the Hydraulic System (shown with a typical tank
and manifold)
1. Pump air section 3. Manifold
2. Pump hydraulic section 4. Actuator

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41 -3000v @O00 Nordson Corporalion

All rights resewed
lssued 5/00

3. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Table
Table B 1-lTroubleshooting Hydraulic System Problems
Problem
3. Pump stroking erratically
nconsistent adhesive
(i
output)
(See Note A)
4. Pump stroking too fast
(little or no adhesive
output)
5. Pump not stroking (no
adhesive output)
NOTE A: The pump should make two regularly spaced exhaust sounds. lf you hear two exhaust sounds followed
by a pause, the pump is stroking erratically (the hydraulic shaft is moving faster in one direction than the
other).
@O00 Nordson Corporatlon
All rights reserved
Hydraulics B 1-3
The following troubleshooting table describes the kinds of hydraulic
system problems you may encounter and provides corrective actions for
handling those problems. When necessary the table refers you to the
Troubleshooting Procedures part of this section, which contains more
detailed procedures for diagnosing hydraulic system problems.
Refer to the following table to troubleshoot hydraulic system problems.
Possible Cause Corrective Action
Adhesive leveltoo low Check the adhesive level. Add adhesive
if necessary. Refer to Checking the
Adhesive Leveland Filling the Tankin
Operation.
Adhesive temperature too low Check the temperature settings. Refer
to System Programming Procedures in
lnstallation.
Pump siphon ball seat dirty or Check the siphon ball seat. Refer to
missing Pump Siphon Ball Seat Check.
Pump hydraulic section dirty Clean the pump hydraulic section.
Refer to Cleaning or Rebuilding the
Pump.
Adhesive leveltoo low Check the adhesive level. Add adhesive
if necessary. Refer to Checking the
Adhesive Leveland Filling the Tankin
Operation.
Pressure relief valve defective Replace the pressure relief valve. Refer
to Replacing the Pressure Relief Valve.
Pump not turned on Wait for the READY light to turn on.
NOTE: For some standard Vista and
Vista PC units, you may need to turn
the pump on manually after the READY
light turns on. lf the auto-energize
pump feature is enabled, the pump will
turn on automatically.
No input air pressure to the pump Check the input air pressure. Adjust if
necessary.
Continued on next page
41-3000y 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2
lssued 5/00
B 1-4 Hydraulics

3. Troubleshooting @ontd)

Table B 1-1 ldentifying and Correcting System Faults (contd.)

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action
5. Pump not stroking Pump solenoid valve failed Check the solenoid valve. Refer to
(no adhesive output) Pump Solenoid Valve Check.
(contd.)

Blockage in manifold Check the manifold for blockage. Flefer

to Manifold Blockage Check.
Pump hydraulic section dirty Clean the pump hydraulic section.
Refer to Cleaning or Rebuilding the
Pump.

Pump leaking air (causes the pump to Locate the leak and replace damaged
make a loud noise) seals or O-rings. Refer to Pump Air
Section Check.

Pump actuator malfunctioning for one Check for a malfunctioning actuator.

or more of the following reasons: Refer to Actuator Check.

a air valve binding Disassemble and clean the air valve.

Refer to Cleaning or Replacing the Air
Valve.

a shifter fork slipped out of position Check the position of the fork and
reposition if necessary. Refer to
Repositioning or Replacing the Shifter
Fork.

a shifter fork installed upside down
Check the position of the fork and
reposition if necessary. The fork should
be positioned with the side stamped UP
facing the air motor. Refer to
Repositioning or Replacing the Shifter
Fork.

a shifter fork bent or damaged Replace the fork. Refer to Repositioning

or Replacing the Shifter Fork.
a magnet assembly dirty or Clean or replace the magnet assembly.
damaged Refer to Cleaning or Replacing the
Magnet Assembly.

a bumper assembly dirty or Replace the bumper assembly. Refer to

damaged Replacing the Bumper Assembly.

a shifter fork magnet loose Replace the fork. Refer to Repositioning

or Replacing the Shifter Fork.

B'l EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 4't-3000y O 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-5

Trou bleshooti ng P rocedu res Use these procedures as directed in Tiable B 1-1 to further diagnose
hydraulic system problems.

Manifold Blockage Check

1. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

2. Make sure the READY light is lit and the pump is turned on.

3. See Figure B 1-2. Place a container under the manifold drain valve,
open the valve, and allow adhesive to flow from the valve.

Filter Type Procedure for Opening Drain Valve

Standard Turn the drain valve counterclockwise
Reverse-flush With the manifold filter in the RUN position, turn the
right-side drain valve counterclockwise.

\ 3

Fig. B 1-2 Opening the Manifold Drain Valve

1. A manifold (standard filter) 3. C or T manifold
2. B or s manifold (standard filter) (reverse-flush filter)

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All dghts reseryed
lssued 5/00
B 1-6 Hydraulics

Manifold Blockage Check @ontd)

4. Slowly increase the pump air pressure and check to see if the pump
is stroking.

Pump Action
Strokes There is no blockage in the manifold. Close the
drain valve and return to Table B 1-1 .
Does not stroke The manifold may be blocked. Remove and clean
the manifold filter. Refer lo Cleaning a Standard
Manifold Filteror Cleaning a Reverse-Flush
Manifold Filter in Maintenance.

Pump Siphon Ball Seat Check

1. Make sure the READY light is lit and the pump is turned on

2. See Figure B 1-2. Place a container under the manifold drain valve
and open the valve.

Filter Type Procedure for Opening Drain Valve

Standard Turn the drain valve counterclockwise
Reverse-flush With the manifold filter in the RUN position, turn the
right-side drain valve counterclockwise.

3. Turn the pump air pressure regulator alternately counterclockwise

and clockwise to increase and decrease pump air pressure. This
should remove any particles lodged between the siphon ball and its
seat.

4. Check to see if the pump is stroking normally or erratically.

Pump strokes Action

Normally Resume operation
Erratically Remove and clean the pump. Refer to Cleaning or
Rebuilding the Pump.

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-7

Actuator Check
1. Remove the pump cover

2. See Figure B 1-3. Thread an M4 screw into the top of the air valve
spool.

4130032

Fig. B 1-3 Manually Shifting the Air Valve

3. Alternately press down and pull up on the screw to manually shift the
air valve.

a lf the air valve does not move, refer to Pump actuator

malfunctioning for one or more of the following reasons under
Pump does not stroke in Table B 1-1 .

a lf the pump strokes when the air valve is shifted but will not stroke
on its own, refer to Pump actuator malfunctioning for one of more
of the following reasons under Pump does not strokein
Table B 1-1.

a lf the pump does not stroke, then the pump is leaking air or is
jammed. Refer to Pump Air Section Checklo check for air leaks.
lf an air leak is not the problem, then the pump is jammed. Refer
to Cleaning or Rebuilding the Pump to clean the pump air or
hydraulic section.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 4'l-3000y 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXJ-2

All ,ights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 1-8 Hydraulics

Pump Solenoid Valve Check

1. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

2. Remove the pump cover.

3. Disconnect the air input line from the actuator.

4. Make sure the READY light is lit and the pump is turned on.

5. Slowly increase pump air pressure.

6. Check the disconnected air input line for air flow.

Condition Action
Airflows. The solenoid valve is functioning properly. Reduce
the pump air pressure to 0, reconnect the air input
line, and return to Table B 1-1.
Air does not Go to the next step
flow.

WARNING: Risk of electrical shock. Failure to observe

electrical safety procedures may result in personal injury or
death. Allow only qualified personnelto perform the following
procedures. Obserue all high voltage indicators.

7. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening the Electrical

Enclosurein Control.

B. Locate connector J9 on the power board and measure the voltage at

positions 1 and2.

Voltage Action
22.8-25.2VDC Replace the solenoid valve. Refer to Pump
Solenoid Valve Repair Procedures.
Less than Replace the power board. Refer to Replacing the
22.8VDC Power Boardin Control.

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporalion

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved
 Hydraulics B 1-9

Pump Air Section Check

1. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

2. Remove the pump cover.

3. Make sure the READY light is lit and the pump is turned on.

4. See Figure B 1-4. Slowly increase pump air pressure and check for
leaks

. at the actuator's top or bottom exhaust port (1)

. at the top of the hydraulic shaft (2)

. between the air cylinder head and the air cylinder or between the
air cylinder and the pump mount (3)

. between the actuator and air cylinder (4)

3
1

413003S

Fig. B 1-4 Checking for Pump Air Section Leaks

1. Exhaust ports 3. Between air cylinder head and
2. Top of hydraulic shaft air cylinder or between air
cylinder and pump mount
4. Between actuator and air
cylinder

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v Bl EN-02-[3V-X,AGXX]-2

All jights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-10 Hydraulics

Pump Air Section Check @ontd)

5. Take appropriate action based on the source of the leak.

Air is Action
Not leaking Replace the pump cover and return to Table B 1-1.
Leaking from the Replace the piston cups and washers. Befer to the
actuator's top or appropriate procedures in Cleaning or Rebuilding
bottom exhaust the Pump.
port

Leaking from the Replace the U-cup. Refer to the appropriate

top of the procedures in Cleaning or Rebuilding the Pump.
hydraulic shaft

Leaking Replace the air cylinder and pump mount O-rings.

between the air Referto the appropriate proceduresin Cleaning or
cylinder head Rebuilding the Pump.
and the air
cylinder or
between the air
cylinder and the
pump mount

Leaking Replace the actuator O-rings. Refer to the

between the appropriate procedures in Cleaning or Rebuilding
actuator and the the Pump.
air cylinder

4. Pump Bepair Procedures Use these procedures to replace the piston pump, to replace any pump
component, or to clean pump components. Refer to the parts lists at the
end of this section for the part numbers of any components that need to
be replaced. You can also use the pump parts list illustration as a guide
as your perform the following disassembly and reassembly procedures.

NOTE: lf you are replacing only the actuator, you do not need to remove
the pump. To replace only the actuator, complete Replacing the Actuator
in Actuator Repair Procedures.

Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000y e000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-11

Cleaning or Rebuilding the Use.these procedures to disassemble the pump, to clean or replace
Pump pump components, and to reassemble the pump.

Preparation for Pump Removal

1. Make sure the unit is at operating temperature.

2. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve pfessure.

Failure to obserue this warning may result in serious burns.

3. Relieve system pressure. Referto Relieving System Pressurein

Maintenance.

WARNING: Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the unit.

Failure to obserue this warning can result in personal injury or
death.

4. Turn the unit off; then disconnect and lock out power to the unit.

5. Remove the pump cover.

6. Disconnect the air input line from the actuator.

Pump Removal

WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

safety goggles, and heat-protective gloves.

1. lf you have not already done so, complete Preparation for Pump
Removal.

2. Remove the screws and washers that secure the pump to the unit.

3. Make sure the adhesive around the pump has not solidified. Reheat
if necessary.

4. Rotate the pump slightly to break the suction and pull the pump
straight up to remove it. Lay the pump on a clean, flat work surface.

NOTE: To install a new pump and actuator assembly, go lo Pump

lnstallation.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y BlEN-02-[3V-X-AGffi:2

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 1-12 Hydraulics

Actuator Removal
1. Move the hydraulic shaft up or down until shifter fork is centered in
the pump mount.

2. See Figure B 1-5. Remove the screws and washers (1) that secure
the actuator (3);then remove the actuator.

NOTE: Series 3100t4 34OOV and 3500Vunits also have a pump

cover bracket (2) that must be removed.

3. lnspect the O-rings (4) in the face of the air cylinder for damage.
Replace if necessary.

3 4
2

4130831

Fig. B 1-5 Removing the Actuator

1. Screwandwasher 3. Actuator
2. Pump cover bracket 4. O-ring
(Series 310014 3400V
and 3500Vunits only)

B1 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-13

Pump Air Section Disassembly

1. Make sure you have removed the actuator. Refer to Actuator
Removal.

2. See Figure B 1-6. Remove the screw and washer (2) from the shifter
fork (1); then slide the fork toward the air cylinder and off the
hydraulic shaft.

o6
ee) 6

2
4130048

Fig. B 1-6 Removing the Shlfter Fork

1. Shifter fork 2. Screwand washer

3. See Figure B 1-7. Remove the screws and lock washers (4) that
secure the air cylinder assembly to the pump mount.

4. Remove the air cylinder head (1).

5. lnspect the air cylinder head O-ring (2) for damage. Replace if
necessary.

6. Remove the air cylinder (3)

@000 Nordson Corporallon 41-3000y 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-14 Hydraulics

Pump Air Section Disassembly (contd)

1
4

3
@
!

I
I
I

4130049

Fig. B 1-7 Removing the Air Cylinder

1. Air cylinder head 3. Air cylinder
2. Air cylinder head O-ring 4. Screw and lock washer

7. See Figure B 1-8. Hold the hydraulic shaft with a wrench and remove
the retaining nut at the top.

4130050

Fig. B 1-8 Removing the Hydraulic Shaft Retaining Nut

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-15

8. See Figure B 1-9. Remove the piston cup washers (3), the piston
cups (2), and the piston sealwasher (1).

L lnspect the cups and washers for damage (cracking or creasing)

Replace if necessary.

4 t03588

Fig. B 1-9 Piston Cups, Piston Cup Washers, Piston Seal Washer
1. Piston seal washer 3. Piston cup washer
2. Piston cup

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v B1 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All ,ights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-16 Hydraulics

Pump Hydraulic Section Disassembly

1. See Figure B 1-10. Secure the pump with a vise and use a flat-blade
screwdriver to straighten the lock tab on the bearing lock washer.

2. Use a spanner wrench or hammer and a flat-blade screw driver to

loosen the bearing lock nut. Then slide the nut and washer away
from the pump body.

t
at3(}0c2

Fig. B 1-10 Removing the Nut and Washer

3. Pullthe pump mount off of the pump body.

4. See Figure B 1-11. lnspect the pump mount O-ring (3) and U-cup (1)
for damage (cracking or creasing).

5. lf necessary, remove the O-ring, the retaining ring (2), and the U-cup
Replace any damaged components.

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All ighls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-17

4r03255

Fig. B 1-11 Pump Mount Components

1. U-cup 3. Pump mount O-ring
2. Retaining ring

6. See Figure B 1-12. lnspect the pump seal (4) and pump body
O-ring (1) for damage (cracking, hardening, or creasing).

7. lf necessary use snap-ring pliers to remove the retaining ring (2).

Then manually stroke the hydraulic shaft (5) up and down to loosen
the washer (3) and pump seal. Beplace any damaged components.

1-
2 -Q
3
4

Al AA)A

Fig. B 1-12 Hydraulic Shaft Components

1. Pump body O-ring 4. Pump seal
2. Retaining ring 5. Hydraulic shaft
3. Washer

@O00 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-18 Hydraulics

Pump Hydraulic Section Disassembly (contd)

8. See Figure B 1-13. Secure the pump body with a vise or wrench
and remove the crossover tube (1), the O-ring (2), and the backup
ring (3).

9. lnspect the O-ring and backup ring for damage. Replace if

necessary.

1
3

4103181

Fig. B 1-13 CrossoverTube, O-Ring, and Backup Ring

1. Crossover tube 3. Backup ring
2. O-ring

10. See Figure B'l-14. Remove the siphon ballseat (3), siphon ball (2),
and siphon ball cage (1) from the pump body.

11. lnspect the siphon ball seat for damage. Replace if necessary.

Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved
 Hydraulics B 1-19

{ 2

gr'-
3

4 t03t98

Fig. B 1-14 Siphon BallCage, Siphon Ball, and Siphon BallSeat

1. Siphon ball cage 3. Siphon ball seat
2. Siphon ball

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Do not scratch the

?a hydraulic shaft or the inside of the pump body. Scratches can
cause the pump to leak.

'12. See Figure B 1-15. Pull the hydraulic shaft (2) out of the pump
body (1).

dlennv

Fig. B 1-15 Pump Body and Hydraulic Shaft

1. Pump body 2. Hydraulic shaft

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-20 Hydraulics

Pump Hydraulic Section Disassembly (contd)

13. See Figure B 1-16. Remove the screw (3), step washer (2), and
piston ('l) from the hydraulic shaft.

14. lnspect the piston and step washer for damage. Replace if
necessary.

4130175A

Fig B 1-'16 Piston and Step Washer

1. Piston 3. Screw
2. Stepwasher

Pump Com ponent C leani n g

lf necessary use one of the following methods to clean the pump
components.

WARNING: Risk of fire or explosion. Do not heat Type-R

cleaning fluid above 246 "C (475 "F). Do not heat the cleaning
fluid with an open flame or in an unregulated heating device.

a Place the pump components, except for the O-rings, in a container of

Type-R cleaning fluid and heat the fluid until it is above the melting
point of the adhesive. Scrub the components with a fine-bristled
brush and wipe them with a clean, dry cloth.

a Use a flameless, electric heat gun or compressed hot air to heat the
components;then wipe the components with a clean, dry cloth.

a Use an ultrasonic cleaner filled with cleaning fluid to soak the

components; then wipe the components with a clean, dry cloth.

Br EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41 -3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

lssued 5/00 All dghts reserved
 Hydraulics B 1-21

Pump Hydraulic Section Assembly

See the illustrations in Pump Hydraulic Section Disassembly as you
perform the following reassembly steps. You can also use the pump
parts list illustration at the end of this section.

1. Remove all adhesive from the pump seal cavity and the retaining-ring
groove.

2. Slip the piston onto the hydraulic shaft and place the step washer on
the socket-head screw. Apply threadlocking adhesive to the screw
threads; then installthe screw and step washer on the hydraulic shaft.
Tighten to 4.074.78 N.m (3-5 ft-lb).

3. lnsert the hydraulic shaft in the pump body.

4. Apply threadlocking adhesive to the siphon ball seat threads; then

reinstallthe siphon ballcage, siphon ball, and siphon ballseat.

5. Place the crossover tube O-ring and backup ring on the crossover
tube, apply Teflon paste to the crossover tube threads, and reinstall
the crossover tube.

6. lf you removed the pump body O-ring, retaining ring, washer, and
pump seal, then

a. Apply high-temperature lubricant to the O-ring and install it on the

pump body.

b. Apply hightemperature lubricant to pump seal and pull the

hydraulic shaft up from the top of the pump body.

c. Secure the pump body with a vise. Place the pump seal, with the
groove facing down, on the hydraulic shaft; then installthe
washer. Slide the hydraulic shaft down to help guide the seal and,
washer into place in the pump body.

d. lnstallthe retaining ring in its groove in the pump body.

7. lf you removed the pump mount O-ring, retaining ring, and U-cup,
then

a. lnsert the U-cup in.the upper face of the pump mount with the
groove facing up.

b. Press the retaining ring in the upper face to secure the U-cup.

c. Apply high{emperature lubricant to the pump mount O-ring and

place the O-ring on the upper surface of the pump mount.

O 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y B1 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXJ-2

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-22 Hydraulics

Pump Hydraulic Section Assembly (contd)

B. Apply hightemperature lubricant to the hydraulic shaft at the point

where it passes through the U-cup.

9. Guide the upper part of the pump body and the hydraulic shaft
through the bottom hole in the pump mount.

10. Place the bearing lock washer and nut over the hydraulic shaft and
slide the hydraulic shaft through the hole in the top of the pump
mount.

11. Flotate the pump body clockwise until you feel it rest against the stop
in the bottom of the pump mount. Secure the pump body to the pump
mount by tightening the bearing lock nut.

12. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, lock the bearing lock washer by

bending one tab into one of the slots on the bearing lock nut.

13. Slide the fork onto the hydraulic shaft until it sits on the shoulder.
Make sure the side stamped UP is facing the air cylinder. lnstall the
screw and washer and tighten to 8-10 N.m (6-7 ft-lb).

Pump Air Section Assembly

See the illustrations in Pump Air Section Disassembly as you perform the
following reassembly steps. You can also use the pump parts list
illustration at the end of this section.

1. Pull the hydraulic shaft up as far as possible and install the following
parts onto the shaft in this order:
a. one piston cup washer
b. one piston cup with the curved edge facing down
c. the piston sealwasher
2. Slide the air cylinder over the hydraulic shaft and onto the pump
mount. Be careful not to damage the piston cup.

3. Use the shifter fork to move the hydraulic shaft up to the top of the
air cylinder.

4. lnstallthe remaining piston cup, with the curved edge facing up, and
piston cup washer on the hydraulic shaft.

5. Hold the hydraulic shaft with a wrench and replace the retaining nut.
Tighten to 11.30-13.56 N.m (8-10 ft-lb).

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-23

6. Apply high-temperature lubricant to the air cylinder O-ring and roll the
O-ring into place on the air cylinder head.

7. Position the air cylinder head on the air cylinder so that the shoulder
cut-out is facing the actuator. Apply anti-seize compound to the air
cylinder screws and use the screws and lock washers to secure the
air cylinder to the pump mount. Tighten to 5-6 N.m (45-55 in.-lb).

Actuator lnstallation
See the illustrations in Actuator Removalas you perform the following
reassembly steps. You can also use the pump parts list illustration at the
end of this section.

NOTE: Series 3100t1 3400V and 3500Vunits have a pump cover

bracket that must be installed when the actuator is installed. See
Figure B 1-5.

1. lf you removed the O-rings from the air cylinder face, coat four new
O-rings with high-temperature lubricant and installthem on the air
. cylinder.

2. Move the hydraulic shaft up or down until the shifter fork is in the
center of the pump mount.

3. Carefully align the actuator with the shifter fork and the locating pins
on the air cylinder.

4. lnstall the actuator with the screws and washers you removed earlier.
Tighten to 3-4 N.m (28-36 in.-lb).

Pump lnstallation
NOTE: lf you are replacing an old pump with a neq complete pump and
your old pump has a pump cover bracket, remove the bracket and install
it on the new pump.

1. Make sure the pump pan is positioned correctly.

2. Lower the pump into the unit until the crossover tube seats in the
manifold.

3. Secure the pump to the unit with the screws and washers you
removed earlier. Tighten to 12.20-13.56 N.m (9-10 ft-lb).

4. Connect the air input line to the actuator.

O 2000 tlordson Corporatlon 41-3000y Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXR-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-24 Hydraulics

System Restoration
1. Replace the pump cover.

2. Turn the unit on and allow it to reach operating temperature.

3. See Figure B 1-17. Place a container under the manifold drain valve
and open the valve.

Filter Type Procedure tor Opening Drain Valve

Standard Turn the drain valve counterclockwise
Reverse-flush With the manifold filter in the RUN position, turn the
right-side drain valve counterclockwise.

Fig. B 1-17 Opening the Manifold Drain Valve

1. A manifold (standard filter) 3. C or T manifold (reverse-flush
2. B or s manifold (standard filter) filter)

Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2 41 -3000v @000 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-25

4. lncrease pump air pressure until clean adhesive flows from the drain
valve. This will purge the system of trapped air.

5. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

6. Close the drain valve.

7. Return the air pressure to the normal operating setting and

resume operation.

Repositioning or Replacing the Use this procedure to reposition or replace the shifter fork without
Shifter Fork removing the pump from the unit.

WARNING: Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the unit.

Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or
death.

1. Turn the unit off; then disconnect and lock out power to the unit.

2. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

3. Remove the pump cover.

4. Remove the actuator:

a. Move the hydraulic shaft up or down until shifter fork is centered

in the pump mount.

b. Remove the screws and washers that secure the actuator; then
remove the actuator.

NOTE: Series 3100t1 3400V and 3500Vunits have a pump

cover bracket that must be removed. See Figure B 1-5.

5. See Figure B 1-18. Remove the screw and washer (2)from the
shifter fork (1); then slide the fork toward the air cylinder and off the
hydraulic shaft.

@000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All dghts reserued
lssued 5/00
B 1-26 Hydraulics

Repositioning or Replacing the

Shifter Fork @ontd)

4130 1 39

Fig. B 1-18 Removing the Shifter Fork

1. Shifter fork 2. Screw and washer

6. Fleposition the shifter fork or install a new shifter fork. Make sure the
side of the fork stamped UP faces up.

7. Slide the fork down onto the hydraulic shaft shoulder

B. lnstall the screw and washer. Tighten the screw

to 8-10 N.m (71-89 in.-lb).

9. lnstall the actuator:

NOTE: Series 3100t4 34OOV and 3500Vunits have a pump cover

bracket that must be installed when the actuator is installed.
See Figure B 1-5.

a. Move the hydraulic shaft up or down until the shifter fork is in the
center of the pump mount.

b. Carefully align the actuator with the shifter fork and the locating
pins on the air cylinder.

c. lnstall the actuator with the screws and washers you removed
earlier. Tighten to 3-4 N.m (28-36 in.-lb).

10. Replace the pump cover, restore power and air to the unit, and
resume operation.

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41 -3000y o 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-27

5. Actuator Repair Use these procedures to clean or replace the actuator's magnet
assembly, bumper assembly, or air valve. Refer to the parts lists at the
Procedures end of this section for the part numbers of any components that need to
be replaced. You can also use the actuator parts list illustration as a
guide as your perform the following disassembly and reassembly
procedures.

Replacing the Actuator Use this procedure to replace the actuator without removing the pump
from the unit.

Actuator Removal

WARNING: Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the unit.

Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or
death.

1. Turn the unit off; then disconnect and lock out power to the unit.

2. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

3. Remove the pump cover

4. Disconnect the air input line from the actuator and remove the air line
elbow.

5. [Vlove the hydraulic shaft up or down until shifter fork is centered in

the pump mount.

6. See Figure B 1-19. Remove the screws and washers (1) that secure
the actuator (3); then remove the actuator.

NOTE: Series 3100t4 340OV, and 35007units have a pump cover

bracket (2)that must be removed.

7. lnspect the O-rings (4) in the face of the air cylinder for damage
Replace if necessary.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
B 1-28 Hydraulics

Actuator Removal @ontd)

3 4
2

\ 1

4 t3083r

Fig. B 1-19 Removing the Actuator

1. Screwandwasher 3. Actuator
2. Pump cover bracket 4. O-ring
(Series 3100t4 34oov
and 3500Vunits only)

Actuator lnstallation
NOTE: Series 3100t4 3400V and 3500Vunits have a pump cover
bracket that must be installed when the actuator is installed. See
Figure B 1-19.

1. lf you removed the O-rings from the air cylinder face, coat four new
O-rings with high-temperature lubricant and installthem on the air
cylinder.

2. Move the hydraulic shaft up or down until the shifier fork is in the
center of the pump mount.

3. Carefully align the actuator with the shifter fork and the locating pins
on the air cylinder.

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporat'on

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-29

4. lnstallthe actuator with the screws and washers you removed earlier
Tighten to 3-4 N.m (28-36 in.-lb).

5. Apply Teflon paste or tape to the air line elbow threads; then install
the elbow in the actuator.

6. Connect the air input line to the actuator

7. Replace the pump cover, restore power and air to the unit, and
' resume operation.

Cleaning or Replacing the Use this procedure to clean or replace the magnet assembly. The
Magnet Assembly magnet assembly is located inside the actuator.

Magnet Assembly Removal

WARNING: Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the unit.

Failure to obserue this warning can result in personal injury or
death.

1. Turn the unit off; then disconnect and lock out power to the unit.

2. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

3. Remove the pump cover.

4. Disconnect the air input line from the actuator.

5. Remove the actuator:

a. Move the hydraulic shaft up or down until shifter fork is centered

in the pump mount.

b. Remove the screws and washers that secure the actuator; then
remove the actuator.

NOTE: Series 3100t4 3400t4 and 3500Vunits have a pump

cover bracket that must be removed. See Figure B 1-19.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-30 Hydraulics

Magnet Assembly Removal @ontd)

CAUTION: Use a clean work surface. The actuator contains

t magnets that can pick up small particles. These pafiicles can
damage the actuator or cause poor actuator performance.

6. See Figure B 1-20. Remove the screws that attach the can to the
valve body and pull the can straight out from the valve body.

Fig. B 1-20 Removing the Can

t 410317s

7. lnspect the magnet assembly

lf the assembly is. Then ...

Dirty or has metal particles Bemove the dirt or particles with a clean
clinging to it cloth and go lo Magnet Assembly
lnstallation.
Loose Go to step 2 of Magnet Assembly
lnstallation to tighten the assembly and
reinstall the actuator.
Damaged Continue with the next step.

B. Flemove the valve cap screws and lift the valve cap off the bumper
assembly.

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved
 Hydraulics B 1-31

GAUTION: Flisk of equipment damage. lf you use a vise to

! hold the valve body while removing the magnet assembly, place
the vise jaws on the sides of the valve body, not on the
machined surface that mounts to the air cylinder.

9. See Figure B 1-21. Pull down on the magnet assembly and slip an
awlthrough the hole in the shaft.

10. Hold the bumper flats with a wrench and unscrew the magnet
assembly from the valve spool.

-E-
Fig. B 1-21 Removing the Magnet Assembly

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-32 Hydraulics

Magnet Assembly lnstallation

See the illustrations in Magnet Assembly Removalas you perform the
following reassembly steps. You can also use the actuator parts list
illustration at the end of this section.

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. lf you use a vise to

I
a
hold the valve body while removing the magnet assembly, place
the vise jaws on the sides of the valve body, not on the
machined surface that mounts to the air cylinder.

1. Thread the magnet assembly into the valve spool until it seats

2. Slip an awlthrough the hole in the magnet assembly shaft.

3. Using an adjustable wrench, hold the bumper flats and screw the
magnet assembly into the valve spool.
Tighten to 9-11 N.m (81-99 in.-lb).

4. Slide the can over the magnet assembly so the opening faces the
pump assembly. lnstallthe securing screws and tighten them
to 3-4 N.m (28-36 in.-lb).

5. lnstallthe valve cap. Tighten the valve cap screws

to 3-4 N.m (28-36 in.-lb).

6. lnstallthe actuator:

NOTE: Series 3100t1 3400t4 and 3500Vunits have a pump cover

bracket that must be installed when the actuator is installed. See
Figure B 1-19.

a. Move the hydraulic shaft up or down until the shifter fork is in the
center of the pump mount.

b. Carefully align the actuator with the shifter fork and the locating
pins on the air cylinder.

c. lnstall the actuator with the'screws and washers you removed

earlier. Tighten to 3-4 N.m (28-36 in.-lb).

7. Connect the air input line to the actuator.

8. Replace the pump cover, restore power and air to the unit, and
resume operation.

B't EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000y @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-33

Cleaning or Replacing the Air Use this procedure to clean or replace the air valve assembly. The air
Valve valve assembly is located inside the actuator.

Air Valve Removal

1. Complete Magnet Assembly Removal
1

NOTE: The Magnet Assembly Removalprocedure includes steps

2 for relieving system pressure, locking out power, and removing the
actuator.
3
2. See Figure B 1-22. Remove the valve cap screws (1) and lift the
4 valve cap (2) ott the bumper assembly (4).

3. Remove the bumper assembly. Use an open-end wrench to hold the

bumper assembly; then use another wrench to remove the retaining
5 nut (3).

4. Remove the upper detent (8) from the bottom of the valve body (7).
6

7 GAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Do not press the air

o
I
a
valve out of the valve body by pressing on the end of the spool

oo
5. Use a socket or similar tool to press the air valve out of the valve
0
o body by pressing against the end of the sleeve (6).
8
6. Remove and discard the sleeve O-rings (5)

Fig. B 1-22 Removing the Air Valve

1. Valve cap screw
2. Valve cap
3. Retaining nut
4. Bumper'assembly
5. Sleeve O-ring
6. End of sleeve
7. Valve body
8. Upperdetent

@000 Nordson Corpciralion 41-3000v Bl EN-02-[SV-X-AGXX]-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-34 Hydraulics

Air Valve Removal @ontd)

CAUTION: Flisk of equipment damage. Do not clean the air

t
a
valve with an abrasive, scrape the spool or sleeve, or round off
the sharp edges of the spool lands. Doing so can damage the
spool and sleeve and cause the pump to stall.

7. See Figure B 1-23. Remove the retaining screw (4)from the side of
the sleeve (3).

8. Carefully slide the spool (2) out of the sleeve.

9. lnspect the spool lands (1).

Spool lands are Action

Nicked, gouged, deeply scratched,
or corroded
Covered with contaminants
Replace the air valve. Go to Alr
Valve lnstallation.
1. Clean the spool and sleeve
with mineral spirits or any
non-chlorinated cleaning
solution, and a soft cloth. Do
not use abrasives, scrape the
spool or sleeve, or round otf
the sharp edges of the spool
lands.

2. Thoroughly wipe the valve

parts with a clean cloth or
rinse them with denatured
alcohol.

-,t ------'+4

3
4103567

Fig. B 1-23 Air Valve Components

1. Spool lands 3. Sleeve
2. Spool 4. Retaining screw

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All righls res€rved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-35

Air Valve lnstallation

See the illustrations in Air Valve Removalas you perform the following
reassembly steps. You can also use the actuator parts list illustration at
the end of this section.

1. Apply SP pump lubricating oil to the spool lands. Refer to Actuator

Parts Listtor the oil part number.

2. Carefully insert the spool into the sleeve and center it in the sleeve

NOTE: The spool and sleeve are a matched set and cannot be
replaced with components from another air valve assembly.

3. lnstallthe retaining screw. Tighten to 0.7-0.9 N.m (6-8 in.-lb).

4. Make sure the spool slides freely in its sleeve. lf not, replace the air
valve and go to step 5.

5. Apply high-temperature lubricant to a new set of O-rings and install

the O-rings on the sleeve.

6; See Figure B 1-24. Press the air valve into the valve body from the
top by pushing down on the flange.

t
4tnqrRn

Fig. B 1-24 lnstalling the Air Valve

7. lnstall a new bumper assembly on top of the air valve

8. Use a wrench to hold the bumper assembly flats and tighten the
retaining nut. Tighten to 9-11 N.m (81-99 in.-lb).

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
B 1-36 Hydraulics

Air Valve lnstallation @ontd)

9. lnstall the upper detent on the bottom of the valve body with the two
socket-head screws removed earlier. Tighten to 1.82-2.27 N.m
(16-20 in.-lb).

10. lnstallthe valve cap. Tighten the valve cap screws to 3-4 N.m
(28-36 in.-lb).

1'1. Complete Magnet Assembly lnstallation.

Replacing the Bumper Use this procedure to replace the actuator bumper assembly without
Assembly removing the actuator from the unit.

WARNING: Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the unit.

Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or
death.

'1. Turn the unit off; then disconnect and lock out power to the unit.

2. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.

3. Remove the pump cover.

n'
4. See Figure B 1-25. Remove the valve cap screws (1) and lift the
valve cap (2) off the bumper assembly (4).
2
5. Remove the bumper assembly. Use an open-end wrench to hold the
bumper assembly stationary;then use another wrench to remove the
3 retaining nut (3).

4 6. lnstall a new bumper assembly and secure it with the retaining nut.
Tighten the nut to 9-11 N.m (81-99 in.-lb).

7. lnstallthe valve cap. Tighten the valve cap screws

to 3-4 N.m (28-36 in.-lb).

8. Reinstall the pump cover, restore power and air to the unit, and
4130833 resume operation.

Fig. B 1-25 Replacing the Bumper

Assembly
'1
. Valve cap screw
2. Valve cap
3. Retaining nut
4. Bumper assembly

B1 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v O 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00

6. Pump Solenoid Valve
Rep I acement P roced u res
Removing the Solenoid Valve
@00 Nordson Corporalion
All dghls reserued
Hydraulics B'l-37
Use these procedures to replace the pump solenoid valve. Refer to the
parts list at the end of this section for the part numbers of any
components that need to be replaced. You can use the solenoid valve
assembly parts list illustration as a guide if you need to replace other
solenoid valve assembly components.
Follow this procedure to remove the solenoid valve. .The solenoid valve
is located inside the electrical enclosure.
WARNING: Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the unit.
Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or
death.
1. Turn the unit off; then disconnect and lock out power to the unit.
2. Reduce the pump air pressure to 0.
WARNING: Risk of electricalshock. Failure to observe
electricalsafety procedures may result in personal injury or
death. Allow only qualified personnelto perform the following
procedures. Observe all high voltage indicators.
3. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening the Electrical
En c I os u re in the C ontrol section.
4. See Figure B 1-26. Unplug (1) the solenoid valve.
5. Disconnect the air lines (5) from the solenoid valve elbows (4).
6. Remove the screws (3) that secure the solenoid valve mounting
block (2); then remove the solenoid valve from the unit.
7. Disconnect the elbows from the solenoid valve.
41-3000v Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2
lssued 5/00
B 1-38 Hydraulics

Removing the Solenoid Valve

(contd)

1
4

2
4130834A

Fig. B 1-26 Solenoid Valve Assembly Components

1. Plug 4. Elbows
2. Mounting block 5. Air lines
3. Screws

lnstalling the Solenoid Valve Follow this procedure to install the new solenoid valve.

1. See Figure B 1-26. lnstall the elbows on the new solenoid valve.
2. lnstall the solenoid valve and mounting block on the back panel of the
unit with the screws you removed earlier.

3. Connect the air lines to the solenoid valve elbows.

4. Connect the solenoid valve plug.

5. Close the electrical enclosure and restore power to the unit.

6. Return the pump air pressure to the normal operating setting.

7. Start the unit and listen for air leaks. lf you hear air leaking, check the
air line connections at the elbows.

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000y e000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-39

7. Manitold Repair Use these procedures to replace the pressure relief valve or the manifold
drain valve.
Procedures

Replacing the Pressure Relief Use this procedure to replace the pressure relief valve. The pressure
Valve relief valve is located in the bottom of the tank.

1. Drain as much adhesive from the tank as possible. Refer to Flushing

the System in Maintenance for different ways to drain the tank.

2. See Figure B 1-27. Use a socket wrench to loosen the pressure relief
valve (1); then carefully unscrew the valve and remove it.

4130835

Fig. B 1-27 Replacing the Pressure Relief Valve

1. Pressure relief valve 2. Typical tank

3. Screw the new valve into the tank until it is finger-tight.

4. Use a socket wrench to tighten the valve. Tighten

to 14-16 N.m (10-12 ft-lb).

5. Refillthe tank with adhesive and resume operation.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v B1 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2

All rights reseryed
lssued 5/00
B 1-40 Hydraulics

Replacing the Drain Valve Use this procedure to replace the drain valve. The drain valve is located
in the manifold near the manifold filter.

NOTE: Units with a reverse-flush filter have two manifold drain valves

1. Make sure the unit is at operating temperature

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve pressure

Failure to observe this warning may result in serious burns.

2. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressurein

Maintenance.

3. See Figure B 1-28. Remove the drain valve alignment screw (1) and
washer (2); then remove the valve (3) from the unit. Some adhesive
willflow from the valve.

3
1 2 4130836

Fig. B1-28 Replacing the Drain Valve

1. Alignment screw 3. Drain valve
2. Washer

4. Screw the new drain valve into the manifold until it is secure; then
adjust it as necessary to install and tighten the alignment screw and
washer.

5. Resume operation

Replacing the Manifold Because the manifold has no moving parts, you should not need to
replace it. However, if you need to remove the manifold for any reason,
refer lo Tank.

B1 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41 -3000v e000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved
 Hydraulics B 1-41

8. lllustrated Parts Lisfs To order parts, call the Nordson Customer Seruice Center or your local
Nordson representative. Use these five-column parts lists, and the
accompanying illustrations, to describe and locate parts correctly.

Using the lllustrated Parts List Numbers in the ltem column correspond to numbers that identify parts in
illustrations following each pafts list. The code NS (not shown) indicates
that a listed part is not illustrated. A dash (-) is used when the part
number applies to all parts in the illustration.

The six-digit number in the Part column is the Nordson Corporation part
number. A series of dashes in this column C - - - - -) means the part
cannot be ordered separately.

The Description column gives the part name, as well as its dimensions
and other characteristics when appropriate. lndentions show the
relationships between assemblies, subassemblies, and parts.

Item Part Description Quantity Note

000 000 Assembly 1

1 000 000 . Subassembly 2 A

2 000 000 .. Part 1

o lf you order the assembly, items 1 and 2 will be included

o lf you order item 1, item 2 will be included.
. lf you order item 2, you will receive item 2 only.

The number in the Quantity column is the quantity required per unit,
assembly, or subassembly. The code AR (As Required) is used if the
part number is a bulk item ordered in quantities or if the quantity per
assembly depends on the product version or model.

Letters in the Note column refer to notes at the end of each parts list.
Notes contain important information about usage and ordering. Special
attention should be given to notes.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v 81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXJ-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-42 Hydraulics

UpTime Pack for Pump G See Figure B 1-29. The UpTime pack for pump G (SP 30, 6:1) provides
the parts that should be replaced as part of routine maintenance.

!tem Part Description Quantity Note

1 67 999 Service kit, UpTime, pump G, SR 6:1
1 940 111 . O-ring, Viton, 0.301 x 0.700 in. 4
2 940 332 . O-ring, Viton, 2.000 x2.125 x 0.063 in 2
3 984 092 . Nut, hex, lock, torque, M6, class 10 1

4 1 63 039 . Cup, piston 2

5 986 331 . Retaining ring, internal, 100, push-on 1

6 952 100 . Cup, U, Viton 1

7 941 261 . O-ring, Viton, 1.375 x 1.563 x 0.094 in 1

I 986 711 . Retaining ring, internal, 106, spiral 1

I 288 121 . Washer, 1.045 x 0.819 in. 1

10 288 122 . Seal, pump, high-volume 1

11 940 133 . O-ring, Viton, 0.426 lD x 0.70 in. 1

12 954 013 . Backup ring, single, 7l6in. x 9/16 in. 'l

81 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2 41-3000y @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-43

I
2
9

10

@
1

3
o

# 12
2

11

@
Fig. B 1-29 Pump G UpTime Pack Parts

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXJ-2

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 1-44 Hydraulics

This page left intentionally blank.

Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-45

Piston Pump Parts List See Figure B 1-30.

!tem Part Description Quantity Note

164 684 Service kit, pump G, SP,6:1, UpTime A
1 187 631 Bracket, cover, pump, 14:1,6:1, SP30 1 B

2 940 111 O-ring, Viton, 0.301 lD x 0.070 in. 4

3 940 332 O-ring, Viton, 2.000 x2.125 x 0.063 in. 2 c
4 274 523 Head, air cylinder 1

5 982 147 Screq hex head, cap, M6 x 120 mm 4 D

6 983 409 Washer, lock, split, M6 4

7 155 0s8 Cylinder, air 1

B 973 466 Plug, pipe, flush, 1/16 in., dsealant 2

9 984 092 Nut, hex, lock, torque, M6, class 10 1

10 983 446 Washer, piston cup 2

11 1 63 039 Cup, piston 2
't2 983 445 Washer, piston seal 1

13 986 331 Retaining ring, internal, 100, push-on 1

14 952 100 Cup, U, Viton 1 c

15 1 20 599 Service kit, pump mount replacement 1

16 982 135 Screw, hex head, cap, MO x 30 mm 1

17 1 66 880 Service kit, fork, magnetic (shifter fork) 1

1B 984 545 Nut, lock, bearing, PN-08 1

19 983 134 Washer, lock, E, bearing, 1.574in. 1

20 986 711 Retaining ring, internal, 106, spiral 1

NOTE A: Order this part to receive a complete pump assembly.

B: Used only on Series 3100t4 3400V and 3500Vunits.
C: Apply high-temperature lubricant, part 900 493.
D: Apply anti-seize compound, part 900 344.
Continued on nert page

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v B1 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-46 Hydraulics

Piston Pump Parts List (contd)

!tem Part Description Quantity Note

21 288 121 Washer, 1.045 x 0.819 in. 1

22 2BB 122 Seal, pump, high-volume 1

23 973 402 Plug, pipe, socket, flush, 1/s in. 1 D

24 134 657 Body, pump 1

25 288 031 Tube, crossover, pump 1 c

26 954 013 Backup ring, single, 7
1.16 x 91
6in. 1

27 940 133 O-ring, Viton, 0.426 lD x 0.070 in. 'l B

28 1 55 096 Hydraulic shaft, 6:'l 1

29 276716 Piston 1

30 983 024 Washer, step, 1.0 in. diameter 1

31 982376 Screw, socket head, low, M8 x 16 mm 1

32 240 533 Cage, ball, siphon 1

,l
33 900 023 Ball, siphon, 440 stainless steel, 0.750 in., 50
34 240 534 Seat, ball, siphon 1

35 940 261 O-ring, Viton, 1.375 x 1.563 x 0.094 in. 1 B

36 983 410 Washer, flat, narrow, MO 1

37 Actuator assembly E
38 982298 Screw, hex head, cap, M5 x 50 mm 2 A
39 983 408 Washer, flat, narrow, M6 2 A
NOTE A: Used only on Series 3100t1 3400V and 3500Vunits.
B: Apply high-temperature lubricant, part 900 493.
C: Apply anti-seize compound, part 900 344.
D: Apply threadlocking adhesive, part 900 465.
E: Refer to Actuator Assembly Parts List.

Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All righls reserved
 Hydraulics B 1-47

35
5
20
4
21

3
22
a \
2

23
1
6

7
24
8
I
10
,.:f
$1.o 25
11
dr('
12
\ 39
3 26
38 11

10 13
27
14
37 28

17 29
o

'15 30

36 16 31

18
32
19
33

34
4130213A

Fig. B 1-30 Pump G Parts

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v B'r EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2

All dghts reserued
lssued 5/00
B 1-48 Hydraulics

Actuator Parts List See Figure B 1-31

Item Part Description Quantity Note

155 077 Service kit, actuator assembly, SP A
1 982028 Screw, socket head, M5 x 20 mm 4
2 155 054 Cap, valve 1

3 984 090 Nut, hex, lock, torque, MB 1

4 161 422 Service kit, bumper 2

5 161 429 Service kit, spool/sleeve 1 B
6 940 181 O-ring, Viton, 0.739 lD x 0.070 in. 4 C
7 155 051 Body, valve 1

I 155 057 Detent, upper 1

I 982 059 Screw, socket head, M4 x 8 mm 2

10 1 64 606 Service kit, magnetic actuator (magnet assembly) 1

11 1 55 068 Can 1

12 1 55 067 Detent, lower 1

13 986 714 Retaining ring, internal, 156, bowed 1

NOTE A: Order this part to receive a complete actuator assembly.

B: Apply SP pump lubricating oil, part 211 228, to the spool lands.
C: Apply high-temperature lubricant, part 900 493.

B1 EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX].2 41-3000y Q000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-49

7
o
oo
oo

10

11

12

13
4r30037

Fig. B 1-31 Actuator Parts

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXXI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-50 Hydraulics

Solenoid Valve Assembly Parts See Figure B 1-32

Lisfs

Item Part Description Quantity Note

1 982923 Screw, cross-pan, #10-32 x 0.50 in. 2
2 338 308 Connector, male,1l4in. tube x 1/6 NPT 1

3 338 304 Elbow, male,1l4in. tube x 1/e NPT, Viton 3

4 338 305 Elbow, male,ll4in. tube x 1/4 NPl Viton 2
5 187 734 Tubing, Teflon, 1/4 in. 1 A
6 275 115 Adapter, 1/+ ruPTf 1

7 288 147 Grommet, 0.250 lD in. 2

I 229 519 Valve, solenoid, 2 way, 24 VDC, 1lsin. 1

o 229 466 Block, mounting 1

't0 982 309 Screw, pan head, recessed, M5 x 10 mm 1

11 Frame, center 1 B

12 Frame, hose end 1 B

13 Pump assembly 1 C
NOTE A: Specify required length when ordering replacement tubing
B: Refer to Frame Assembly Parts Listinthe 7-anksection.
C: Refer lo Piston Pump Parts List.

Br EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-51

13

11

10

6
7 4

I \ 5

4130843A

Fig. B 1-32 Solenoid Valve Assembly Parts

@00 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 1-52 Hydraulics

Air Pressure Regulator and See Figure B 1-33.

Filter Assembly Parts List

Item Part Description Quantity Note

1 65 871 Regulator/filter assembly, 90 psi, 4-hose A
165 872 Regulator/filter assembly, 90 psi, 6-hose B

1 1 65 735 . Regulator, filter, air, U4 NPT 1

2 973 490 . Nipple, brass, 40,114in.,2.50 in. 1 A

2 973 491 . Nipple, brass, 40,114in., 5.00 in. 1 B

3 901 258 . Gauge, air,llgNPT, 90 psi 1

4 1 65 870 Seruice kit, filter element 1

5 1 65 878 Service kit, filter bowl 1

NOTE A: Used only on 4-hose units.

B: Used only on 6-hose units.

@
4

41031

Fig. B 1-33 Air Pressure Regulator/Filter Assembly Parts

Bl EN-02-[3V-X-AGXX]-2 41 -3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Hydraulics B 1-53

Parts Lisfs for Manifold A The following parts lists provide replacement parts for the manifold and
filter assemblies.

o
o o
o

o o

41303/.2

Fig. B 1-34 Non-Circulating 4-Port Manifold with Standard Filter

@99 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000y Bl EN{3-[3V-X-AXAX]-1

All dghts reserved
lssued 4/99
B 1-54 Hydraulics

Manitold Assembly Parts List See Figure B 1-35.

Item Part Description Quantity Note

105413 Manifold A, 4-port,standard f ilter, non-ci rculatin g 1 A
1 120 324 Service kit, valve, pressure relief, 1600 psi,3.5 in 1

2 983 414 Washer, flat, M, narrow, M8 5

3 288 023 Screw, special, hex-head, M8-1.25 5 B

4 973 574 Plug, O-ring, straight-thread, e/1

6-1 8 8 B

5 940 101 O-ring, Viton, 0.239 in. lD x 0.070 in. 1

6 954 036 Backup ring, single, 1lain. xslsin. 1

7 276 024 Valve assembly, drain 1 B

I 982 096 Screw, pan-head, slotted, [vl4 x 8 mm 1 B

I 983 403 Washer, lock, M, split, M4 1

10 Filter assembly, manifold 1 B,C

11 274 569 Adapter, filter bung '1
B,D
12 941 220 O-ring, Viton, 1.125 in. x 1.313 in. x 0.094 in. E

13 940 281 O-ring, Viton, 1.375 in. x 1.500 in. x 0.063 in. 2 E

NOTE A: This part is a complete manifold assembly and includes items 1 ,2,3, and 13.
B: Apply Never-Seez, part 900 341.
' C: Refer to Filter Assembly Parts List.
D: Apply retaining cylindrical adhesive, part 900 419.
E: Apply O-ring lubricant, part 900 223.

81 EN-03-[3V-X-AXA]|]-1 41-3000v €899 Nordson Corporalion

All dghls reserved
lssued 4/99
 Hydraulics B 1-55

1 6

13

12
11

2
69

4
65 41300424

Fig. B 1-35 Manifold Assembly Parts

Gtr)99 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000y Bl EN{3-[3V-X-AXAXI-1

All rights reserved
lssued 4/99
B 1-56 Hydraulics

Filter Assembly Parts List See Figure B 1-36

Item Part Description Quantity Note

105 432 Seruice kit, filter assembly 1 A
1 274 578 . Screen, filter, 0.006 mesh, 5.38 in. long 1

2 981 747 . Screw, round, 10-32 x 6.250 in. 1 B

3 274 513 . Bung, filter 1

4 941 172 . O-ring, Viton, 0.813 in. x 1.000 in. x 0.094 in 1

5 274 579 . Core, filter,5.71B in. long 1

NOTE A: Order this part for a complete filter assembly.

B: Apply Never-Seez, part 900 341.

4r30043

Fig. B 1-36 Filter Assembly Parts

BlEN-03-[3V-X-AXAR-1 41-3000y @ 1999 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 4/99
 Part B, Section 2

Control

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model 3100v
3400v
3500v
Voltage 4
Pump Piston (E, F, G)
Manifold 4-Port (A)
6-Port (8, C)
2-Port (S, T)
Control Vista Standard (V)

@O00 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s

All rights resewed
lssued 5/00
B 2-0 Control

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXV]-5 41 -3000v @O00 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-1

Section B 2
Control

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform the

following tasks. Follow the safety instructions in this document
and all other related documentation.

1. lntroduction This section includes control system troubleshooting procedures, repair

procedures, and parts lists. Refer to the parts lists for the part number of
any component that needs to be replaced.

lf you try all the troubleshooting suggestions in this section and still need
assistance solving controlsystem problems, call your Nordson
representative.

The following sections of this manual contain additional information on

the control system:

a Description includes an overview of each of the functional areas of

the operator panel.

a lnstallation includes procedures for connecting output contacts,

connecting electrical service, and programming your unit.

o Wiring Diagrams includes a set of wiring diagrams for your system.

lf your unit has any special options, such as an inpuVoutput (l/O) board or
a low-level indicator, refer to lhe Options section at the end of this manual
for troubleshooting and repair procedures.

Refer to lhe Hydraulics section for troubleshooting procedures, repair

procedures, and parts lists for the unit's pump and manifold assemblies.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXU-s

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-2 Control

2. Overview of the Control The Vista control system controls how your unit operates. The control
system includes a variety of printed circuit boards (hereafter referred to
System as boards) and other components that you should be familiar with to
safely troubleshoot and repair your unit.

Control Assembly
See Figure B 2-1. The main components of the control system are the
control-end frame, the controlassembly, and the operator panel. The
control assembly is mounted on the inside of the control-end frame. The
operator panel is mounted on the front of the control-end frame. The
control assembly is made up of three boards that are required for your
unit to function properly. Refer to the following table.

Table B 2-1 ControlAssembly Boards

ControlAssembly Board Function
Power board Provides power to the unit
and supplies the heater power
for most of the unit's heated
components
Controlboard Contains the Vista software
chip and controls how the unit
operates
Display board Allows the displays to function

2
5 3
4

4130076

Fig. B 2-1 Control Assembly Components

1. Power board 4. Control-end frame
2. Control board 5. Operator panel
3. Display board

B2EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s 41 -3000v @000 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-g

Unit-Specific Boards See Figure B 2-2. The control system also includes any unit-specific
boards that are required for your unit to function properly. The presence
of these boards varies depending on the configuration of the unit. Refer
to the following table.

Table B 2-2 Unit-Specific Boards

Unit-Specific Function
Board
4BO VAC Distributes incoming power to the power board
distribution board
5/6 hose/gun Expands a unit's temperature-control capacity
board from four hoses/guns to six hoses/guns,
supplying the heater power for hoses 5-6 and
guns 5-6

Optional lnpuVOutput Board
See Figure B 2-2. Your unit may have an optional inpuUoutput (l/O)
board. The l/O board is not required for a unit to function properly. Refer
to Series 3000V lnput/Output Board in the Options section at the end of
this manual for information about the l/O board, including troubleshooting
procedures, repair procedures, and a parts list.

o0 1

41308674

Fig. B 2-2 Unit-Specific Boards and l/O Board

1. 480 VAC distribution board 2. 5/6 hose/gun board 3. l/O board

@000 Nordson CorpoElion 41-3000y 82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-s

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-4 Control

Control System on 480 Vac Your hot melt unit operates on 480 VAC three-phase (32) incoming
Three-Phase Units power, which you connected to a terminal block on the
480 VAC distribution board. A 480 VAC/230 VAC 1O isolation
transformer provides 230 VAC power to the control assembly. The tank
heaters operate on 480 VAC power. A solid-state relay controls the
heater power to the tank heaters through the control board. Fuses F1,
F2, and F3 on the 480 VAC distribution board provide protection for the
480 VAC power section, which includes the transformer and the tank
heaters. Gun and hose heaters are powered by the power board and
operate at 230 VAC. The tank heater circuit on the power board is not
used on 480 VAC units.

3. TroubleshootingTables The following troubleshooting tables describe the kinds of control system
problems you may encounter and provide corrective actions for handling
those problems. When necessary, the tables refer to more detailed
troubleshooting procedures.

Refer to the appropriate troubleshooting table for the type of problem you
are experiencing:
. lnternal, Hose, or Gun Zone Not Heating
. Settings Changed or Lost
. Unit Not Powering On
o Control System lndicating a Warning
- Out-of-Band Warning
- UndenTemperature (UT) Warning
. ControlSystem lndicating a Fault
- Over-Temperature (OT) Fault
- Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Fault
- Fault-Code Fault (F1-F7)

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s 4't-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-5

Electrical Safety During Before performing troubleshooting activities inside the unit's electrical
Troubleshooting enclosure, you should exhaust all methods of troubleshooting the
problem with the electrical enclosure closed or with the power off. The
troubleshooting tables and procedures in this section are organized using
this methodology. ln general, you should perform troubleshooting
activities as follows:

a Check the displays and lights for warnings, faults, and other status
information.

a Check your programmed settings to make sure they haven't been

changed. Refer to Records of System Settingsinlhe lnstallation
section.

a Check for continuity and grounding between system components

(unit, guns, hoses, and other equipment).

Make sure your branch circuit disconnect switch is properly installed.

Make sure your power supply is supplying the proper voltage

a Prioritize troubleshooting activities to limit exposure to live power

Perform troubleshooting activities involving live power last.

a Understand your system electrically and mechanically before opening

the electrical enclosure. Pay special attention to system power
distribution and to l/O interfaces with other equipment.

a ldentify and eliminate potential electrical shock hazards in the

environment surrounding your unit.

Opening and Closing the To troubleshoot control system problems or to make any repairs, you may
Electrical Enclosure need to access the electrical enclosure. Use these procedures as
directed to safely access the electrical enclosure.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 2-6 Control

Opening

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (l/O) lines.

1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

2. See Figure B 2-3. Loosen the captive screws on the electrical

enclosure lid, lift the lid from the unit, and prop it against the pump
cover. Take care not to disconnect the ground wire.

3. Make sure the support strap is not wrapped around any board
components. Untangle the strap if necessary.

4. Loosen the two captive screws on either side of the control-end frame
and lower the frame. You may need to pull the front and rear covers
apart to release the frame.

5. Avoid direct contact with internal electrical connections, components,

or wiring.

6. Make sure all ground wires are securely connected.

t'
t

41308494

Fig. B 2-3 Opening the Electrical Enclosure

82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXyI-s 41-3000v e000 Nordson Coporation

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved

lnternal, Hose, or Gun Zone Not
Heating
Problem
lnternal, hose, or gun zone
not heating
@ 2000 Nordson Corporation
All rights reserved
Control B 2-7
Closing
1. Reconnect any ground wires that were disconnected during
troubleshooting or repair activities.
2. Raise the control-end frame into place and tighten the captive screws
on each side of the frame. You may need to pull the front and rear
covers apart to position the frame.
3. Position the electrical enclosure lid on top of the unit and secure it
with the captive screws.
4. Remove the lock-out and restore power to the system
lf a tank, hose, or gun will not heat, use this troubleshooting table.
Possible Cause Corrective Action
Zone setpoint temperature below Check the setpoint temperature for the
38'C (100'F) zone. The setpoint temperature must be
38 'C (100 "F) or above forthe zone to
heat. Refer lo Programming
T E M P E RAT U R E Co ntrols in lhe
lnstallation section to program setpoint
temperatures.
41-3000y 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXU-5
lssued 5/00
B 2-B Control

Settings Changed or Lost Use the following table to troubleshoot changed or lost settings
(memory). Because the controlsystem memory is stored on the
microprocessor chip and does not require the protection of a battery
backup, your settings cannot be lost during a brownout or a power failure.

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action

1. One or more settings Someone entered programming
changed mode and changed one or more
settings
Use the password-enable feature to
protect your settings. Refer to Syslem
P rog ram m i n g P roced u res in lhe
lnstallation section. Be sure to record
your settings in the Records of System
Settings at the end of lhe lnstallation
section.

2. Allsettings lost Software upgraded to latest version
by replacing software chip (allcustom
settings are lost during this procedure
and are replaced by the factory
default settings)
Reprogram your unit. Refer to System
P ro g ram mi ng P roce du res in the
lnstallation section.

Defective microprocessor chip Replace the control board. Refer to

Replacing a Control Assembly Boardin
Repair Procedures.

Unit Not Powering On lf your unit will not power on, use this troubleshooting table.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury, or

death. Some troubleshooting procedures require you to
perform work inside the electrical enclosure with the power on.
Follow electrical safety procedures and observe all high-voltage
indicators. Refer to Electrical Safety During Troubleshooting
and Opening and Closing the Electrical Enclosure before
performing any troubleshooting procedure.

82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-5 41-3000y e000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All rights reserved

Problem
Displays do not illuminate
or
displays illuminate but unit
will not power on and no
faults are displayed
q000 Nordson Corporation
All rights reseNed
Possible Cause
No input power
Defective POWER switch
lncorrect voltage plug at X3 on power
board or plug not connected
Blown fuse or fuses on 480 VAC
distribution board
Blown fuse or fuses on power board
Defective harness on 480 VAC
distribution board or defective
transformer
Contactor K1 on 480 VAC distribution
board or power board not engaging
Power board not properly connected
to control board
Defective power board or control
board
41-3000v
lssued 5/00
Control B 2-g
Corrective Action
Make sure the power is turned on at
your branch circuit disconnect switch
and that your power supply is supplying
480 VAC to the unit. Make sure the
voltage measures 480 VAC at TB1 on
the 480 VAC distribution board. lf
necessary check your electrical
connections at TB1. Refer to
Connecting Electrical Seruice in the
lnstallation section.
Check the POWER switch. Refer to
Checking the POWER Switchin
Trou b I es hooti n g P roced u re s.
Make sure the voltage plug at X3 on the
power board is part227 567 and that the
plug is securely connected. See Figure
B 2-14 for the location of the voltage
plug.
Use an ohmmeter to check fuses F1
through F4 on the 480 VAC distribution
board. Replace blown fuses. Refer to
Replacing a Fusein Repair Procedures.
Use an ohmmeter to check fuses F9 and
F10 on the power board. Replace blown
fuses. Refer to Replacing a Fusein
Repair Procedures.
Check the harnesses and transformer.
Refer to Checking the 480 VAC
Distribution Board Harnesses and the
Tran sf o rm e r in Trou blesh ooti ng
Procedures.
While pressing the unit's HEATERS key
on and off, listen for the K1 contactors to
engage. You can also open the unit and
visually examine the contactors to see if
they are engaging. See Figure B 2-4tor
the location of K1 on each board. lf K1
is not engaging, replace the 480 VAC
distribution board or the power board as
appropriate. Refer to Replacing a
Unit-Specific Board or Replacing a
Control Assembly Board in Repair
Procedures.
Make sure the power board is properly
connected to the control board at XP1.
The pins from the control board should
extend through XP1 on the power board.
Replace the control assembly. Refer to
Replacing the Control Assembly in
Repair Procedures.
82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s
B 2-10 Control

Unit Not Powering On @ontd.)

o o
x3H

c :
xs2H

# rJ
x3
o
E
x2H
ol7 mt B :
xslH

@F;;:l EIJE
e trffi
rel
oLr
x1H

o uBr
t23a5o

1 2 3
o
Jl

'0"
K1
3 o

o
o
U
F4

'0+
4 41308644

Fig. B 2-4 Location of Connectors on Boards

1. Power board 3. 5/6 hose/gun board 4. 480 VAC distribution board
2. Control board

Control System lndicating a During a warning condition, the unit continues to function normally. The
Warning control system indicates a warning as follows:

a The FAULT light flashes and turns off or flashes continuously.

The Selector display shows a zone number

NOTE: Each heated component (each hose, each gun, and the tank)
is referred to as a zone.

When the Selector display shows azone number, the INTERNAL,

HOSE, or GUN light turns on. ln combination, these indications
identify which zone is affected. Refer to Table B 2-3.

a The Multipurpose display shows either a temperature reading or a

flashing UT for the affected zone.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXU-s 4't-3000y @ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-11

Table B 2-3 Determining the Affected Zone

Zone Affected Zone
Number in
Selector
Display
(See Note A)
INTERNAL HOSE GUN
Light On Light On Light On
1 Tank Hose 1 Gun 1

2 Hose 2 Gun 2
J Hose 3 Gun 3
4 Hose 4 Gun 4
5 Hose 5 Gun 5
(See Note B)
6 Hose 6 Gun 6
(See Note B)
NOTE A: For example, if the Selector display shows the number 3 and
the GUN light is on, then the affected zone is gun 3.
B: Some units can accept only four hoses and four guns.

Out-of-Band Warning
When the And the And the It means... Do this
FAULT Setector Multipurpose
!ight.... display.. display...
Flashes Shows a zone Shows the The actual Wait to see if the temperature
(See Note A) number (refer to setpoint temperature of stabilizes at the setpoint. You may
Table B 2-3) temperature of the indicated want to change your out-of-band
the affected zone zone is temperature setpoints. See Note B.
out-of-band.
NOTE A: When the FAULT light flashes, the warning output contact is open and the fault output contact is closed.
When the FAULT light is off, both output contacts are closed. For more information on these output
contacts, refer to Connecting Output Contactsinlhe lnstallatrbn section.
B: You can choose the degree to which a zone's temperature may deviate from its temperature setpoint
(Features 5-19) and still stay within the temperature setpoint band. You should base your out-of-band
temperature setpoints on your adhesive application requirements. Refer to Sysfem Programming
Procedures in the lnstallation section to program out-of-band temperature setpoints.

eO00 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 2-12 Control

Under-Temperature (UT) Warning

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Some troubleshooting procedures require you to
perform work inside the electrical enclosure with the power on.
Follow electrical safety procedures and observe all high-voltage
indicators. Refer to Electrical Safety During Troubleshooting
and Opening and Closing the Electrical Enclosure before
performing any troubleshooting procedure.

When the And the And the It means... Do this...

FAULT Selector Multipurpose
light.... display.. display...
Flashes Shows a Flashes UT The indicated zone's Refer to the following
(See Note A) zone number (See Note B) actualtemperature is procedure.
(refer to more than
Table B 2-3) UL 19.5 'C (35 'F)
below the setpoint
temperature.
NOTE A: When the FAULT light flashes, the warning output contact is open and the fault output contact is closed
When the FAULT light is off, both output contacts are closed. For more information on these output
contacts, refer to Connecting Output Contacts in lhe lnstallafion section.
B: UT (under{emperature) occurs when a heater zone is more than 19.5 C (35 F) under the setpoint
temperature.

1. Press the CLEAR FAULTS key and wait for the system to return to
the system-ready state.

2. lf the warning disappears and the unit appears to be working again,

the voltage to the unit may have temporarily sagged or you may have
an intermittent problem. Repetitive warnings in the same zone
indicate a problem with the circuitry in that zone ot an intermittent
RTD failure. Take the following steps to troubleshoot intermittent
under-temperature warnings:

a. Check for a change in environmental conditions, such as added

ventilation or sources of drafts. A cold draft can keep your unit,
hoses, and guns from heating.

b. Make sure the power is turned on at your branch circuit disconnect

switch and that your power supply is supplying the proper voltage
to the unit.

c. Check all hose and gun electrical plugs. Make sure the
connections are tight and free of corrosion.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXU-5 41-3000y @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-13

d. Check your operating temperature setpoints to make sure they

haven't been changed. Refer lo Records of System Setfihgs in
the I n stal lation section.

e. lf the affected zone is a hose or gun, replace the hose or gun with
a hose or gun that is known to be good. lf the warning disappears,
replace the defective hose or gun. lf the warning still appears,
continue to the next step.

3. lf the warning still appears after you press the CLEAR FAULTS key
and after you have taken the actions in step 2, take the following
steps.

a. Check for loose heater connections on the board that supplies the
heater power for the affected zone. Refer to Table B 2-5 for heater
connector locations. For example, check the harnesses
connected to X1 and X2 on the power board to check the heater
connections for hoses 1-4 or guns 1-4. See Figure B 2-4 for the
location of connectors on boards.

b. Use an ohmmeter to check the fuse or fuses on the board that

supplies the heater power for the affected zone. Refer to Figure B,
2-B for fuse locations. Replace the appropriate fuse or fuses.
Refer to Replacing a Fusein Repair Procedures. lf the fuse blows
again, make sure the heater is not shorted to the ground.

c. lf the affected zone is the tank, make sure the harness connected
to J2 on the power board is secure or check the thermostat. See
Figure B 2-4for the location of J2 on the power board. To check a
thermostat, refer to Checking a Thermostatin Troubleshooting
Procedures.

d. Check the K1 contactors on the 480 VAC distribution board and

the power board. While pressing the unit's HEATERS key on and
off, listen for the K1 contactors to engage. You can also open the
unit and visually examine the contactors to see if they are
engaging. See Figure B 2-4tor the location of K1 on the 480 VAC
distribution board and the power board. lf K1 is not engaging,
replace the 480 VAC distribution board or the power board as
appropriate. Refer to Replacing a Unit-Specific Board or
Replacing a ControlAssembly Boardin Repair Procedures.

e. Check the heater or heater circuit of the affected zone. Refer to

Checking a Heater or Heater Circuitin Troubleshooting
Procedures.

f. lf the warning condition still appears after you have taken all the
actions in this step, replace the control assembly. Refer to
Replacing the Control Assembly in Repair Procedures.

@00 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-'14 Control

Control System lndicating a A fault condition causes the unit to shut down. The control system
Fault indicates a fault as follows:

a The FAUIT light either turns on and stays on or flashes for two
minutes and then stays on.

a The Selector display shows either a zone number or the letter F.

NOTE: Each heated component (each hose, each gun, and the tank)
is referred to as a zone.

a lf the Selector display shows a zone number, the INTERNAL, HOSE,

or GUN light turns on. ln combination, these indications identify the
faulted zone. Refer to Table B 2-4.

a The Multipurpose display shows either a flashing OT or RTD for the

faulted zone or a fault code (F1-F7).

a The heaters turn off. Whenever the heaters turn off, the pump stops.

Table B 2-4 Determining the Faulted Zone

Zone Faulted Zone
Number in
Selector
Display
(See Note A)
INTERNAL HOSE GUN
Light On Light On Light On
1 Tank Hose 1 Gun 1

2 Hose 2 Gun 2
3 Hose 3 Gun 3
4 Hose 4 Gun 4
5 Hose 5 Gun 5
(See Note B)
6 Hose 6 Gun 6
(See Note B)
NOTE A: For example, if the Selector display shows the number 3 and
the GUN light is on, then the faulted zone is gun 3.
B: Some units can accept only four hoses and four guns.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s 41-3000y o 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-15

Over-Tem perature (OT) Fau lt

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Some troubleshooting procedures require you to
perform work inside the electrical enclosure with the power on.
Follow electrical safety procedures and observe all high-voltage
indicators. Refer to Electrical Safety During Troubleshooting
and Opening and Closing the Electrical Enclosure before
performing any troubleshooting procedure.

When the And the And the It means... Do this

FAULT Selector Multipurpose
light... display.. display...
Turns on Shows a Flashes OT A zone's actual Refer to the following
(See Note A) zone number (See Note B) temperature has procedure.
(refer to reached the
Table B 2-4) trh over-temperature
setpoint entered in
Feature 3. The default
setting is
218 oC (425"F).
NOTE A: When the FAULT light turns on, the warning output contact is closed and the fault output contact is
open. When the FAULT light is off, both output contacts are closed. For more information on these
output contacts, refer to Connecting Output Contactsinlhe lnstallafion section.
B: You should base your over-temperature setpoints on your adhesive application requirements. Refer to
System Programming Proceduresinlhe lnstallation section to program over-temperature setpoints.

1. Press the CLEAR FAULTS key.

2. lf the fault disappears and the unit appears to be working again, you
may have an intermittent problem. Repetitive faults in the same zone
indicate a problem with the circuitry in that zone or an intermittent
RTD failure. Electrical noise from DC-drive motors may cause the
triacs that control heater power on the power board to close
independent of the control system. Take the following steps to
troubleshoot i ntermittent over-temperatu re faults:

a. Check your operating temperature setpoints to make sure they

haven't been changed. Refer to Records of System Setlings in
lhe I nstal lation section.

@000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000y 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5

All rights reserued
lssued S/fi)
B 2-16 Control

Over-Temperature (OT) Fau lt (contd.)

b. To verify that something other than the control system is affecting

a heated zone, turn on the Display Heater Proportioning feature
(Feature No. 21) for the affected zone. When the display blinks on
and off, it means the control system is proportioning heat controlto
the heater. During proportioning, the temperature displayed for
the zone should stay fairly constant, within +/-1 "F. lf the
temperature continues to rise during proportioning, then something
other than the control system is closing the triacs on the power
board and causing the heaters to heat. lf electrical noise from DC
drives is causing the overheating problem, then you may be
experiencing problems with other equipment in your facility. Take
the following steps to solve electrical noise problems:

a lnstallthe proper line reactor. Consult with the DC drive

manufacturer for the appropriate line reactor size.

a Electrically ground the hot melt unit to the parent machine

using as short a length of twisted cable as possible.

a lf the triacs continue to close after the hot melt unit is

grounded to the parent machine, install a line filter on each
input power line to the hot melt unit. Connect the filter
line-to-line. Refer to Partsfor the line filter part number. For a
three-phase system, order three filters.

c. lf the faulted zone is a hose or gun, replace the hose or gun with a
hose or gun that is known to be good. lf the fault disappears,
replace the defective hose or gun. lf the fault remains, continue to
the next step.

3. lf the fault remains after you press the CLEAR FAULTS key and after
you have taken the actions in step 2, check the heater or heater
circuit of the faulted zone. Refer to Checking a Heater or Heater
Circuit in Troubleshooting Procedures.

4. lf the fault remains after you have taken all the actions in this
procedure, replace the control assembly. Refer to Replacing the
Control Assembly in Repair Procedures.

82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-17

Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Fault

Nordson offers two test plugs that simplify the troubleshooting of RTD
faults. These test plugs help you quickly and easily determine whether
the problem is a gun, hose, or tank RTD problem or a control system
problem. Refer to Partstor the kit part number.

When the And the Selector And the It means Do this

FAULT light display Multipurpose
display
Flashes for Shows a zone Flashes RTD The RTD or RTD Refer to Checking an RTD or
two minutes number (refer to (See Note B) circuit of the RT D Ci rcu it in Trou b I e shooti ng
then stays on
continuously
Table B 2-4)
rLd indicated zone is
open or shorted.
Procedures.

(See Note A)
NOTE A: When the FAULT light flashes, the warning output contact is open and the fault output contact is closed.
After a two-minute delay, the warning output contact closes and the fault output contact opens. When
the FAULT light is off, both output contacts are closed. For more information on these output contacts,
refer to Connecting Output Contacts in lhe lnstallafion section.
B: The actual-temperature display will show 260 'C (500 'F) if the RTD is open It will show 0 'C (0 'F) if
the RTD is shorted.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v 82EN.04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-5

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-18 Control

Fault-Code Fault (F1-F7)

When the And the And the It means.. Do this
FAULT Selector Multipurpose
light... display.. display...
Turns on Shows the Shows the The power board Tighten the power board screws.
(See Note A) letter F number 2 screws are
loose, causing a
faulty ground
connection.
Shows the Shows the The control Turn the unit off, then back on again
letter F number 1,2,3, board is to see if the problem recurs. lf it
5,or6 defective. recurs, replace the control board or
replace the control assembly. Refer
to Replacing a ControlAssembly
Board or Replacing the Control
Assembly in Repair Procedu res.
Shows the Shows the There is a Correct the cause of the brownout.
letter F number 4 brownout
condition.
(See Note B)
Shows the Shows the The seven-day Replace the control board or the
letter F number 7 clock battery is control assembly. Refer to Replacing
dead. a Control Assembly Board or
(See Note C) Replacing the Control Assemblyin
Repair Procedures.
NOTE A: When the FAULT light turns on, the warning output contact is closed and the fault output contact is
open. When the FAULT light is off, both output contacts are closed. For more information on these
output contacts, refer to Connecting Output Contactsin lhe lnstallation section.
B: A brownout occurs when the power supply voltage falls below the voltage needed to maintain system
operation. When this happens, the controlsystem stops normaloperation. The system will resume
normal operation once the brownout condition is corrected
C: lf the unit and the seven-day clock feature are turned on and the clock battery dies, the CLOCK light
will flash. lf the unit is then subject to a power cycle or power interruption, the displays will indicate fault
code 7. However, if the clock feature is not turned on and the clock battery dies, the unit will not
indicate a fault. When the clock battery is dead, the unit will continue to operate normally except for
clock-related functions.

82EN-o4-[3V-X-4XXVj-s 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporatlon

lssued 5/O0 All rights reserved
 Control B 2-19

4. Troubleshooting Use these procedures as directed in Troubleshooting Tables to further

troubleshoot control system problems.
Procedures

Checking the POWER Switch Follow this procedure to check the POWER switch

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. This procedure requires you to perform electrical
troubleshooting with the power on. Use extreme caution and
refer to Electrical Safety During Troubleshooting and Opening
and Closing the Electrical Enclosure for instructions on safely
working inside the electrical enclosure.

1. Turn on power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect switch

2. With the unit's POWER switch in the off position, measure the voltage
across J4 positions 1 and 4 on the power board.

Voltage does not measure 230 VAC: replace the POWER switch
and harness.

Voltage measures 230 VAC: normal indication. Continue to the

next step.

3. With the unit's POWER switch in the on position, measure the voltage
across J4 positions 2 and 5 on the power board.

a Voltage does not measure 230 VAC: replace the POWER switch
and harness.

a Voltage measures 230 VAC: normal indication. Return to the UnrT

Not Powering On troubleshooting table.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s

All dghls reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-2O Control

Checking the 480 Vac Follow this procedure to check the harnesses on the 480 VAC distribution
Distribution Board Harnesses board and the transformer.
and the Transformer
WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or
death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (l/O) lines.

1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

3. Use an ohmmeter to check the continuity of the harnesses connected

to the following connectors on the 480 VAC distribution board and
take action as directed. See Figure B 2-4tor the location of
connectors on boards.

Harness Connector Check continuity Continuity Action

across harness exists?
pins...
480 VAC distribution board to X1D 1 and3 No Replace the harness.
transformer primary winding
Yes Go to the ne)d step.
480 VAC distribution board to x1D 6and8 No Replace the harness
transformer secondary
winding
Yes Go to the next step.
480 VAC distribution board to x3D 2and4 No Replace the harness
TBlA and TB1 B
Yes Go to the nelt step.

82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-5 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/00 All dghts reserved
 Control B 2-21

4. Use an ohmmeter to measure the resistance of the harnesses

connected to the following connectors on the 480 VAC distribution
board and take action as directed.

Harness Connector Measure Reading Action

resistance
across harness
pins...
480 VAC distribution board to x1D 1 and3 High ohms Replace the transformer
transformer primary winding
Low ohms Go to the next step.
480 VAC distribution board to X1D 6andB High ohms Replace the transformer
transformer secondary
winding

Low ohms Go to the next step

480 VAC distribution board to X3D 2and4 High ohms Replace the harness
TBlA and TBlB
Low ohms Go to the next step

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. This procedure requires you to perform electrical
troubleshooting with the power on. Use extreme caution and
refer to Electrical Safeg During Troubleshooting and Opening
and Closing the Electrical Enclosure for instructions on safely
working inside the electrical enclosure.

5. Restore power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect switch and
turn the unit on.

6. Use a voltmeter to measure the voltage at pins 1, 2, and 3 of the

harness connected to XI D on the 480 VAC distribution board.

a Voltage does not measure 432-528 VAC: make sure the unit is
connected to the input power supply and that 480 VAC is being
supplied. Make sure the electrical connections at TB1 on the 480
VAC distribution board are correct. Refer to Connecting Electrical
Se rui ce in lhe I nstal I afion section.

a Voltage measures 432-528 VAC: normal indication. Go to the

next step.

@ 2000 tlordson Corporation 41-3000y 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s

All rights reserved
lssued 5/0O
B 2-22 Control
Checking the 480 Vac
Distri bution Board Harnesses
and the Transformer @ontd.)
Checking a Heater or Heater
Circuit
82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXyl-s
7. Repeat the voltage measurement at pins 6 and B of the harness
connected to X1D.
a Voltage does not measure 207-253 VAC: defective harness or
transformer. Replace the harness. lf replacing the harness does
not solve the problem, replace the transformer.
a Voltage measures 207-253 VAC: normal indication. Go to the
next step.
8. Measure the voltage at pins 2 and 4 of the harness connected to X3D
on the 480 VAC distribution board and at TBI positions A and B on
the power board.
a Voltage does not measure 230 VAC: defective harness or
transformer. Replace the harness. lf replacing the harness does
not solve the problem, replace the transformer.
a Voltage measures 230 VAC: normal indication. Return to the Unit
Not Powering On troubleshooting table.
Follow this procedure to check a heater or heater circuit.
WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury, or
death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (l/O) lines.
1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.
2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the
Electrical Enclosure.
3. Check the heater by measuring its resistance at the heater connector
harness pins. Refer to Table B 2-5 to determine which board the
zone's heater connectors are located on. See Figure B 2-4 for the
location of the connectors on the boards. Remove the harness from
the connector and measure the resistance across the harness pins
identified in Table B 2-5.
a Resistance reading of zero (0): heater short circuit. Check for a
short in the heater circuit and repair the short.
a lnfinite resistance reading: open heater circuit or heater. Go to
the next step.
41-3000y O 2000 Nordson Corporation
All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-23

Table B 2-5 Heater Connector Locations and Harness Pins for Measurin Resistance
Problem Zone Connector Location Connector: Pin Resistance Range
Hose 1 Power board X1: '1 and X2: 'l '1400-50 ohms
Hose 2 Power board X1: 3andX2: 3 1400-50 ohms
Hose 3 Power board X1: SandX2: 5 140G-50 ohms
Hose 4 Power board X1: 7 andX2: 7 1400-50 ohms
Hose 5 (See Note A) 5/6 hose/gun board X1H: 4 and X2H: 3 1400-50 ohms
Hose 6 (See Note A) 5/6 hose/gun board X'lH: 2 and X2H: 1 1400-50 ohms
Gun 1 Power board X1: 2andX2: 2 600-100 ohms
Gun 2 Power board X1: 4 and X2: 4 600-100 ohms
Gun 3 Power board X1: 6 and X2: 6 600-100 ohms
Gun 4 Power board X1: 8andX2: 8 600-100 ohms
Gun 5 (See Note A) 5/6 hose/gun board X1H: 3 and X2H: 4 600-100 ohms
Gun 6 (See Note A) 5/6 hose/gun board X1H: '1 andX2H: 2 600-100 ohms
Tank 480 VAC distribution XSDA and XSDB 47-120 ohms
board
NOTE A: Some units can accept only four hoses and four guns

4. Check the continuity of the heater circuit by measuring the heater

resistance at a point in the circuit that is closer to the heater.

a lf the faulted zone is a hose or gun, measure the resistance at the

hose or gun electrical plug. Refer to your hose or gun manual for
a diagram of the electrical plug and for procedures for replacing
the gun heater. lf a hose heater is defective, replace the hose.

a lf the faulted zone is the tank, measure the resistance at the tank
heaterconnectors. lf you measure infinite orzeto (0) resistance
at the tank heater connectors, you must install a new tank. Refer
to the lank section.

5. Replace the control board or the control assembly. Refer to

Replacing a Control Assembly Board or Replacing the Controt
Assembly in Repair Procedures.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
41-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X.4XXyJ-5
lssued 5/00
B 2-24 Control

Checking a Thermostat Use this procedure to check a thermostat.

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve pressure.

Failure to obserue this warning may result in serious burns.

1. Relieve system pressure. Refer to Relieving System Pressure in the

Maintenance section.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury, or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (l/O) lines.

2. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

3. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

4. Remove the thermostat. Refer to RTD orThermostat Removalin

Repair Procedures.

5. Connect an ohmmeter set on the lowest resistance scale across the

thermostat; then heat the thermostat with a flameless electric heat
gun.

a Short circuit before thermostat reaches temperature and open

circuit when thermostat reaches temperature: normal indication.
Return to the appropriate troubleshooting table.

a Short circuit or low resistance at high temperature: defective

thermostat. Replace the thermostat. Refer to Replacing an RTD
or a Thermostatin Repair Procedures.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-25

Checking an RTD or RTD Follow this procedure to check an RTD or RTD circuit.
Circuit
NOTE: lf the faulted zone is a hose or a gun, you can remove the hose
or gun and replace it with a hose or gun that is known to be good. lf the
fault disappears, then the problem is in the hose or gun, not inside the
unit. As an alternative to using this procedure, you can refer to your hose
or gun manual for instructions on checking the hose or gun RTD and
replacing the gun RTD.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuUoutput (l/O) lines.

1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

3. Check the RTD by measuring its resistance. Refer to Table B 2-6

a lf the RTD is defective, replace the RTD. lf a hose RTD is

defective, you must replace the hose. To replace a gun RTD,
refer to your gun manual. To replace a tank RTD, refer to
Replacing an RTD or a Thermosfatin Repair Procedures.

NOTE: Flex the hose when you are checking a hose RTD. Some
hose FITDs exhibit problems intermittently.

a lf the RTD is good, go to the next step.

o 2000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-5

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-26 Control

Checking an RTD or RTD

Circuit (contd.)

Table B 2-6 Measuring RTD Resistance

Quick Methods ln-Depth Methods
Using a surface-temperature sensing device, such as a Let the system cool down to room temperature. When
thermocouple, measure the temperature of the RTD at the RTD has had time to reach room temperature, use
or near the end of the RTD that is accessible. Then use an ohmmeter to measure its resistance (See Note A).
an ohmmeter to measure its resistance (See Note A). See Figure B 2-6 and compare the resistance reading
See Figure B 2-6 and compare the resistance reading to to the RTD's normal resistance at room temperature.
the RTD's normal resistance at the known temperature.
Roughly estimate the temperature of the RTD to the Remove the RTD and heat it to a known temperature
nearest 50 'C (100 'F). Use an ohmmeter to measure by using an oven or by placing it in boiling water (pro-
its resistance (See Note A). See Figure B 2-6 and tect the wires and hold them above the water). Then
compare the resistance reading to the RTD's normal re- use an ohmmeter to measure its resistance
sistance at the estimated temperature. Because RTDs (See Note A). See Figure B 2-6 and compare the re-
usually fail open or closed, any resistance reading from sistance reading to the RTD's normal resistance at the
approximately 100-400 ohms strongly indicates'that the known temperature.
RTD is good.
NOTE A: lf the faulted zone is a hose or gun, measure the RTD resistance at the hose or gun electrical plug.
Refer to your hose or gun manual for a diagram of the electrical plug and for procedures for checking
RTD resistance. Because the core elements of a hose are not accessible, you cannot use some of the
methods described in this table to measure the temperature of a hose RTD. lf the faulted zone is a
tank, meadure the resistance at pins 33 and 34 of the harness attached to connector XP2 on the control
board.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVl-5 41 -3000v O 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-27

4. Check the continuity of the RTD circuit by measuring the RTD

resistance at other points in the circuit. Refer to Table B 2-7 tor lhe
plug or harness pins for each check. For a gun RTD, you can check
continuity at two points: first at the hose electrical plug and then at
the harness connected to XP2 on the control board. For a hose RTD,
you can check continuity at the hose electrical plug or at the harness
connected to XP2 on the control board. See Figure B 2-4 for the
location of XP2 on the control board. For the tank RTD, there are no
further checks you can make: go to the next step.

Table B 2-7 Pins for Checking RTD Resistance

Zone with Gun Electrical Hose Electrical PIug Connector XP2 Harness
Faulted RTD PIug Pins ' Pins Pins
Gun 1 3and5 3and5 9 and 10
Hose 1 N/A 5and8 1and2
Gun 2 3and5 3and5 11 and 1 2
Hose 2 NiA 5andB 3and4
Gun 3 3and5 3and5 13 and 14
Hose 3 N/A 5and8 5and6
Gun 4 3and5 3and5 15 and 16
Hose 4 N/A 5andB 7and8
Gun 5 (See Note A) 3and5 3and5 25 and26
Hose 5 (See Note A) N/A 5andB 29 and 30
Gun 6 (See Note A) 3and5 3and5 27 and28
Hose 6 (See Note A) N/A 5and8 31 and 32
Tank N/A N/A 33 and 34
NOTE A: Some units can accept only four hoses and four guns.

5. lf you find a continuity problem in the gun RTD circuit, replace the
hose or replace the gun RTD harness inside the unit as appropriate.
lf you find a continuity problem in the hose RTD circuit, replace the
hose RTD harness inside the unit. lf you do not find a continuity
problem, go to the next step.

6. Replace the control board or the control assembly. Refer to

Replacing a Control Assembly Board or Replacing the Control
Assembly in Repai r Procedures.

@000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000y 82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 2-28 Control

Checking an RTD or BTD

Circuit (contd)

360

340

320

300

280
U)

ro
z 260
UJ
()
z
f,
U) 240
U)
IJJ
TE

220 I
I
I

/ I
I
I
I
200

180

160

140

120

to'c g2"c s4"c 77w gg"c 12fc t+s"c roo'c redc ztdc zsf c
(50.F) (90.F) (130"F) (17dF) (210"F) (2sdF) (2s0"F) (330"F) (370'F) (41dF) (4sdF)

5940833

Fig. B 2-5 RTD Resistance vs. Temperature

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s 41-3000v O 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-29

5. Repair Procedures Use these procedures to replace control system components. You can
use the parts list illustrations at the end of this section as a guide as you
perform these procedures. Refer to the parts lists for the part numbers of
any components to be replaced.

WARNING: Risk of electricalshock. Failure to obserue

electricalsafety procedures may result in personal injury or
death. Allow only qualified personnelto perform these repair
procedures. Observe all high-voltage indicators.

Replacing a Fuse Follow this procedure to replace a fuse. A fuse may be secured by a
vertical or horizontal fuse holder.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuUoutput (l/O) lines.

1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the otf position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

3. See Figure B 2-7 and use the following table to locate the fuse to be
replaced.

e000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-s

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-30 Control

Replacing a Fuse @ontd;

Table B 2-8 Board Fuses

Board Fuse for.. Fuse
Numbers
Power board Hose 1, gun 1 F1, F5
Hose 2, gun 2 F2,F6
Hose 3, gun 3 F3, F7
Hose 4, gun 4 F4, F8
Control power supply F9, F1O
480 VAC distribution board Control power, tank F1, F2, F3
heater power
Transformer F4
(secondary winding)
5/6 hose/gun board Hose 5, gun 5 F'l F3
(5/6 hose/gun units only)
Hose 6, gun 6 F2,F4

o o
o o o

dob
! dob o
tl o io oF
o E "EI'

F5
F6 o
F7
F8
F9 E o o
2
F1 F11 F12
o
F3
1
o
EE"
o

I
F1
E=E
E+]
F2

3 4130869A

Fig. B 2-6 Location of Fuses on Boards

1. Power board 2. 480 VAC distribution board 3. 5/6 hose/gun board

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporallon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-31

4. See Figure B 2-7. Remove the fuse from the fuse holder and install
the new fuse. Refer to the following table.

Fuse Holder To Remove To lnstall

Vertical 1. Press down on the 1. Pull the fuse from the
fuse cap and turn it cap and replace it with
counterclockwise until a new fuse.
you feel the cap
release.
2. Lift the cap and fuse 2. lnsert the cap and
from the connector. fuse into the fuse
holder. Turn the fuse
and cap clockwise
and press down until
you feelthe cap lock
into place.
Horizontal Lift the fuse from its Press the replacement
two-station connector fuse into the two-station
connector until the fuse
snaps into place.

O
4130079A

Fig. B 2-7 Fuse Holders

'1. Vertical 2. Horizontal

3. Close the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

e000 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXV]-5

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 B 2-32 Control

Replacing a Control Assembly Use these procedures to replace the power board, control board, or
Board display board. As an alternative, you can save time by replacing the
entire control assembly. Refer to Replacing the Control Assembly.

Preparation for Removal

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (l/O) lines.

1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

3. Unscrew the support strap from the control-end frame and disconnect
the electrical service from TB1 on the power board.

Power Board Removal

1. lf you have not already done so, complete Preparation for Removal.

2. Label or note all power board connections for later reference.

NOTE: See Figure B 2-14 for an exploded drawing of the control

assembly parts. The wiring diagram contained inthe Wiring
Diagrams section at the end of this manual may also be helpful.

3. Disconnect the voltage plug from X3 (and X4 if applicable) on the

power board.

NOTE: Replacement power boards do not have a voltage plug. You

must keep the voltage plug from your old board.

4. Disconnect all harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections from

the power board.

82EN-04-[3V-X4XXVJ-5 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporatlon

lssued 5/00 All dghts reserved
 Control B 2-33

5. Remove the mounting hardware from the power board.

CAUTION: Bisk of equipment damage. Do not bend the XPl

I
a
connector pins.

6. Starting from the edge opposite the XP1 connector, carefully separate'
the power board from the control board. Take care not to bend the
XP1 connector pins that join power board and control board.

NOTE: The XP1 connector may remain attached to the power board.
lf it does, remove it and attach it to connector XP3 on the control
board.

NOTE: lf the optional l/O board is connected to the control board on

your unit, take care not to damage the l/O board as you remove the
power board.

Power Board lnstallation

1. Remove the new board from its static-safe container. Handle the
board by its edges without touching any pins, wires, or circuitry.

2. See Figure B 2-8. Align XPI on the new power board with the
connector pins on the control board. Press the board into place,
making sure the connector pins are properly inserted into their
sockets.

oo
oo
oo

oo
*foio
s!€

4130084

Fig. B 2-8 Aligning the XP1 Connector Pins

@00 Nordson Corpoiallon 4'l-3000y 82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXV1:.5

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 2-34 Control

Power Board lnstallation (contd.)

3. lnstall the mounting screws and lock washers you removed earlier.
Be sure to use lock washers on the three screws located at the three
ground pads on the power board. Tighten all screws to
2.0-2.5 N.m (18-20 in.-lb).

NOTE: See Figure B 2-14 for an exploded drawing of the control

assembly parts.

4. lnstall the large triac (Q17) screw, which is to the left of TB1. Tighten
the screw to 0.8-0.9 N.m (7-8 in.-lb).

5. lnstall the two triac clamps and, starting with the center screw, tighten
the securing screws lo 2.0-2.3 N.m (18-20 in.-lb).

6. Connect the voltage plug you kept from your old board to X3 (and X4
if applicable) on the power board.

7. Connect all other harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections to

the power board.

B. Go to System Restoration.

Control Board Removal

1. lf you have not already done so, complete Preparation for Removal.

2. Remove the power board. Refer to Power Board Removal.

3. Label or note all control board connections for later reference.

NOTE: See Figure B 2-14 for an exploded drawing of the control

assembly parts. The wiring diagram contained inthe Wiring
Diagrams section at the end of this manual may also be helpful.

4. Disconnect all harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections from

the control board.

5. Remove the mounting hardware from the control board

NOTE: lf your unit has the optional l/O board, you must also
disconnect this board from the control board. Refer to Series 3000V
lnput/Output Boardinlhe Options section for instructions on l/O board
removal.

6. Carefully separate the control board from the display board. Take
care not to bend the XP4A connector pins that join the control and
display boards. Retain the connector.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXU-s 41-3000y @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-35

Control Board lnstallation

1. Remove the new board from its static-safe container. Handle the
board by its edges without touching any pins, wires, or circuitry.

2. See Figure B 2-9. Align the XP4A connector pins (2) with the
connector (1) on the display board, then carefully press the control
board into place.

2
4130078A

2-9 Aligning the XP4A Connector

Fig. B
1. XP4A connector 2. XP4A connector pins

3. Reinstallthe mounting hardware. Be sure to use lock washers on the

two screws located at the two ground pads on the control board.
Tighten allscrews to2.0-2.3 N.m (18-20 in.-lb).

NOTE: See Figure B 2-14 for an exploded drawing of the control

assembly parts.

4. Connect all other harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections to

the control board.

NOTE: lf your unit has the optional l/O board, you must also connect
this board to the control board. Refer to Series 3000V lnput/Output
Boardinthe Options section for instructions on l/O board installation.

5. lnstallthe power board. Go to step 2in Power Board lnstallation.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5

All dghts reserued
lssued 5/00
B 2-36 Control

Display Board Removal

1. lf you have not already done so, complete Preparation for Removal.

2. Remove the power board and control board. Refer to Control Board
Removal.

3. Remove the mounting hardware that secures the display board to the
control-end frame and remove the display board.

NOTE: See Figure B 2-14 for an exploded drawing of the control

assembly parts.

Display Board lnstal lation

1. Bemove the new board from its static-safe container. Handle the
board by its edges without touching any pins, wires, or circuitry.

2. Align the display board with the control-end frame and attach it with the
mounting hardware. Tighten allscrews 1o2.0-2.3 N.m (18-20 in.-lb).

3. lnstall the control board and power board. Go to step 2in Control
Board lnstallation.

System Restoration
1. Reattach the support strap to the control-end frame. Tighten the
screw lo2.0-2.3 N.m (18-20 in.-lb).

2. Close and secure the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and

Closing the Electrical Enclosure.

3. lf you replaced the control board, re-enter your customized system

settings, if any. Refer to Sysfem Programming Procedures and
Records of System Seftings in lhe lnstallafion section.

Replacing the Operator Panel Follow this procedure to replace the operator panel. As an alternative,
you can save time by replacing the entire control assembly. Refer to
Replacing the Control Assembly.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-5 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-37

Operator Panel Removal

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (l/O) lines.

1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

3. Remove the power board. Refer to Power Board Removalin

Replacing a Control Assembly Board.

4. Disconnect the ribbon cable from XP1 on the control board.

5. Close the control-end frame and secure it with the captive screws

6. See Figure B 2-10. Using a flat-blade screwdriver and pliers, pull the
operator panel away from the control-end frame and guide the ribbon
cable through the hole in the control-end frame.

4130096A

Fig. B 2-10 Removing the Operator Panel

7. Use a citrus industrial cleaner to remove any adhesive that remains

on the control-end frame; then use denatured alcohol to thoroughly
clean the residue left by the citrus industrial cleaner.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-38 Control

Operator Panel lnstallation

1. Remove the new operator panel from its static-safe container.
Handle the panel by its edges without touching the ribbon cable pins.

2. With clean hands, peel the paper backing from the operator panel.
Be sure to remove allthe paper, especially around the ribbon cable.

3. See Figure B 2-11. Connect the plastic ground tab, which is located
behind the Selector display, to the operator panel by lifting the tab up
and pressing it against the adhesive backing.

4130099A

Fig. B 2-11 Connecting the Ground Tab

4. lnsert the ribbon cable through the hole in the control-end frame and,
starting from the ribbon strip side of the operator panel, carefully align
the operator panel on the control-end frame.

CAUTION: Mount the operator panel on a clean, smooth

I
a
surface. Otherwise, the panel may lose contact and cause poor
unit performance. Additional damage can occur if operators
attempt to run the unit using a panel that is not securely
mounted.

5. Firmly press the panel into place with a rubber roller or similar tool.

6. Loosen the captive screws and lower the control-end frame. Connect
the ribbon cable to XP1 on the control board.

7. lnstall the power board, connect the electrical service, and close the
electrical enclosure. Golo Power Board lnstallation and System
Restoration in Replacing a Control Assembly Board.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-39

Replacing the Control Follow this procedure to replace the control assembly. The control
Assembly assembly includes the following components:
. power board
. control board
. display board
o control-end frame
o operator panel

Control Assembly Removal

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (l/O) lines.

1. Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

3. Disconnect the ground wire

4. Taking care not to cut any electrical wires, cut the cable ties that
secure the harnesses at the bottom of the control-end frame.

5. Label or note all board connections for later reference.

NOTE: See Figure B 2-14 for an exploded drawing of the control

assembly parts. The wiring diagram contained inlhe Wiring
Diagrams section at the end of this manual may also be helpful.

6. Disconnect all harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections from

the control assembly boards.

NOTE: lf your unit has an optional l/O board, you must also
disconnect this board from the control board. Refer to Series 3000V
lnput/Output Boardinthe Options section for instructions on l/O board
removal.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-4O Control

Control Assembly Removal @ontd.)

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage or personal injury.

Support the control-end frame before disconnecting the support
strap or removing the hinge pins.

7. Support the control-end frame and disconnect the support strap.

8. See Figure B 2-12. Cut the push nuts from the hinge pins and
discard both the nuts and pins. Remove the control assembly.

41300924

Fig. B 2-12 Removing the Control Assembly

82EN-04-[3V-X4XXVI-s 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All riqhts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-41

Contro I As se mb ly I n sta I I ati o n

1. Remove the new control assembly from its static-safe container.
Avoid touching any pins, wires, or circuitry.

2. Support the contiol-end frame, align the control assembly with the
base of the unit, and insert the new hinge pins through the holes in
the control-end frame and unit base. lnstallthe pins so the head of
each pin is on the outside of the front or rear panel.

3. Using an appropriate tool, press new push nuts over the hinge pins.

4. Reattach the support strap to the control-end frame. Tighten the

screw lo 2.0-2.3 N.m (18-20 in.-lb).

5. Connect all harnesses, ribbon cables, and other connections to the

control assembly boards.

NOTE: lf your unit has an optional l/O board, you must also connect
this board to the control board. Refer to Series 3000V lnput/Output
Board in lhe Options section of this manual for instructions on l/O
board installation.

6. Secure the harnesses with new cable ties and secure the cable ties to
the bottom of the control-end frame.

7. Connect the ground wire.

B. Cfose and secure the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and

Closing the Electrical Enclosure.

9. Re-enter your customized system settings, if any. Refer lo System

Programming Procedures and Records of System Seffings in the
lnstallation section.

Replacing a Unit-Specitic Board Your unit may include one or more unit-specific boards, depending on the
configuration of the unit. lnstructions for replacing unit-specific boards
are supplied with the replacement board repair kits. Refer to Padsfor the
repair kit part numbers.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-5

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-42 Control

Replacing an RTD or a Follow this procedure to replace the tank FITD or thermostat. Hose RTDs
Thermostat cannot be replaced-you must replace the hose. To replace a gun RTD
or thermostat, refer to your gun manual. Refer to the parts lists in the
Ianksection for RTD or thermostat seruice kit part numbers.

RTD or Thermostat Removal

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal ipjury, or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuUoutput (l/O) lines.

Place the unit's POWER switch in the off position, disconnect and
lock out electrical power to the unit at the branch circuit disconnect
switch, and disconnect and lock out electrical power supplied through
any l/O wiring.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure.

3. Remove the front cover from the unit.

4. Disconnect the RTD plug or the thermostat plug.

CAUTION: Risk of equipment damage. Do not cut any

! electrical wires when removing cable ties.

5. Taking care not to cut any electrical wires, cut the cable ties that bind
the harness.

WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective gloves.

6. See Figure B 2-13. Fold back the cut-away section of the tank
insulation to access the RTD or thermostat.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s 41-3000v @00 Nordson CoDoration

All dghts reseNed
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-43

7. Remove the RTD or thermostat from the tank. Refer to the following
table.

To Remove the RTD To Remove the Thermostat

a. Flemove the two screws that
attach the RTD retainer plate to
the tank and remove the plate.
Save the screws and the plate.
b. Pull the RTD out of the slot in
the tank wall.
c. Discard the RTD.
a. Remove the two screws that
attach the thermostat to the
tank. Save the screws.
b. Remove the thermostat and
protective rubber boot.
c. Discard the thermostat.

\s 41309294

Fig. B 2-13 RTD orThermostat Replacement (typical)

e000 Nodson Corporalion 41-3000y 82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-44 Control

RTD or Thermostat lnstallation

1. Apply a thermal compound to the new FITD or thermostat.

2. lnstall the RTD or thermostat. Refer to the following table.

To lnstallthe RTD To lnstall the Thermostat

a. lnsert the RTD into the slot on a. Position the new thermostat
the tank wall. on the tank wall.

b. Place the RTD retainer plate b. Secure the thermostat to the

over the RTD and secure it with tank wall with the two screws
the two screws removed earlier. removed earlier.

3. Route the RTD or thermostat wires along the tank harness to prevent
the wires from being pinched and secure the wires to the harness
with new cable ties.

4. Connect the RTD or thermostat plug.

5. Fold the insulation cut-away back into place.

6. Reinstall the front cover.

7. Close and secure the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and

Closing the Electrical Enclosure.

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVJ-5 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-45

6. Parts To order parts, call the Nordson Customer Service Center or your local
Nordson representative. Use this five-column parts list, and the
accompanying illustration, to describe and locate parts correctly.

Using the lllustrated Parts List Numbers in the ltem column correspond to numbers that identify parts in
illustrations following each parts list. The code NS (not shown) indicates
that a listed part is not illustrated. A dash (-) is used when the part
number applies to all parts in the illustration.

The six-digit number in the Part column is the Nordson Corporation part
number. A series of dashes in this column (- - - - - -) means the part
cannot be ordered separately.

The Description column gives the part name, as well as its dimensions
and other characteristics when appropriate. lndentions show the
relationships between assemblies, subassemblies, and pafis.

Item Part Description Quantity Note

000 000 Assembly 1

1 000 000 . Subassembly 2 A

2 000 000 .. Part 1

. lf you order the assembly, items 1 and 2 will be included

. lf you order item 1, item 2 will be included.
. lf you order item 2,you will receive item 2 only.

The number in the Quantity column is the quantity required per unit,
assembly, or subassembly. The code AR (As Required) is used if the
part number is a bulk item ordered in quantities or if the quantity per
assembly depends on the product version or model.

Letters in the Note column refer to notes at the end of each parts list.
Notes contain important information about usage and ordering. Special
attention should be given to notes.

@ 2000 Nodson Corpdration 4't-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-46 Control

Hose/Gun Test Plugs Nordson offers two test plugs that simplify the troubleshooting of RTD
faults. These test plugs help you quickly and easily determine whether
the problem is a gun, hose, or tank RTD problem or a Vista controller
problem.

Part Description Quantity Note

326 975 Service kit, test plugs, Vista/3000
Plug, test, hose/gun, 3000 1

Plug, test, Vista 1

Line Filter lf your unit is atfected by electrical noise, install a line filter on each input
power line to the unit. Connect the filter line-to-line. For a three-phase
system, order three filters.

Part Description Quantity Note

332 182 RC snubber (line filter) 1

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-5 41-3000y @000 Nordson CoDoration

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-47

This page left intentionally blank

@000 Nodson Corporation 41 -3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-48 Control

Control Assembly Parts List See Figure B2-14.

ltem Part Description Quantity Note

328921 Repair kit, control assembly, 480 VAC A
1 234 423 . Service kit, control-end frame 1

2 225 453 . Nut, spring, U type 2

3 225 458 . Operator panel, standard, Vista 1

4 225 451 . Power switch, 250 VAC, 16 A, panel mounted 1

5 225 450 . Power switch boot 1

6 225 448 o Harness, power switch 1

7 234 426 . Repair kit, display board 1

8 982970 o Screw, hex head, slotted, M4 x I mm, w/nylon patch o

o 1 85 092 o Connector, 40 position (display board to control board) 1

10 328920 . Repair kit, control board, 480 VAC 1

11 982971 o Screw, hex head, slotted, M4x12 mm, w/nylon patch 10

12 328 919 . Service kit, software chip, Vista, 480 VAC 'l

13 232 540 o Connector, 26 position (control board to power board) 1

14 234 427 . Repair kit, power board, Vista 1

15 982974 o Screw, hex head, slotted, M4 x 12 mm, dlock washer 6

16 982975 . Screw, hex head, slotted, M4 x 16 mm, w/lock washer o
17 302882 o Screw, socket head, cap, M3 x 10 mm, Wnylon patch 1

18 225 446 o Clamp, triac, power board 2

19 227 567 . Voltage plug, power board 1 B
20 220 592 . Connector, plug, power board, 6 position, 5 mm 1

21 939 491 o Fus€, power board, 20.0 A, fast acting, 600 VAC 2 c
23 939 683 o Fuse, power board, 6.3 A, fast acting, 250 VAC I D
24 232681 . Bracket, ground wire 1

125249 o Mount, cable strap (located on item 24) 2

25 230 261 . Terminal, ground wire, 6-14 AWG 1

NOTE A: Order this part for a complete control assembly.

B: This voltage plug is the same as the voltage plug used on 230 VAC (with neutral) 1O units.
C: Fuses for control power supply (F9 and F10 on the power board). The fuses for control power are on the 480 VAC
distribution board. Refer to'Uhii-Specific Parts List.'
D: Fuses for hoses and guns (F1 through F8 on the power board).

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

lssued 5/O0 All righls reserved
 Control B 2-49

24 5
25
8
2 4
5
2

12
11

11

15
19
n
\ 18

16
5
8 m
9

10

11

15
14 21

22 18
6 20 15 16
17
41504264

Fig. B 2-14 ControlAssembly Parts

@000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000y 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 2-50 Control

Unit-Specitic Parts List See Figure B 2-15

Item Part Description Quantity Note

1 333 342 Repair kit, 480 VAC distribution board 1

2 939 02'1 Fuse, 480 VAC distribution board, 20 A, fast acting, 600 3 A
VAC
3 297 747 Fuse, 480 VAC distribution board, 16 A, fast acting, 250 1 B
VAC
4 328 333 Harness, 480 VAC distribution board, transformer 1

5 328326 Harness, 480 VAC distribution board, power input 1

6 328 328 Harness, 480 VAC distribution board, tank heater 1

7 328 335 Harness,480 VAC distribution board, relay 1

8 333 343 Service kit, relay 1

o 333 344 Service kit, transformer, 480 VAC, 3 kVa, 60 Hz 1

10 247 260 Repair kit, 5/6 hose/gun board 1

11 939 683 Fuse, 5/6 hose/gun board, 6.3 A, fast acting, 250 VAC 4 c
12 232666 Harness, 5/6 hose/gun board, power input 1

13 225 446 Clamp, triac, 5/6 hose/gun board 1

14 247 261 Repair kt, l/O board, standard 'l D

239 494 Repair kit, l/O board, enhanced 1 D
NOTE A: Fuses for control power and tank heater power (Fl through F3 on the 480 VAC distribution board).
B: Fuse for transformer (F4 on the 480 VAC distribution board).
C: Fuses for hoses and guns 5 and 6 (F'1 through F4 on the 5/6 hose/gun board).
D: Present only on units with an l/O board. Refer to Series 3000V lnput/Output Boardinthe Options section

82 EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVI-5 41-3000v e000 Nordson Corporatlon

AU righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Control B 2-51

2 3
5
4
7
1

10
12 13

14

41308664

Fig. B 2-15 Unit-Specific Parts

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-5

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
B 2-52 Control

82EN-04-[3V-X-4XXVj-s 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
 Part B, Section 3

Tank

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model 3400v
Voltage Ail
Pump Piston Pump (E or G)
Manifold 4-Port (A)
Control Vista Standard (V)
Vista Pattern (PC)
Vista Temperature (TC)

@O00 Nordson Corpoialion 41-3000v B3EN-05-[3V-4-AXXXI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 3-0 Tank

83EN-05-[3V-4-AXXXI-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Tank B 3-1

Section B 3
Tank

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform the

following tasks. Follow the safety instructions in this document
and all other related documentation.

1. lntroduction This section describes how to replace the tank and manifold. lt includes
. an overview of the tank assembly
o procedures for replacing the tank and manifold
o parts lists for the tank assembly and unit frame
Refer to the following sections for additional information on the tank and
manifold:

a Description gives tank specifications, including the tank capacity,

the tank volume, and the dimensions of the tank lid opening.

a Operation gives the procedure for filling the tank with adhesive.

a Maintenance gives procedures for flushing the tank and manifold

and for draining adhesive from the tank.

a Hydraulics includes the manifold assembly parts list.

a Controlincludes procedures for replacing the tank resistance

temperature detector (RTD) or thermostat.

2. Overview of the Tank The tank holds a supply of adhesive and melts it before it is pumped to
the hoses and guns. An RTD and overtemperature thermostat sense the
tank temperature and provide input to the control system. The tank is
heated by cast-in heating elements.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v 83EN-05-[3V-4-AXXXI-2

All dghts reseryed
lssued 5/00
B 3-2 Tank

3. Tank and Manifold Because the tank and manifold have no moving parts, you should not
need to replace them. However, if you need to remove them from the
Replacement unit for any reason, follow these procedures. Refer to the parts lists at
the end of this section for the part numbers of any components that need
to be replaced. You can use the parts list illustrations as a guide as you
perform the following disassembly and reassembly procedures.

To replace both the tank and the manifold, you must complete all of the
following procedures:
. Preparing to Replace the Tank or Manifold
. Drbassembling the Tank and Manifold
. Reassembling the Tank and Manifold
. Restoring the Unit to Normal Operation
These instructions can also be used to replace just one part of the tank
assembly.

Preparing to Replace the Tank Complete this procedure before you perform any tank repairs
or Manifold
1. Heat the unit to operating temperature to aid disassembly and to
prepare for draining as much adhesive as possible from the tank.

2. Drain the tank. For information about different ways to drain the tank,
refer to Flushing the Systeminlhe Maintenance section.

3. Turn the pump air pressure regulator to 0; then disconnect the air
regulator from the unit.

4. Remove the pump from the unit. Refer to Pump Removalinlhe

Hydraulics section.

NOTE: The procedure for removing the pump includes steps for
relieving system pressure and locking out electrical power to the unit.

B3EN-05-[3V-4-AXXXJ-2 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserued
lssued 5/00
 Tank B 3-3

Disassembling the Tank and Follow this procedure to remove the tank and manifold and to
Manifold disassemble them.

1. lf you have not already done so, complete Preparing to Replace the
Tank or Manifold.

2. Remove the unit's front and back panels. To do so, you will need to
. remove the electrical enclosure lid
. loosen some of the tank lid screws
. disconnect any ground wires
3. See Figure B 3-1. Remove the tank lid assembly.

4130817

Fig. B 3-1 Removing the Tank Lid Assembly

4. See Figure B 3-2. Remove the screws (2) that hold the air line
adapter (3) to the hose-end panel (1).

3 4130816

Fig. B 3-2 Removing the Air Line Adapter Screws

1. Hose-end panel 3. Air line adapter
2. Air line adapter screws

o 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 83EN-05-[3V-4-AXXX]-2

All rights reseled
lssued 5/0O
B 3-4 Tank

Disassembling the Tank and 5. Remove the screws on the bottom of the hose-end panel. Swing the
Manifold @ontd.)
panel and wire harness away from the unit.

6. lf the unit is attached to a support platform, remove any anchoring

bolts.

7. See Figure B 3-3. Remove the RTD, thermostat, and ground wire (if
present) from the tank.

\s 4130929A

Fig. B 3-3 Removing an RTD and Thermostat (typical)

8. Tilt the unit back at an angle to gain access to the base and remove
the screws and washers that attach the manifold to the base. Return
the unit to the level position.

NOTE: Ask an assistant to help you tilt the unit and support it while
you remove the screws and washers.

9. Pull the tank and manifold away from the unit. The spacers between
the manifold and the base may come loose at this time. lf they do
not, remove them by hand.

10. Disconnect the tank heater wires.

11. Carefully remove all insulation.

12. Separate the tank cover and gasket from the tank.

13. Remove the tank strainer from inside the tank.

83EN-05-[3V-4-AXXX]-2 41-3000v e000 Nordson Corporallon

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Tank B 3-5

14. Remove the screws and washers that secure the manifold to the tank;
then separate the manifold from the tank.

15. Remove the two O-rings from the grooves in the manifold and discard
them. You should replace the O-rings any time the manifold is
separated from the tank. Refer lo Manifold Assembly Parts Lrbtin the
Hydraulics section for the O-ring part number.

Reassembling the Tank and Follow this procedure to reassemble the tank and manifold and to
Manifold reinstall them on the unit.

1. Turn the tank upside down and place it on a flat surface.

2. See Figure B 3-4. Lubricate two new O-rings with O-ring lubricant
and place the O-rings in their grooves on the manifold.

4130830A

Fig. B 3-4 lnstalling New O-rings

3. Turn the manifold upside down and align it correctly on the tank.

NOTE: lf the O-rings are lubricated, they will stay in the grooves
when you turn the manifold upside down.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y 83EN-05-[3V-4-AXXXj-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 3-6 Tank

Reassembling the Tank and 4. lnsert the manifold washers and screws in the bottom of the manifold
Manifold @ontd; and tighten them finger tight only. Then tighten the screws in the
sequence shown in Figure B 3-5. Tighten the screws to
5.4-6.8 N.m (4-5 ft-lb).

o oc
o4
o o1
o
a2
o o5

41306044

Fig. B 3-5 Correct Sequence for Tightening Manifold Screws

5. Turn the tank and manifold over so that the tank's open side is up and
wrap the insulation around the tank and manifold. Use
high-temperature duct tape to secure the insulation.

6. Reconnect the heater wires to the tank heater connections.

7. Hold the spacers in place and attach the tank and manifold to the
base of the unit with the screws and washers removed earlier. lt may
be necessary to tilt the unit to gain access to the bottom of the base.
Tighten the screws to 10.9-13.6 N.m (8-10 ft-lb).

NOTE: Be sure you do not pinch the heater wires when you are
securing the tank and manifold to the base.

NOTE: To ease assembly, you can cut the heads off of four M8
screws that are longer than the spacers (do not use the screws
supplied with the service kit). Loosely thread the cut screws into the
tapped holes in the bottom of the manifold. Slip the spacers over the
screws. This will keep the spacers in line until you are ready to install
the supplied screws. When you are ready to install the supplied
screws, remove the cut screws. Ask an assistant to help you tilt the
unit and support it while you replace the screws and washers.

83EN-05-[3V-4-AXXXI-2 41-3000y @ 2000 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Tank B 3-7

B. Apply thermal compound to the RTD and thermostat and install them
on the side of the tank.

9. Reconnect the ground wire (if present) to the tank.

10. lf the unit was attached to a support platform, anchor it to the platform
now.

11. Lay the tank strainer in the bottom of the tank.

12. lnstall a new tank gasket and secure the tank cover to the tank.

NOTE: You should replace the tank gasket any time the tank cover is.
separated from the tank.

13. Swing the wire harness and hose-end panel into position and secure
the hose-end panel with the screws you removed earlier.

14. Make sure the air-line adapter is securely inserted in the recessed
area on the inside of the hose-end panel. Secure the adapter with
the screws you removed earlier.

15. lnstall the pump air pressure regulator and connect the incoming air
line to the regulator.

16. lnstall the tank lid assembly using the screws you removed earlier.

17. lnstallthe unit's front and back panels.

Restoring the Unit to Normal Follow this procedure to reinstall the pump and restore the unit to normal
Operation operation.

1 . lnstall the pump. Refer to Pump lnstallation in lhe Hydraufbs section,

2. lnstall and secure the pump cover.

3. Return the pump air pressure to the normal operating setting.

4. Remove the lock-out and restore power to the unit.

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y BsEN-05-[3V-4-AXX]0-2

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
B 3-8 Tank

This page left intentionally blank.

B3EN-05-[3V-4-AXXX]-2 41 -3000v @000 Nordson CoIporatlon

All rlghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Tank B 3-9

4. lllustrated Parts List To order parts, call the Nordson Customer Service Center or contact your
Nordson representative. Use the parts lists and accompanying
illustrations in this section to locate and describe parts correctly.

Using the lllustrated Parts List Numbers in the ltem column correspond to numbers that identify parts in
illustrations following each parts list. The code NS (not shown) indicates
that a listed part is not illustrated. A dash (-) is used when the part
number applies to all parts in the illustration.

The six-digit number in the Part column is the Nordson Corporation part
number. A series of dashes in this column (- - - - - -) means the part
cannot be ordered separately.

The Description column gives the part name, as well as its dimensions
and other characteristics when appropriate. lndentions show the
relationships between assemblies, subassemblies, and parts.

Item Part Description Quantity Note

000 000 Assembly 1

1 000 000 . Subassembly 2 A

2 000 000 .. Part 1

. lf you order the assembly, items 1 and 2 will be included

. lf you order item 1, item 2 will be included.
. lf you order item 2,you will receive item 2 only.

The number in the Quantity column is the quantity required per unit,
assembly, or subassembly. The code AR (As Required) is used if the
part number is a bulk item ordered in quantities or if the quantity per
assembly depends on the product version or model.

Letters in the Note column refer to notes at the end of each parts list.
Notes contain important information about usage and ordering. Special
attention should be given to notes.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000y BsEN-05-[3V-4-AXXX]-2

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
B 3-10 Tank

Tank Assembly Parts List See Figure B 3-6.

Item Part Description Quantity Note

1 143 653 Screw, pan head, hi-lo, recessed, cut, #6-19 x 0.50 in. 4
2 983 064 Washer, flat, E, 0.156 x 0.375 x 0.049 in. 4
3 1't1 801 Gasket, tank lid 1

4 982 000 Screw, pan head, slotted, M5 x 10 mm 3

5 1 06 340 Gasket, tank 1

o 105 622 Strainer, tank 1

7 108 907 RTD w/harness 1 A

I 274667 Plate, retainer, RTD 1

9 338 368 Screw, pan head, cross recessed, M3 x 5 mm 4

10 249 800 Thermostat w/harness 1 A
11 288 154 Spacer, manifold, 0.500 lD x 0.546 in. 2
12 983 414 Washer, flat, narrow, M8 6
13 983 436 Washer, lock, external, M8 2
14 982212 Screw, hex head, cap, M8 x 30 mm 2
15 982 107 Screw, hex head, cap, MB x 70 mm 1

16 983 404 Washer, lock, split, M8 4

17 2BB 148 Spacer, tank, 0.50 lD x 2.04 in. 1

18 105 412 Tank (200-240 VAC 3A and 1

400VAC1230 VAC 30 units)

143832 Tank (400 VAC 3A and 480 VAC 30 units) 't

19 1 05 590 Cover, tank (200-240 VAC 3A,4001230YAC 3A, and 1

400 VAC 30 units)
328286 Cover, tank (480 VAC 30 units) 1

20 1 87 639 Outer lid, tank (200-240VAC 3A, 1 B

4001230VAC 3A, and 400 VAC 3Z units)
187 640 Outer lid, tank (480 VAC 30 units) 1 C
21 105 619 Pan, pump 1

22 982 050 Screw, hex head, cap, M8 x 35 mm 3

23 Assembly, pump 1 D
NOTE A: Apply thermaljoint compound, part 275 386.
g: For a complete lid assembly, order part 133 906.
C: For a complete lid assembly, order part 328 2BB.
D: Refer to Piston Pump Parts Listinlhe Hydraulbs section.

B3EN.0s-[3V-4-AXXXI-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights r€served
lssued 5/00
 Tank B 3-11

1 2
23

20

22 ______*€ 19

ro=_j
12

5
21 6

7,8,9

18

10

17 11 9

@- 12

'13
12

't6 14

15
4t300624

Fig. B 3-6 Tank Assembly Parts

e000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y B3 EN-05-[3V-4-AXXXI-2

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
B 3-12 Tank

Frame Assembly Parts List See Figure B 3-7.

Item Part Description Quantity Note

1 105 618 Cover, pump 1

2 288 307 lnsulation, tank (200-240 VAC 3A and 1

4001230 VAC 3@ units)
144 313 lnsulation, tank (400 VAC 3A units and 1
480 VAC 30 units)
3 227 557 Panel, hose end, 2-hose harness 1
(200-240VAC3A,4001230 VAC 30, and
400 VAC 30 units)
333327 Panel, hose end, 2-hose harness 1
(480 VAC 30 units)
225 447 Panel, hose end, 4-hose harness 1
(200-240VAC3A,4001230 VAC 3@, and
400 VAC 30 units)
333 325 Panel, hose end,4-hose harness 1
(480 VAC 30 units)
4 982342 Screw, pan head, recessed, M6 x 10 mm 2
5 234 434 Panel, front (200-240 VAC 3A and 1
4001230 VAC 3@ units)
249783 Panel, front (400 VAC 30 units) 1

333 603 Panel, front (480 VAC 30 units) 1

6 143652 Screw, hex head, hi-lo, wash, cut, 1/a-15 3

7 225 456 Pin, hinge 2
I 225 455 Nut, push 2
I Controlassembly 1 A
10 Ground stud assembly 1 B

11 1 05 593 Frame, center (200-240 V AC 3A, 4001230 V AC 3A, 1

and 400 VAC 30 units)
333 605 Frame, center, dinsulation (480 VAC 30 units) 1

12 225 454 Strap, front panel (200-240VAC 3A and 1

4001230 VAC 30 units)
249753 Strap, front panel (400 VAC 30 units) 1

249754 Strap, front panel (480 VAC 30 units) 1

NOTE A: Refer to Control Assembly Parts List in the Controlsection.

B: Refer to Ground Stud Assembly Parts Lrstin this section.
Continued on nert page

B3EN-05-[3V-4-AXXX]-2 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All righls reserved
lssued 5i00
 Tank B 3-13

Item Part Description Quantity Note

13 982768 Screw, pan head, recessed, M4 x B mm 1

14 288 160 Screw, pan head, hi-lo, recessed, 6-19 1

15 234 433 Panel, rear (200-240 VAC 3A and 1

4001230 VAC 32 units)
304 336 Panel, rear (400 VAC 3Z units) 1

304 338 Panel, rear (480 VAC 3Z units) 1

16 288 222 lnsulation, center frame (200-240 VAC 30, 1 A

4001230VAC 3A, and 400 VAC 3Z units)
17 105 614 Lid, electricalenclosure (200-240 VAC 3Z and 1
4001230 VAC 30 units)
143842 Lid, electricalenclosure (400 VAC 3@ units and 1
480 VAC 32 units)
18 Base 1

19 230 908 Gasket, D-shaped, center 1

20 230 897 Gasket, D-shaped, end 1

21 983 047 Washer, flat, regular, M4 1

22 983 005 Washer, flat, 0.156 x 0.562 x 0.040 in. 2

23 182 493 Guard, filter/drain valve 1

NOTE A: The center frame insulation for 480 VAC 3A units is included in the center frame service kit,
part 333 605.

@000 Nordson Corporallon 41-3000v 83EN-05-[3V-4-AXXXI-2

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
B 3-14 Tank

Frame Assembly Parts List

(contd.)

14

17 22

16
15

19
3

13
1't

21
12 20 +23

18

10

o 8 5
7
6
4t30t2sA

Fig. B 3-7 Frame Assembly Parts

BsEN-05-[3V-4-AXXn-2 41-3000y @00 Nordson Corporation

All rlghls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Tank B 3-15

Ground Sfud Assembly Parts See Figure B 3-8.

List

Item Part Description Quantity Note

1 984 129 Nut, hex head, machine, #10-32 5
2 271 221 Lug,45", double, 0.250 in., 0.438 in. 7
3 983 120 Washer, lock, split, #10 5
4 240 674 Tag, ground 1

5 983 048 Washe( lock, external, #10 1

6 982 938 Screw, round head, #10-32 x 1.500 in. 1

7 Base 1 A
NOTE A: Base shown for reference purposes only.

7 6
4190420

Fig. B 3-8 Ground Stud Assembly Parts

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y BsEN-05-[3V-4-AXXXI-2

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
B 3-16 Tank

83 EN-05-[3V-4-AXXX]-2 41 -3000y @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Part C

Hoses

G894 Nordson Corporatlon coEN-01-[3X-XXXX]-l

All rights reserved
lssued 8/94
C 1-0 Hoses

c0EN-01-[3X-XXXX]-1 €D994 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 8/94
 t,

RTD-Style Hot Melt

Hose
Part 108 232E

,.t

itl

,t,,$
l)a
t'."\ $
!;
{'
t,.
.,'$,:t
&r

Nordson"
dt r

NORDSON CORPORATION o AMHERST, OHIO o USA

 Nordson Corporation welcomes requests lor information, comments and inquiries about its products. General
information about Nordson can be found on the lntemet using the following address: http://wwwnordson.com.

Address all correspondence to:

Nordson Corporation
Attn: Customer Service
11475 Lakefield Drive
Duluth, GA 30097

Notice

This is a Nordson Corporation publication which is protected by copyright. Original copyright date 1992. No part of
this document may be photocopied, reproduced, or translated to another language without the prior written consent
of Nordson Corporation. The information contained in this publication is subject to change without notice.

Trademarks

AquaGuard, Blue Box, Control Coat, Equi=Bead, FoamMelt, FoamMix, Helix, Hot Shot, Hot Stitch, Meltex,
MicroSet, MultiScan, Nordson, the Nordson logo, OmniScan, Package of Values, Porous Coat, PosiStop, ProLink,
PRX, RBX, Shur-Lock, UniScan, UpTime, and Versa-Spray are registered trademarks of Nordson Corporation.

BetterBook, CF, Controlled Fiberization, Eclipse, Satum, Seal Sentry Swirl Coat, and Vista
are trademarks of Nordson Corporation.

Teflon and Viton are registered trademarks of E.l. DuPont de Nemours & Co.

Manual 108 232E 45-21 O z(x)O Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 1/00
 Table of Contents

Table of Contents
,'\
i
1. Safety 1

Operate Safely '1

Safety Symbols 2

Qualified Personnel .. . . 3

lntended Use . 3

lnstallation and Flectrical Connections 4

Operation 4

Less-obvious Dangers 5

Action in the Event of Unit Malfunction 5

Dangerof Burns .. 6

Maintenance/Repair 7

Cleaning .. 7

Thermoplastic Hot Melt Material 8

Equipment and Material Disposal 8

Polyurethane Reactive ("PUR") Hot Melt Material ..... I

2. Description .... 10
lntended Use .... 10
RTD Temperature Sensing .... 10
Uniform Heating .... 10
ParallelGround Paths for Safe Operation . . .... 11
Features .. .. 11

lnput Voltages for Automatic Gun Hoses ....12

Specifications 12

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 't08232E Manual 45-21

All rlghts reserved
lssued 1/00
ii Table of Contents

3. lnstallation .13
Unpacking .13
Safety Precautions . . . . . .13
ItemsNeeded......... 14

Replacement Procedure 14

Relieving System Pressure 14

Disconnecting the Old Hose . . . 16

Connecting the New Hose 16

Restarting the System 19

4. Jt/aintenance.... 20

Safety Precautions 20

Daily Maintenance 20

PeriodicMaintenance . . .. 21

lnspecting Hose Hydraulic Connections . 21

lnspecting Hose Electrical Connections . 23

5. Troubleshooting . . 24

Safety During Troubleshooting 24

Troubleshooting Procedures 25

6. Parts and Reference Data . . . . 26

Service Equipment 26

Manual 45-21 108232E o 2000 Nordson Corporation

All righls reserved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 1

RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

1. Safety

Operate Safely Safety instructions contained in this section and throughout this
document apply to tasks that may be performed with or on the unit.
Warnings related to specific safety concerns are included within the text
as appropriate. lt is very important that these safety instructions are
always followed. Failure to do so could result in personal injury and/or
damage to the unit or other equipment.

With this in mind, here are some basic safety recommendations:

Read and become familiar with this Safety section prior to installing,
operating, maintaining or repairing the unit.

a Read and follow the warnings which appear within the text and are
related to specific tasks.

Store this document within easy reach of personnel operating or

maintaining the unit.

a Wear personal protective equipment and clothing such as safety

goggles and gloves.

a Familiarize yourself with and follow all safety instructions prescribed

by your company, general accident-prevention regulations, and
government safety regulations.

O 2O0O Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights reseruBd
lssued 1/00
2 Hot Melt Hose

Safety Symbols The following symbols are used to warn against dangers or possible
sources of danger. Become familiar with them! Failure to heed a warning
could lead to personal injury and/or damage to the unit or other
equipment.
WARNING: Failure to observe may result in personal injury or
death.

WARNING: Risk of electricalshock. Failure to observe may

result in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Disconnect equipment from the line voltage.

WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

@ safety goggles and/or heat-protective gloves depending on the

symbolshown.

@
WARNING: Risk of explosion or fire. Fire, open flames, and
smoking prohibited.

A WARNING: System or material pressurized. Release

pressure. Failure to observe may result in serious burns.

CAUTION: Failure to observe may result in equipment

t
a
damage.

CAUTION: Hot surface. Failure to observe may result in

burns.

Manual 45-21 '108 232E o 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights ressrved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 3

Qualified Personnel Operators or maintenance workers are regarded as being "qualified

personnel" when they have gained, through training and experience, an
understanding of the manner in which the unit is to be operated, serviced,
and repaired and are familiar with relevant regulations concerning safe
workplace practices.

lntended Use The unit is designed and intended to be used only for the purpose
described inlhe Descriplion section. Uses not in accordance with that
section or as described in this document are considered unintended uses
and not in accordance with governing regulations.

WARNING: Use of this equipment in ways other than

described in this document may result in personal injury death,
or equipment damage.

The following actions of the owner or operator of the unit are some, but
not all, examples of unintended use which would permit Nordson to claim
it is not responsible for personal injury or property damage arising from
such unintended use:

a Unapproved modifications or changes to the unit

a Failure to comply with the safety instructions

a Failure to comply with instructions concerning installation, use,

operation, maintenance, or repair, or when these tasks are carried out
by unqualified personnel

a Use of inappropriate or incompatible foreign materials or auxiliary

equipment

a Failure to observe workplace safety rules or regulations issued by

government authorities or safety councils

O ADo Nordson Corporation 't08 232E Manual 45-21

All rights resarued
lssued 1/00
4 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

lnstallation and Electrical WARNING: Failure to follow the safety procedures can result in
Connections injury or death.

a Allelectrical, pneumatic, gas, and hydraulic connections and

installations of hot melt equipment may only be carried out by
qualified personnel. Be sure to observe installation instructions for
components and accessories.

a Equipment must be properly grounded and fused according to its

rated current consumption (see lD plate).

a Cables which run outside the unit must regularly be checked for wear
or damage.

a Power supply wire gauge and insulation must be sutficient to handle

rated current consumption.

a Cables must never be squeezed or pinched. Do not locate cables or

hoses in high traffic areas.

Operation The unit should be operated by qualified personnel in accordance with

the instructions presented in this document.
WARNING: Failure to follow the safety procedures can result in
injury or death.

a Never allow the unit to be operated by personnel under the influence

of substances which reduce their reaction times, or who are not able
to operate the equipment for physical reasons.

a Prior to each start-up of the unit, check protection and warning

devices and make sure they are fully functional. Do not operate the
unit if these devices are not functioning properly.

a When the removal of safety equipment is required for installation,

maintenance, or repair of the unit, it must be re-connected
immediately upon completion of the work.

a Prior to start-up of the unit, check to make sure all safety guards and
safety equipment are in place and functioning properly.

Manual 45-21 1 08 232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rightrs reserued
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 5

Operation @ontd)
a ln a humid environment, only equipment featuring a corresponding
class of protection may be operated.

a Do not operate the unit in an explosive environment.

a Keep parts of the body or clothing away from rotating parts. Do not
wear loose articles of clothing when operating or servicing units with
rotating parts. Take off wrist watches, rings, necklaces, or similar
pieces of jewelry and pin up or cover long hair before performing any
work on or with the unit.

a To carry out measurements on work pieces, switch off the unit and
wait until it comes to a standstill.

a Never point hand guns or applicator nozzles at yourself or other

persons.

Less-obvious Dangers
WARNING: An operator or service technician working with the
unit should be aware of less-obvious dangers that often cannot
be completely minimized at production sites:

Exposed surfaces of the unit which cannot be practically

safeguarded. They may be hot and take time to cool after the unit
has been operating.

a The possibility that electrical potentials may remain in the unit after
the unit was de-energized

a Hot melt rnaterialand vapors

a Hydraulically or pneumatically operated parts of the unit

a Parts winding something up or down which are not covered

Action in the Event of Unit Malfunction

lf the unit malfunctions, switch it off immediately.

o Turn the circuit breaker or main power switch OFF.

o Have the unit repaired by qualified personnel only.

O 2O0O Nordson Corporalion 108 232E Manual 45-21

All rights resorued
lssued 1/00
6 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

Danger of Burns
Contact with hot melt materials or hot areas of the unit may produce a
severe skin burn.
WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

@ saf ety go g g les, and/or heat-p rotective g loves.

@
@
a Be extremely carefulwhen using hot melt material. Even solidified
material may still be very hot.

a Always wear protective clothing which safely covers all exposed parts
of the body.

ln case of burns:

o lmmediately cool affected skin areas using cold, clean water.

o Do not forcefully remove hot melt materialfrom the skin.

o lmmediately seek medical attention.

Manual 45-21 1 08 232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserued
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 7

MaintenancelRepair Allow only qualified personnel to perform the procedures described in this
document. When performing such tasks, wear protective clothing and
equipment.
WARNTNG: Even when the circuit breaker or main power
switch is OFF, the unit is still electrically energized. Complete
the following steps prior to maintenance or repair:

a Disconnect, lock out, and tag external power supply.

a To ensure the external power supply is disconnected, attempt to

operate the unit. lf the unit does not energize, proceed with
maintenance or repair work.

a lf the unit energizes, repeat the disconnect, lock out, and tag
procedure. Re-test the unit.

a Follow the specific instructions provided in this manual to release the

system pressure in the entire unit.

a Secure pneumatically- or hydraulically-operated equipment against

uncontrolled movement.

a Only use parts which do not compromise the safety of the unit. Only
use genuine Nordson parts.

Always use tools with insulated handles when removing or installing

components.

Cleaning NOTE: Always refer to the material manufacturer's Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) or material information sheet before working with any hot
melt material.
WARNING: Never clean any aluminum part or flush any
system using halogenated hydrocarbon fluids. Examples of
common halogenated hyd rocarbons are: dichloromethylene,
1,1,1 -trichloroethylene, and perchloroethylene. Halogenated
hydrocarbons may react violently with aluminum parts.

WARNING: Fire, open flame, and smoking are prohibited when

cleaning fluids are used. Observe all explosion prevention
regulations. Cleaning fluids may only be heated using
temperature-controlled and explosion-protected heaters.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights reserved
lssued 1/00
8 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

Cleaning @ontd) a Never use an open flame to clean the unit or components of the unit.

a Use only cleaning fluids designed or intended to be used with the hot
melt material being used in the unit. Never use paint fluids under any
circumstances.

a Note the flash point of the cleaning fluid used. Only use a controlled
heating method to heat fluids.

a Ensure sufficient room ventilation to draw off generated vapors.

Avoid prolonged breathing of vapors.

Thermoplastic Hot Melt NOTE: Always refer to the material manufacturer's Material Safety Data
Material Sheet (MSDS) or material information sheet before working with any hot
melt material.

a Ensure the work area is adequately ventilated

a Do not exceed recommended processing temperatures. Doing so

creates a danger to personnel due to decomposition of the material.

Equipment and Material Dispose of equipment and materials used in operation and cleaning
Disposal according to local regulations.

Polyurethane Reactive
('PUR") Hot Melt Material
NOTE: Always refer to the material manufacturer's Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) or material information sheet before working with any hot
melt material.
WARNING: Exercise extreme caution and always provide
adequate ventilation when using reactive materials.

WARNING: Only use PUR material in units that are designed

to process such material. Using PUR material in units that
cannot process them can cause damage to the unit and
premature reaction of the hot melt material.

WARNING: PUR material contains isocyanate ingredients

which will irritate skin, mucous membranes of eyes and
respiratory passages.

WARNING: Persons with existing asthmatic conditions may

experience diff iculty in breathing.

Manual 45-21 108232E O 20fi) Nordson Corporation

All righls reservsd
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 9

Polyurethane Reactive Because isocyanate ingredients are found in various concentrations in

("PUR") Hot Melt Material reactive materials produced by different manufacturers, it is imperative
(contd)
that the material manufacture/s MSDS or material information sheet be
consulted BEFORE using reactive material. Pay particular attention to the
discussion of material toxicity, health effects, and reactivity condition.

There are certain universal safety guidelines that should be followed

when using any reactive material:

a Recommended processing temperatures must not be exceeded

a When handling and using reactive material, always wear thermally

protective gloves and long-sleeved clothing.

a Wear chemical goggles to reduce the potential of eye contact.

a Have eye washes available and provide a cold water source for burn
treatment.

a The regular use of barrier cream for hands and face is recommended
for skin protection.

a Do not eat, drink, smoke, or store food in working areas where PUR
material is being processed.

a Wash hands thoroughly after working with reactive material

Remove hot melt materialvapors using suitable extraction ventilation

equipment.

a Use appropriate respiratory equipment where there is the danger of

inhaling isocyanate vapors or other ingredients contained in the PUR
material in concentrations exceeding permissible limit values.

ln case of very high concentrations of harmful substances, or if you

are unsure of the environmental conditions, respiratory protective
equipment (operating independent of the surrounding air) must be
used.

Do not operate the unit with PUR materials if you are unsure that ALL
adequate safety measures have been taken.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights ressrved
lssued'l/00
10 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

2. Description Nordson RTD-style hoses provide superior temperature control, reliability,

and improved safety. Thermalaccuracy is improved through the use of
area-sensing rather than point-sensing devices. Area sensing provides a
truer indication of hose temperature by measuring temperature over a
larger area. Unlike point sensing, which can produce a false reading
when affected by hot or cold spots, area sensing averages temperatures
to provide a reliable reading over a wide range of operating conditions.

lntended Use Nordson RTD- (resistance temperature detector)style automatic gun and
handgun hoses may be used only to transport hot melt adhesives and
other thermoplastic materials to an appropriate dispensing point.

RT D Tem pe ratu re Sen s i n g
RTD-style hoses are precision wound and calibrated prior to assembly,
ensuring that resistance and controlvalues match and eliminating the
need for temperature control calibration. The RTD precision combined
with proportional temperature controls eliminate under- and
over-temperature conditions. These features offer more consistent
application rates and improved pattern control in high-volume production
situations.

Uniform Heating A low watt-density heating element reduces hot spot potential. The
element is spirally wound around the core for increased flexibility. Closely
spaced wraps ensure efficient and uniform heat transfer to the hot melt
material for fast startup and consistent flow rates. Three layers of
high-temperature felt insulation increase thermal efficiency, decrease
heat loss, and reduce operating costs.

Manual 45-21 108232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights resswed
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 11

Parallel Ground Paths for Safe Two separate ground paths protect personnelfrom injury and equipment
Operation from damage. A dedicated low-resistance ground reduces the possibility
of high impedance faults and ensures that protective devices operate
properly.

ln addition to the automatic gun and handgun hoses, Nordson offers

RTD-style water wash hoses with lP-67 rated plugs and sealed cuffs at
the gun end. High flex hoses are available for automatic guns used on
robotic/articulated applications. High flex water wash hoses are also
available.

CAUTION: High flex Nordson automatic hoses must be used in

I
o
all robotic/articulated applications to avoid premature hose
failure. High flex automatic hoses are constructed to withstand
the flexing that occurs in moving applications. Standard
Nordson automatic hoses are not designed for these
applications and are not warranted if used in robotic/articulated
applications.

Available accessories include brackets, in-line filters, fittings, hose

protectors, suspension support, corrugated and braided covers, plug
repair kits, and a hose/gun diagnostic device. Refer to Parts and
Reference Data, Section 6,for information.

Features o Rugged, quick-disconnect plugs for unit and gun end.

. Automatic hoses feature an abrasion-resistant braided cover and
maximum flexibility for easier installation even in confined spaces.
. Handgun hoses incorporate an optional corrugated outer covering
that resists kinking to increase durability and extend service life.
o Area sensing RTD is accurate to within one degree of setpoint.
o Molded high-impact cuffs increase durability.
o High-temperature insulation reduces heat loss.
o HeaW gauge wire increases durability.
o Parallel low-resistance ground paths for safe operation.
o Aircraft quality fittings.
o Stainless steel braided reinforcement.
. Hightemperature Teflon core.

@ ADo Nodson Corporation 108 232E Manual 45-21

All rights ressrved
lssued 1/00
12 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

lnput Voltages for Automatic The type of Nordson hose and its input voltage can be determined by the
Gun Hoses color of the tracer stripe(s) in the hose sheathing. Refer to Thble 1 .

Table 1 Determining Gun Hose Type and lnput Voltages

Tracer Stripe(s) Hose Type and lnput Voltage

None (hose is solid black) Standard,230 VAC
Red Standard, Low-voltage, 200 VAC
Blue Standard, High Flex, 230 VAC
Red and Blue Low-voltage, High Flex,200 VAC
Three red H-Series handgun connectors,
High Flex, 115 VAC

Specifications

Table 2 Specifications

Hose Characteristic Specification

Operating temperature
Operating pressure, maximum
Maximum burst strength
lnput voltages
105 to 230"C (22Oto 450'F)
10.34 MPa (1500 psi)
44.8 MPa (6500 psi) at 230'C
(450'F) - 5/16 in. l.D.
Refer to Table 1

Electrical service Provided by hot melt applicator.

Standard: 230 VAC
Low voltage: 200 VAC
H-series handguns: 115 VAC
Available lengths, automatic 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 16, and 24 11(r.)
gun hoses (0.6, 1 .2,',|.8, 2.4, 3.O, 3.6, 5.0, and
7.4 m)
Available lengths, handgun 8,10,16, and24fi
hoses with corruoated (2.4,3.0,5.0, and 7.4 ml
cover (2)
Available lengths, handgun 8, 12, and 16 ft
hoses with braided cover (2.4, 3.6, and 5.0 m)
(1) 24ft (7.3 m) automatic gun hose not available in water wash or
200 VAC types.
(2) Corrugated cover provides additional abrasion protection with a
semi-rigid molded cover. 10 and 24 ft (3.0 and7.4 m) corrugated
handgun hoses are available only in 230 VAC.

Manual 45-21 108232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights ressrved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-SU\e Hot Melt Hose 13

3. lnstallation WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform

maintenance, repair, and troubleshooting tasks. Performing
activities not described in this manual may result in personal
injury death, or equipment damage.

NOTE: To install a new hose on a new applicator (in which no hot melt
material has been melted), refer to the installation instructions in the
applicator technical manual.

NOTE: A hose connector ships with each hose. lt is needed when

installing a new hose on a new applicator, or when replacing a damaged
connector.

This section provides unpacking, safety, and installation information

necessary for replacing the Nordson RTD-style hoses.

A hose installation card is shipped with every hose. A copy of the card is
included in this section (Figures 2 and 3). Contact your Nordson
representative to order extra copies. Refer lo Parts and Reference Data,
Section 6for the part number.

Unpacking CAUTION: Make sure to unpack and unrollthe hose as shown r

T in the illustrations on the carton to avoid kinking the hose's TFE

a
core. lf the core is kinked, it will not return to shape, and the
hose will fail prematurely.

Safety Precautions WARNING: Failure to review the safety information in Safety,

Section 7, can result in equipment damage, personal injury or
death. Before performing any maintenance on any hose,
thoroughly review the safety section. Also, follow the specific
safety precautions contained in this section.

WARNING: To ensure safe hose and gun operation, do not use

non-conductive pipe compound or tape on hose and gun
hydraulic connections. Also, make sure that the hose and gun
are connected hydraulically before you connect the hose
electrically to the applicator.

WARNING: Burns can occur from hot melt material that

remains in the manifold connector or hose after draining. Make
sure not to place bare hands underneath the connector or the
hose fitting.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 108 232E Manual 45-2'l

All rights reserued
lssued 'll00
14 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

Items Needed . Applicator and associated equipment technical manuals

e Two wrenches; refer to Table 3 for the required wrench sizes
. Safety goggles
. Safety gloves
o Heat-protectiveclothing
o Drain pan

Table 3 Wrench Sizes Needed for Tightening Hose Fittings

Connector Hose Fitting

Hose !.D. Size Wrench Size Wrench Size
s/15 in 5/s in 11/16 in.
s/6 in 11lain. 11lain.

Replacement Procedure

Relieving System Pressure

WARNING: Hot. Risk of burns. Hot applicator parts, splashed

hot melt adhesive material, and hot gun surfaces can cause
severe burns. Wear heat-protective clothing, safety goggles,
and safety gloves while replacing hoses.

1. Heat the system to operating temperature

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve pressure.

Failure to observe may result in serious burns.

2. Follow the procedures described in your applicator technical manual

to relieve system pressure. ln general, relieving system pressure
requires that you perform all of the following actions that are
appropriate for your unit:
. Systems with a piston pump:
Reduce pump air pressure to zero and disconnect the supply
(incoming) air line.
Place the air pump ON/OFF switch in the OFF position.
. Systems with a gear pump:
Turn the motor speed dial to 0%.
Place the motor ON/OFF (or START/STOP) switch in the OFF (or
STOP)position.

Manual 45-21 108232E @ 2000 Nordson CoIporation

All rights ressrved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 15

WARNING: Air trapped in the hoses and guns can spit molten
adhesive that can cause severe burns. Shield the area and the
operator before triggering the guns.

3. Trigger all guns to relieve any trapped hydraulic pressure.

4. Disconnect the solenoids and/or the photoeyes to prevent accidental

triggering of the guns.

5. Reduce air pressure to the guns:

. Systems with automatic guns:
Reduce gun air pressure to zero at the regulator.

WARNING: Place handgun trigger locks in the locked position

and ALWAYS hang the handgun by the hole in its handle.
Failure to do so can result in accidental gun firing that can
cause severe burns.

a Systems with handguns:

Place the gun trigger safety in the locked position
Hang the handgun by the hole in its handle.

6. Place a pan under the drain valve and drain the unit manifold by
following the procedure described in the applicator technical manual.

7. Disconnect the hose from the manifold.

CAUTION: Equipment damage can occur if the applicator drain

I
o
valve is turned with anything other than a screwdriver. Use only
a screwdriver to turn the drain valve.

8. Use a screwdriver to open the drain valve.

9. Allow the manifold to drain as completely as possible.

10. Use a screwdriver to close the drain valve.

o 2000 Nodson Corporation 108 232E Manual 45-21

All rights ressrved
lssued 1/00
16 Hot Melt Hose

Disconnecting the Old Hose

WARNING: Even when switched off, Nordson applicators and

hoses contain electrical potentials that can cause death.
Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the qpplicator when
instructed to do so.

1 . Disconnect and lock out power to the main circuit breaker for the
applicator input power line.

2. Move the applicator circuit breaker to the OFF position.

3. Unplug the hose electrical connections from the applicator and the
gun.

4. Use two wrenches to remove the hose swivel fittings. See Figure 1
Place one wrench on the applicator manifold or gun fitting and the
other wrench on the hose fitting.

5. Properly dispose of the old hose and drained adhesive.

5920023

Fig. 1 Proper Hose Fitting Removal

or Replacement

Connecting the New Hose

1. Make sure the new hose is routed without bundling, pinch points, and
contact with sharp or abrasive surfaces. See Figure 2.

2. Use the two wrenches to connect the new hose swivel fittings to the
applicator manifold and the gun fitting. Do not overtighten. See
Figure 1.
)

WARNING: Use the wiring information included in this manual

only for the installation of appropriate hoses listed in Section 6.
Use of this information for the installation of other hoses may
result in personal injury, death, or equipment damage.

3. Plug the hose electrical connections into the applicator and the gun
Refer to the wiring information in Parts and Reference Data,
Section 6.

4. Move the applicator circuit breaker to the ON position

Manual 45-21 108232E O zU)O Nordson Corporatlon

All rights ressrved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 17

P/N 111 940

X=0.50|NCH (13 mm) I

I

R=8.00|N. (203 mm)

PIN 271 486

P|N274174
- 5/16 lN.
- 5/8 tN.

5920010 ,l

Fig. 2 Hose lnstallation Card (1 of 2)

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rhhls reserved
lssued 1/00
{1.
18 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

sH
E

I \
\ (,E

2300

P/N 276 318 P/N 133 644

O_RING
P/N 945 032 NPT

-@ P/N
972 628
P/N
972646
-ffi#
P/N
972647
@ P/N
ffi-d
972051 972200
P/N P/N
972 618

O-RING
P/N 945 032 NPT

%-ew
P/N
274 179
P/N
274 180
@P/N
972 657
tu- tu- @-
PiN
972 618
:

972200
P/N P/N
972051

P/N
50M ESH 274 989
P/N
274287
P/N
274290
@tu P/N
soMESH 804123
J=

P/N
273 41s
@ P/N
271 658
100 M ESH 274 990 274288 274291 100MESH 274988 273 414 271 659
200 M ESH 274 991 274289 274292 200 MESH 804 12s 273 413 271 595
5920024

Fig. 3 Hose lnstallation Card (2 ol2)

Manual 45-21 1 08 232E O 2firo Nordson Corporation

All rights resarved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 19

Connecting the New Hose (contd)

5. Check for low pressure leaks.

6. Restore electrical power to the applicator.

7. Let the unit and hose reach operating temperature.

8. While slowly restoring air pressure to the applicator and guns, check
for leakage. Retighten the fittings as necessary. lf no leaks occur, go
lo Restarting the System.

NOTE: Severe leaking between the hose fitting and either the gun
fitting or the unit manifold can indicate that the O-ring(s) are missing
or damaged.

9. lf leaking occurs between the hose fitting and either the gun fitting or
the unit manifold, refer to the applicator technical manual to
determine the proper fitting and/or O-ring. Then do the following:

a. Repeat steps 1 through 4in Disconnecting the Old Hose.

b. Replace the fitting and/or O-ring as required.

c. Repeat steps 2 through 9in Connecting the New Hose.

Restarting the System

1 . Follow the start-up procedures in the applicator technical manual.

2. Resume normaloperation.

@ 2q)0 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights resBrv6d
lssued 1/00
20 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

4. Maintenance Preventive maintenance procedures for Nordson hoses consist of

periodic inspections, cleaning, and material changeover. Only the unit
end and gun end electrical plugs are field serviceable. The kits are listed
in Section 6. Attempting any other repair procedure can result in damage
to the hose, improper system operation, or pbrsonal injury.

Safety Precautions WARNING: Before performing any maintenance on any hose,

thoroughly review safety information in Safety, Section 1
Failure to review the safety section, can result in equipment
damage, personal injury or death. Also, follow the specific
safety precautions contained in this section.

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform

maintenance, repair, and troubleshooting tasks. Performing
activities not described in this manual may result in personal
injury death, or equipment damage.

WARNING: To ensure safe hose and gun operation, do not use

non-conductive pipe compound or tape on hose and gun
hydraulic connections. Also, make sure that the hose and gun
are connected hydraulically before you connect the hose
electrically to the applicator.

Daily Maintenance NOTE: Keep hot melt adhesive material off the braid of the hose. Built
up material can cause kinking when the hose is moved from one position
to another.

WARNING: Hot. Risk of burns. Hot applicator parts, splashed

hot melt adhesive material, and hot gun surfaces can cause
severe burns. Wear heat-protective clothing, safety goggles,
and safety gloves while replacing hoses.

1. With safety gloves on, wipe off any hot melt material on the hose
fittings or the hose braid.

WARNING: Clean dust and debris from the hose cover daily.
Accumulated dust can create hot spots in a hose and become a
fire hazard.

2. Clean any dust and debris from the hose cover.

Manual 45-21 108 232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporallon

All rights reserved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 21

Periodic Maintenance Perform periodic maintenance as often as required by the operating

conditions and the environment.

The entire hot melt application system, including the hoses, must be
flushed periodically. Flushing removes excess dirt and charred material.
Also, clean the system if the adhesive in the system is changed, and the
old and new adhesives are incompatible.

The system cfeaning procedure is presented in Maintenance Section, ot

the applicator technical manual.

lnspecting Hose Hydraulic WARNING: Hot. Risk of burns. Hot applicator parts, splashed
Connections hot melt adhesive material, and hot gun surfaces can cause
severe burns. Wear heat-protective clothing, safety goggles,
and safety gloves while replacing hoses.

1. Heat the system to operating temperature

WARNING: System or material pressurized. Relieve pressure.

Failure to observe may result in serious burns.

2. Follow the procedures described in your applicator manual to relieve

system pressure. ln general, relieving system pressure requires that
you perform all of the following actions that are appropriate for your
unit:
o Systems with a piston pump:
Reduce pump air pressure to zero and disconnect the supply
(incoming) air line.
Place the air pump ON/OFF switch in the OFF position.

Systems with a gear pump:

Turn the motor speed dialto 0%.
Place the motor ON/OFF (or START/STOP) switch in the OFF (or
STOP)position.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights reserved
lssued 1/00
22 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

lnspecting Hose Hydraulic WARNING: Air trapped in the hoses and guns can spit out
Connections (contd) molten adhesive that can cause severe burns. Shield the area
and the operator before triggering the guns to relieve hydraulic
pressure.

3. Trigger all guns to relieve any trapped hydraulic pressure.

4. Disconnect the solenoids and/or photoeyes to prevent accidental

triggering of the guns.

5. Reduce air pressure to the guns:

. Systems with automatic guns:
Reduce gun air pressure to zero at the regulator.

WARNING: Place handgun trigger locks in the locked position

and ALWAYS hang the handgun by the hole in its handle.
Failure to do so can result in accidental gun firing that can
cause severe burns.

o Systems with handguns:

Place the gun trigger safety in the locked position.
Hang the handgun by the hole in its handle.

WARNING: Even when switched off, Nordson applicators and

hoses contain electrical potentials that can cause death.
Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the applicator when
instructed to do so.

t 6. See Figure 4. Disconnect and lock out power to the main circuit
breaker for the applicator input power line.

7. lnspect the hose to applicator and hose to gun fittings for tightness.

NOTE: Always use two wrenches to tighten any hose fittings. Refer
4110132
to Table 4 for the required wrench sizes.

Fig. 4 Disconnecting and Locking

Out Main Power

Manual 45-21 108232E O 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights resgrved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 23

Table 4 Wrench Sizes Needed for Tightening Hose Fittings

Gonnector Hose Fatung

Hose l.D. Size Wrench Size Wrench Size
5/16 in. s/s in 11/16 in

s/s in. 11lain 11/ain

8. See Figure 5. Tighten any loose connections using two wrenches.

Place one wrench on the applicator manifold or gun fitting and the
other wrench on the hose fitting.
5920023

Fig. 5 Proper Hose Fitting Removal

or Replacement

lnspecting Hose Electrical WARNING: Even when switched off, Nordson applicators and
Connections hoses contain electrical potentials that can cause death.
Disconnect and lock out line voltage to the applicator when
instructed to do so.

1. Disconnect and lock out power to the main circuit breaker for the
applicator input power line. See Figure 4.

2. Check that all hose electrical plug pins are in good condition. Repair
any damaged pins. Refer to Parts and Reference Data, Section 6, tor
the required hose end repair kit.

WARNING: Vibration, and system heating and cooling cycles

can loosen connections and cause equipment damage or
electric shock.

3. Check that all hose electrical plug connections are tight. Tighten any
loose plugs.

O 2U)0 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights reserued
lssued 1/00
24 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

ln this section, you willfind fault isolation and correction procedures.

5. Troubleshooting
Obvious causes of malfunction, such as broken or missing electrical pins
or wires, damaged hose plugs, etc. should be noted during daily visual
inspection and corrected immediately.

Heater data and hose schematics, which may be needed during

troubleshooting, are located in Parts and Reference Data, Section 6.

Safety During WARNING: Failure to review the safety information in Safety,

Troubleshooting Section 1, can result in equipment damage, personal injury or
death. Before performing any maintenance on any hose,
thoroughly review the safety section. Also, follow the specific
safety precautions contained in this section.

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform

maintenance, repair, and troubleshooting tasks. Performing
activities not described in this manual may result in personal
injury death, or equipment damage.

WARNING: Even when switched off, Nordson applicators and

hoses contain electrical potentials that can cause death. Before
disconnecting or connecting any electrical plugs, disconnect
and lock out line voltage to the applicator.

WARNING: Due to the dangerous electrical potentials of the

applicators and hoses, allvoltage and resistance
measurements should only be made using the Nordson
Hose/Gun Diagnostic Device.

Manual 45-21 1 08 232E @ 2fi)0 Nordson Corporation

All rights rsserved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 25

Trou blesh ooti n g P roced u res

Table 5 Hose Troubleshooting Checklist

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action Refer to

Hose Fails to Heat Power turned off Check that unit power is on Troubleshooting
or Underheats section, ot
Hose or applicator plug(s) Make sure all electrical plugs are applicator
disconnected connected. manual

Power not available to hose Consult the applicator technical

from applicator manual.

Broken or missing pins or Repair using only Nordson hose

damaged hose plug repair kits. Refer to Parts and
Reference Data, Section 6 for part
numbers.

WARNING: Any attempted

repair other than to the hose
ends using the Nordson
repair kits may result in damage to
the hose, improper system operation,
or personal injury. Do not try to
service or repair the hoses in any
other way.

NOTE: The Nordson Hose/Gun Diagnostic Device enables precise and

complete troubleshooting for the hot melt hoses. Also, hose
troubleshooting can be accomplished quickly without removing the hoses
from the applicator or guns. Refer to Parts and Reference Data,
Section 6 or mntact your Nordson representative for further information.

O 20(N) Nordson Corporation 1 08 232E Manual 45-21

All rights reserved
lssued 'll00
26 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

To order parts, call the Nordson Customer Service Center or your local
6. Parts and Reference Data Nordson representative.

This section contains the service parts list. lt also contains:

o heater electrical data for Nordson RTD-style hoses
(Tables 12 and 13),
o heater electrical data for Nordson RTD-style guns (Table 15),
. the RTD-style automatic hose schematics (Figures 6 and 7),
. the RTD-style handgun hose schematics (Figures 8 and 9), and
. the H series RTD-style handgun hose schematics
(Figures 10 and 11).

WARNING: Use the wiring information included in this manual

only for the installation of appropriate hoses listed in this
section. Use of this information for the installation of other
hoses may result in personal injury, death, or equipment
damage.

Service Equipment A complete list of the hot melt hoses and associated equipment part
numbers are provided in the Nordson Adhesives and Sealants
Equipment Catalog. Conlact your Nordson representative if you do not
have a copy of the catalog.

Table 6 lists the service equipment for the hoses. Other than hose end
repairs using the Nordson repair kits, and diagnostic tests using the
Nordson Hose/Gun Diagnostic Device, no other repairs or testing should
be done.

Manual 45-21 '108 232E @ 20(x) Nordson Corporation

All ,ights resErved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-SU\e Hot Melt Hose 27

Table 6 RTD-style Hot Melt Hose Service Equipment

Part Description Note

1 08 021 Hose installation card
132426 Hose/gun diagnostic device (includes one test cord)
Permits access to the hose/gun power and sensor while installed on the line. Use a
standard meter to check power and resistance of key components.
139 672 Unit end hose plug repair kit
(Contains: five plug housings, five pin receptacles, five O-rings, five strain relief
connectors, one crimping tool, 10 self-tapping screws, two socket/pin removaltools,
125 pins, and 45 jumper wires)
1 39 675 Gun end hose plug repair kit
(Contains: five hose cuffs with plugs, five hose cutf cover collars, five hose cuff collars,
10 screws, five O-rings, one crimping tool, two sockeUpin removal tools, and
1 25 sockets)

1 63 265 Connector, pin holder, 10 Pack

945 032 O-ring

Table 7 Mounting Accessories for s/16 in. Hoses

Part Description Note

108232 RTD-style hot melt hose replacement manual.
111 940 Service kit, molded corrugated tube and clips for routing and fastening hoses.
132 998 5.2 m (17 ft) corrugate hose cover.
271 486 Spiral wire support for properly suspending hoses. (For 5/s in. and 1 1/s in. hoses, use
PIN 274174.)
273 314 Hose protector, spiral wrap chafe guard to prevent point contact wear.
276862 Sheet metal unit end hose connection protector (2000, 2300 units only).

Table 8 Bracket Kits for Handgun lnstallations

Part Description Note

133 644 3000 Series applicators, tank end
276318 2300 Series applicators, unit end

O 2000 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights r€ssrved
lssued 1/00
28 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

Seruice Equipment Gontd)

Table 9 Applicator-End Hose Fittings

Part Description Note

972051 Straight connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)
972200 90o elbow connector, pipe{hread fitting (NPT)

972618 45' elbow connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)

972628 Straight connector, O-ring fitting

972646 90o elbow connector, O-ring fitting

972647 45' elbow connector, O-ring fitting

Table 10 Gun-End Hose Fittings

Part Description Note

274 179 45o elbow connector, O-ring fitting
274 180 90' elbow connector, O-ring fitting
972051 Straight connector, pipethread fitting (NPT)
972200 90' elbow connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)

972618 45" elbow connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)

972657 Strai ght connector, O-ring f itting

Manual 45-21 108232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights ressrved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 29

Table 11 ln-Line Filters

Part Description Note

271 595 200 mesh, straight connector, pipethread fitting (NPT)
271 658 50 mesh, straight connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)
271 659 100 mesh, straight connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)
273 413 200 mesh, 90' elbow connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)
273 414 100 mesh, 90' elbow connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)
273 415 50 mesh, 90" elbow connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)
274988 100 mesh, 45" elbow connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)
804123 50 mesh, 45o elbow connector, pipe-thread fitting (NPT)
804 125 200 mesh, 45' elbow connector, pipethread fitting (NPT)
274287 50 mesh, 90' elbow connector, O-ring fitting
274288 100 mesh, 90o elbow connector, O-ring fitting
274289 200 mesh, 90o elbow connector, O-ring fitting
274290 50 mesh, straight connector, O-ring fitting
274291 100 mesh, straight connector, O-ring fitting
274292 200 mesh, straight connector, O-ring fitting
274989 50 mesh, 45o elbow connector, O-ring fitting
274990 100 mesh, 45o elbow connector, O-ring fitting
274991 200 mesh,45' elbow connector, O-ring fitting

o 2000 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights reseNed
lssued 1/00
30 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

Service Equipment @ontd)

Table 12 Heater Electrical Data for RTD-Style Automatic Gun Hoses

Part Description Voltage Resistance(A)
1 00 832 24tl (7.4 m)Automatic gun, high flex construction 230 VAC 74-82
1 04 008 16 tt (5.0 m)Automatic gun, high flex construction 230 VAC 98-1 09
107 286 6 ft (1.8 m)Automatic gun, high flex construction 230 VAC 320-353
io7 2BZ 8ll (2.4 m) Automatic gun, high flex construction 230 VAC 228-252
107 288 4 ft (1.2 m) Automatic gun, high flex construction 230 VAC 490-542
107 289 10 ft (3.0 m) Automatic gun, high flex construction 230 VAC 1 59-1 76
107 310 12 ft (3.6 m)Automatic gun, high flex construction 230 VAC 132-146
143 300 12 ft (3.6 m) Automatic gun, water wash 230 VAC 99-11 0
155 183 4 ft (1 .2 m) Automatic gun, water wash, high flex construction 2s0 vAc 490-542
155 184 6 ft (1.8 m) Automatic gun, water wash, high flex construction 230 VAC 320-353
155 185 8 ft (2.4 m) Automatic gun, water wash, high flex construction 230 VAC 228-252
155 186 10 ft (3.0 m) Automatic gun, water wash, high flex construction 230 VAC 1 59-1 76
155 187 12 ft (3.6 m) Automatic gun, water wash, high flex construction 230 VAC 132-146
155 188 16 ft (5.0 m) Automatic gun, water wash, high flex construction 230 VAC 98-1 09
155 189 24 ft (7.4 m) Automatic gun, water wash, high flex construction 230 VAC 74-82
274790 2 ft (0.6 m)Automatic gun 230 VAC 1063-1175
274791 4 tl (1 .2 m) Automatic gun 230 VAC 490-542
274792 6 ft (1.8 m)Automatic gun 230 VAC 320-353
274793 8tl (2.4 m) Automatic gun 230 VAC 228-252
274794 10 ft (3.0 m)Automatic gun 230 VAC 159-176
274795 12 ft (3.6 m) Automatic gun 230 VAC 132-146
274796 16 ft (5.0 m) Automatic gun 230 VAC 98-1 09
274797 24 fi (7 .4 m) Automatic gun 230 VAC 7+82
276 150 2 ft (0.6 m) Automatic gun 2OO VAC 804.-888
276 151 4ft (1.2 m)Automatic gun 200 vAc 371-410
276 152 6 ft (1.8 m) Automatic gun 200 vAc 232-257
276 153 8tl (2.4 m) Automatic gun 200 vAc 151-167
276 154 10 ft (3.0 m) Automatic gun 200 vAc 120-133
276 155 12 ft (3.6 m)Automatic gun 200 vAc 1 00-11 0
276 156 16 ft (5.0 m) Automaiic gun 200 vAc 7+82
276739 2 ft (0.6 m) Automatic gun, water wash 230 VAC 1063-1175
276740 4fi (1.2 m) Automatic gun, water wash 230 VAC 490-542
276741 6 ft (1.8 m) Automatic gun, water wash 230 VAC 320-353
276742 8tl (2.4 m) Automatic gun, water wash 230 VAC 228-252
276743 10 ft (3.0 m) Automatic gun, waterwash 230 VAC 159-176
276744 16 ft (5.0 m) Automatic gun, water wash 230 VAC 98-1 09
276745 24 tl (7 .4 m) Automatic gun, water wash 230 VAC 7+82
NOTE A: ln ohms al24 "C (75 "F)

Manual 45-21 108232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 31

631

5 4

Fig. 6 Typical RTD-Style Automatic

Gun Hose, Gun-End (for
reference only)
1. Gun Heater
2. Gun Heater
3. Gun Sensor
4. Not Used
5. Gun/Hose Sensor
aqnlnnT 6. Ground (Eartnl *

12 63 4

5
I Fig. 7 Typical RTD-Style Automatic
Gun Hose, Unit-End
(for reference only)
I 1 7 11 2
1. Gun Heater

I 2. Gun Heater
3. Gun Sensor
4. Hose Heater
5. Gutt/Hose Sensor
6. Hose Heater
7. Ground (Eanfl *
8. Hose Sensor
9. Connected to 5
10. Not Used
o 11. Connected to I
12. Connected to 3
4s0loos

@ Ano Nordson Corporalion 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights reserued
lssued 1/00
32 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

Service Equipment @ontd)

Table 13 Heater Electrical Data for RTD-Style Handgun Hoses

Part Description Voltage Resistance(A)

101 354 24tl(7.4 m) Handgun, corrugated cover 230 VAC 74-82
115 833 10 ft (3.0 m) Handgun, corrugated cover 230 VAC 1 59-1 76
1 30 785 12 ft (3.6 m) Handgun, corrugated cover 230 VAC 1 59-1 75
132 4s4 16 ft (5.0 m) Handgun, braided cover 230 VAC 98-'108
133 913 8ft(2.4 m) Handgun, braided cover 230 VAC 228-252
138 927 10 ft (3.0 m) Handgun, braided cover 230 VAC 160-177
163 140 12 ft (3.6 m) Handgun, braided cover 230 VAC 1 31-145
274798 I ft (2.4 m) Handgun, corrugated cover 230 VAC 228-252
274799 16 ft (5.0 m) Handgun, corrugated cover 230 VAC 98-1 09
276 533 8ft(2.4 m) Handgun, corrugated cover 2OO VAC 151-167
276 534 16 ft (5.0 m) Handgun, corrugated cover 200 vAc 7+82
NOTE A: ln ohms at24"C (75'F)

Manual 45-21 108 232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights resorved
lssued 1/00
a
RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 33

Service Equipment @ontd)

5
Fig. 8 TypicalRTD-Style Handgun
Hose, Gun-End
(for reference only)
1. Gun Heater
2. Gun Heater
3. Gun Sensor
4. Ground (Eaftil*
5. Gun/Hose Sensor
d50200't

1
263 4

5 I
Fig. 9 TypicalRTD-Style Handgun
12 Hose, Unit-End (for reference
11 only)
7
10
1. Gun Heater
2. Gun Heater
3. Gun Sensor
4. Hose Heater
5. GurdHose Sensor
6. Hose Heater
7. Ground (Eartil *
8. Hose Sensor
9. Connected to 5
10. Not Used
11. Connected to I
45020r)2 12. Connected to 3

o a)oo Nordson Corporation 1 08 232E Manual 45-21

All rights reserved
lssued 1/00
34 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

Seruice Equipment @ontd)

Table 14 Hose Electrical Data for H-Series RTD-Style Handgun Hoses

Part Description Voltage Resistance(A)

330 980 8ft(2.4 m) AD41-H,5/ro in., high flex construction 115 VAC 51-57
725 816 12 ft (3.6 m) AD41H, 5/re in., high flex construction '115 VAC 34-38
330 982 16 ft (5.0 m)AD41-H,5/ro in., high flex construction 115 VAC 26-29
NOTE A: lnohms at24"C (75'F)

108232E @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

Manual 45-21 All rights reserved
lssued 1/00
 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose 35

2
1
3
5
4
b
I
7

8
Fig. 10 H Series 115VAC Handgun
Hose, Gun-End (for reference
only)

1. Ground (Eanfl !
2. Gun sensor
3. Gun sensor
4. Not used
5. Switch
6. Switch
7. Gun heater
8. Not used
9. Gun heater
4502005A

5
Z1 4 Fig. 11 H Seies, ll5VAC Handgun
6 3 Hose, Unit-End
I I (for reference only)

10 7 1. Ground (Earth) !
14 11 2. Hose/Gun heater
3. Gun heater
2
1 4. Switch
16 15
5. Switch
6. Hose heater
7. Not used

# 8. Hose sensor
9. Not used
10. Gun sensor
11. Hose/Gun sensor
12. Not Used
13. Not Used
14. Not Used
15. Not Used
16. Not Used

4502006A

@ 2fl)0 Nordson Corporation 108232E Manual 45-21

All rights reservBd
lssued 1/00
36 RTD-Style Hot Melt Hose

Service Equipment @ontd)

Table'15 Heater Electrical Data for Nordson RTD-Style Guns

Heater Voltage
Part Description Part No. (vAc) Resistance(A) Note
274596 1 Module, H201T gun 938 123 220-240 345-402
274597 2 Module, H202T gun 938 124 220-240 230-268
274600 4 Module, H204T gun 938 126 220-240 1 85-21 6
274603 8 Module, H208T gun 938 132 220-240 118-127
274606 2 Module, H202 T-E gun 938 125 220-240 142-165
274609 4 Module, H204 T-E gun 938 127 220-240 1 36-1 59
274740 2 Module, H202 T-LP gun 938 1 31 220-240 399-465 B
274742 4 Module, H204 T-LP gun 938 133 220-240 296-346 B
274 594 8 Module, H208 T-LP gun 938 1 28 220-240 246-287 B
274702 1 Module, H2OT gun 938 053 220-240 289-338
274728 1 Module, H20T gun w/micro 938 053 220-240 289-338
274765 AD-31 Handgun 938 1 30 220-240 612-720
276 093 1 Module, H201 T-L gun 938 142 200 289-334
274598 2 Module, H202 T-L gun 938 110 200 172-199
274 601 4 Module, H204 T-L gun 938 141 200 154-178
274604 I Module, H208 T-L gun 938 136 200 99-11 5
274607 2 Module, H202 T-E-L gun 938 114 ,200 109-127
274 610 4 Module, H204 T-E-L gun 938 140 200 11 3-1 31
276094 2 Module, H202 T-LP-L gun 938 137 200 328-380 B

276 095 4 Module, H204 T-LP-L gun 938 139 200 241-279 B
274 595 I Module, H208 T-LP-L gun 938 138 200 206-239 B
276 096 1 Module, H20 T-L gun 938 121 200 201-232
274752 AD-31 T-L Handgun 938 143 200 600-700
NOTE A: lnohms al24"C (75'F)
B: These guns have two heaters wired in parallel. Resistance shown above is for a single heater. The
resistance reading for both heaters should be half the number shown above.

Table 16 Heater Electrical Data for Nordson H-Series RTD-Style Guns

Heater Voltage
Part Description Part No. (vAc) Resistance(A) Note
725 817 AD-41H Handgun 938 090 120 1 80-1 90
NOTE A: lnohms at24'C (75"F)

Manual 45-21 108232E @ 2000 Nodson Corporatlon

All rights reservsd
lssued 1/00
 Hoses C 1-1

lnsert the manual that came with your equipment here.

€894 Nordson Corporation c0EN-01-[3X-XXXX]-l

All righls reserved
lssued 8/94
C 1-2 Hoses

c0EN{1-[3X-XXXX]-l @894 Nordson CoIporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 8/94
 Paft D

Guns

Gr994 Nordson Corporallon D0EN-01-[3X-XXXX]-l

All rights reserved
lssued 8/94
D 1-0 Guns

D0EN-01-[3X-XXXX]-I Gtr)94 Nordson Corporation

All rights roseNed
lssued 8/94
 Guns D 1-1

lnsert the manualthat came with your equipment here.

@894 Nordson Corporation D0EN-01-[3X-XXXXF1

All rights reserved
lssued 8/94
D 1-2 Guns

D0EN-01-[3X-XXXR-l Gr994 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 8/94
 Part E

Options

@998 Nordson Corporalion E0EN{1-[3V-XXXXI-2

All riqhts reserved
lssued ?98
 0 Options

E0EN-01-[3V-XXXX]-2 GDg98 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 2/98
 Options

lnsert the manual or any instructions that came with your equipment here.

G1998 Nordson Corporation EoEN-01-[3V-XXXXI-2

All rights reserved
,lssued 2/98
 Options

E0EN-01-[3V-XXXX]-2 @998 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 2/98
 Part E, Section 1

Series 3000V lnpuUOutput Board

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model Ail
Vollage Ail
Pump Ail
Manifold Ail
Control Vista Standard (V)
Vista Pattern (PC)

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v El EN-02-[3V-lOl-3

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
E 1-0 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board

EI EN-02-[3V-rO]-3 4'l-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board E 1-1

Section E 1
Series 3000V lnpuUOutput Board

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform the

following tasks. Follow the safety instructions in this document
and all other related documentation.

1. lntroduction The inpuUoutput (l/O) board for Series 3000Vhot melt units allows you to
connect devices to the unit to remotely monitor and control key unit
features. The l/O board is available in two versions: standard and
enhanced.

The standard l/O board inputs allow you to

o remotely turn the standby feature on
o remotely turn the heaters on
o have the unit automatically enter the standby mode if guns are not
fired for a specified period of time
The standard l/O board outputs allow you to remotely monitor
. power on/off status
. pump on/off status
. standby on/off status
o warning conditions
ln addition to providing the same inputs and outputs as the standard
l/O board, the enhanced l/O board has additional inputs that allow you to
remotely disable hoses and guns.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation

41-3000v El EN-02-[3V-rO]-3
All ,ights reserved
lssued 5/00
E 1-2 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board

1. lntroduction @ontd.)
See Figure E 1-1. The l/O board has two terminal blocks where you
connect the l/O wiring. On the standard l/O board, the terminal blocks
are labeled TB10 and T820. On the enhanced l/O board, they are
labeled X1 and X2.

2
1
3
2

B
41304:t3

Fig. E 1-1 Standard l/O Board (A) and Enhanced l/O Board (B)
1. TB10 terminal block 4. X2 terminal block
2. XP5 card edge connector 5. X1 terminal block
3. TB20 terminal block

See Figure E 1-2. The l/O board plugs into the XPS card edge
connector, which is located inside the electrical enclosure behind the
operator panel portion of the control-end frame.

l,

0
0 0
fl
o
fl

2 3 4150282

Fig. E 1-2 XP5 Card Edge Connector

1. Control-end frame 3. XPs card edge connector
2. Flange

El EN-02-[3V-rOI-3 41-3000v @000 Nordson CoIporation

All rights reseryed
lssued 5/00
 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board E 1-3

2. lnpuUOutput lf you purchased the l/O board option for your unit, the l/O board is
already installed. You will need only to install ferrites and connect the
Connections l/O wiring. A ferrite is a device used to reduce electrical noise.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (l/O) lines.

1. Turn off the unit; then disconnect and lock out electrical power to
the unit.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure in the Control section.

3. lf you have not already done so, carefully remove a plug from one of
the smaller knockout holes on either the back side or the bottom of
the unit (whichever is most convenient for your operation) and install
a strain relief to support and protect the l/O wiring. Avoid contact with
any printed circuit boards.

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. For a proper and safe installation, make sure you meet
the requirements in the following step.

4. See Figure E 1-3. Route the l/O wiring through the strain relief and
the two ferrites from the ship-with kit to the l/O board terminal blocks.
Make sure your installation meets these requirements:
o Use 0.34-0.25 mmz 122-Z+ AWG) stranded wire that is suitable
for National Electrical Code (NEC) Class 1 remote control and
signaling circuits. Output contacts are rated tor 250 VAC, 2 A
maximum.

a Use the proper length of wire and route the wires so they do not
touch any of the printed circuit boards. Make sure the wires reach
the l/O board terminal blocks when the electrical enclosure is
opened.

a Position the ferrites as close to the rear panel as possible

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v El EN-02-[3V-rO]-3

All rights reserued
lssued 5/00
E 1-4 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board

2. lnpuVOutput
Connections (contd.)

4130661A

Fig. E 1-3 Connecting lnpuVOutputs to the l/O board

El EN-02-[3V-tOI-3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board E 1-5.

5. See Figure E 1-4. Connect the l/O wires to the appropriate terminal
blocks. Refer to Table E 1-1 (standard l/O boards) or
Table E 1-2 (enhanced l/O boards) for terminal block connections.

Table E 1-1 Standard l/O Board Connections

TBl0lnputs TB20 Outputs

(See Note A)
Function Controlled Remotely Terminals lndication Shown Remotely Terminals
Power on/off status (normally closed
Turn standby feature on (See Note B) 1 , 2 1 t 2
when system is powered)
Turn heaters on/remote pump enable Pump on/off status (normally closed
(See Note B)
3,4 3,4
when pump is on)
Standby on/otf status (normally
closed when system is in standby)
5,6
Enter standby if guns are not fired within
a specified period of time (See Note C)
5,6
Warning condition (normally closed
7 8
when no warning condition exists)
NOTE A: Output contacts are rated for 250 VAC,2 A maximum.
B: This input is activated by supplying between 12-24 VDC across the designated terminals of the
l/O board. lf the voltage is removed, the input is deactivated.
C: This input is activated by programming Feature 30, Auto Standby Timeout. A gun is usually signaled to
fire by a timer or programmable logic controller (PLC). lf a time value other than zero (0) is entered in
Feature 30 (Auto Standby Timeout), the unit will automatically enter the standby mode if a gun is not
fired during the specified time period. Refer to Timeout Features in this section.

tritr tritro
tr
EIitr tritr
t-E E]E
TBlO
t-----tJ
tr d.m
E nrn
tIJ

lard
1 2 J
tr HH EIIg
ot lo
H trII]
TURN STANDBY ON lE El o
t-E
2 E--l d
3 4 E
TURN HEATERS ON E HE
-----b ETE HE !
j ol lo METEI
lE EI
ENTER STANDBY IF
5 5 EE
H HEE
GUNS NOT FIRED tr
f, j
E -----b ETE
ol lo
oo
tr lE El =ie o

1 2
POWER ON/OFF
STANDBY ON/OFF STATUS STATUS
4 PUMP ON/OFF
WARNING CONDITION STATUS

4130935A

Fig. E 1-4 Standard l/O Board Connections

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v El EN-02-[3V-]OJ-3

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
E 1-6 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board

2. lnput/Output
Connections @ontd.)

Table E 1-2 Enhanced l/O Board Connections

X1 lnputs X2 Outputs (See Note A)
Function Controlled Remotely Terminals lndication Shown Remotely Terminals
Turn standby feature on (See Note B) Power on/off status (normally closed when
1,2 1,2
system is powered)
Pump on/off status (normally closed when
Turn heaters on (See Note B) 7,8 pump is on) 3,4
Enter standby if guns are not fired within a Standby on/off status (normally closed when
specified period of time (See Note C)
13, 14
system is in standby)
5,6

Disable hose and gun one (See Note B) '10 Warning condition (normally closed when no
9,
warning condition exists)
7,8
Disable hose and gun two (See Note B) 3,4
Disable hose and gun three (See Note B) 15,16
Disable hose and gun four (See Note B) 11, 12
Disable hose and gun five (See Note B) 5,6
Disable hose and gun six (See Note B) 17, 18
NOTE A: Output contacts are rated for 250 VAC, 2 A maximum.
B: This input is activated by supplying between 12-24VDC across the designated terminals of the l/O board. lf the
voltage is removed, the input is deactivated. lf a zone is enabled through the l/O board, the READY light will not
turn on until that zone is within 5" F (-15" C) of its setpoint temperature.
This feature is activated by programming Feature 30, Auto Standby Timeout. A gun is usually signaled to fire by
a timer or programmable logic controller (PLC). lf a time value other than zero (0) is entered in Feature 30 (Auto
Standby Timeout), the unit will automatically enter the standby mode if a gun is not fired during the specified time
period. Refer to Timeout Features in this section.

TURN HEATERS ON

ENTER STANDBY lFl

C !o 1

GUNS NOT FIRED TURN STANDBY ON

DISABLE HOSE/GUN1 1
DISABLE HOSE/GUN
THREE TWO
DISABLE HOSE/GUN1 DISABLE HOSBGUN
stx FIVE

DISABLE HOSE/GUN
,10

U9 U7 U6 U5

DISABLE HOSE/GUN FOU l<2

x2 K3

6
1 POWER ON/OFF STATUS
STANDBY ON/OFF

4 PUMP ON/OFF STATUS

WARNING CON 7 I
K5
a

Fig. E 1-5 Enhanced l/O Board Connections

El EN-02-[3V-rO]-3 41-3000v @ 2000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board E 1-T

6. Close and secure the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and

Closi ng the Electrical Enclosu re in lhe Control section.

7. Restore power to the unit and resume normal operation

3. Additional Features The l/O board adds the following additional features that can be
programmed using the SYSTEM SETTINGS controls:
o Auto Standby Tlmeout
. ln Standby Timeout
o Remote Heaters On/Remote Pump Enable
. Rempote Pattern Select (Pattern control units only)
Each feature is factory-set at zero (0), which means the feature is
disabled. To program these features, refer to Programming SYSTEM
SE77INGS Controlsinlhe lnstallation section. Refer to Table E 1-3 for a
description of how each feature works and a range of possible settings.

Table E 1-3 SYSTEM SETTINGS Timeout Features

Feature No. Feature Description Default Optional
Setting Settings
30 Auto Standby Allows you to program the unit to automatically 0 0-1440
Timeout enter the standby mode and maintain heated (setting is off) (minutes)
zones at standby temperature setpoints if a gun
is not fired during the specified period of time.
The unit will remain in standby mode indefinitely
unless a gun is fired or unless a value other than
zero (0) is entered in Feature 31, ln Standby
Timeout.
31 ln Standby Allows you to program the unit to automatically 0 o-1440
Timeout exit the standby mode and enter the sleep mode (setting is off) (minutes)
(turn the heaters off) if a gun is not fired during
the specified period of time.
34 Remote Allows you to remotely turn heaters on or to 0 0
Heaters enable/disable the pump. This feature is only (Remote (Remote
On/Remote available on the enhanced l/O board. Heaters On) Heaters On)
Pump Enable 1
(Remote
Pump Enable)
51 Remote Allows a pattern to be selected through the liO 0 1or2
Pattern Select board. lf this feature is set to 1 or 2, patterns (setting is off)
(Pattern can be selected via inputs on the l/O board.
control units Refer to Table E 1-4lor the various settings.
only) This feature is only available on the enhanced
l/O board.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y El EN-02-[3V-!OJ-3

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
E 1-8 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board

3. Additional Features
(contd.)

Table E 1-4 Remote Pattern Select Settings

Setting 1 Setting 2
Hose/Gun 5 Hose/Gun 6 Pattern Number Remote Gun Hose/Gun 5 Hose/Gun 6 Pattern Number
Pattern Control Pattern Control
off off Disabled off off off Disabled
off On 1 off off On 1

On off 2 off On ofr 2

On On 3 off On On 3
On off off 4
On off On 5

On On off 6

On On On 7

EI EN-02-[3V-!O]-3 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporalion

All rights resewed
lssued 5/00
 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board E 1-9

4. l/O Board Replacement Use this procedure to replace a defective l/O board with a new l/O board

WARNING: Risk of equipment damage, personal injury or

death. Disconnect and lock out electrical power to the unit,
including inpuVoutput (liO) lines.

1. Turn off the unit; then disconnect and lock out electrical power to the
unit, including l/O lines.

2. Open the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and Closing the

Electrical Enclosure in lhe Control section.

3. Remove the screw that holds the board to its bracket inside the
electrical enclosure.

NOTE: A new bracket is included in the service kit. lf desired, you

can replace the existing bracket with this new bracket.

4. Label or note existing connections for later reference, then disconnect

wires from the board and pull the board out of the XP5 card edge
connector.

5. Remove the new board from its static-safe container, making sure to
handle the board by its edges without touching pins, wires, or
circuitry.

6. Carefully installthe new board in the XPS card edge connector and
attach the board to the bracket with the screw provided in the seruice
kit. Tighten the screw to 2.03-2.26 N.m (18-20 in.-lb).

7. Reconnect wires to the new l/O board. Refer to Table E 1-1

(standard l/O boards) orTable E 1-2 (enhanced l/O boards) in
I n put/O utp ut Co n necti ons f or termi nal con nections.

8. Close and secure the electrical enclosure. Refer to Opening and

Closi ng the Electrical Enclosu re in lhe Control section.

9. Restore power to the unit and resume normal operation.

@ 2000 Nordson Corporation 41 -3000y El EN-02-[3V-1Ol-3

All rights reseryed
lssued 5/00
E 1-10 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board

5. Troubleshooting For wiring information, refer to the Wiring Diagrams section

Problem Possible Cause Corrective Action

1 lnputs not being Loose connection Check the tightness of connections at
recognized the l/O board and at the remote devices.
Tighten any loose connections.

lnput voltage not sufficient
Defective l/O board
Make sure the voltage across the
appropriate terminals on X1 or TB10 is
12-24VDC.
Replace the l/O board. Reter lo l/O
Board Replacement.

2. Outputs not working Loose connection Check the tightness of the connections
at the l/O board and at the remote
devices. Tighten any loose connections.
Defective l/O board Replace the l/O board. Refer to
l/O Board Replacement.

El EN-02-[3V-rO]-3 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reseNed
lssued 5/00
 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board E 1-11

6. Parts To order parts, contact the Nordson Customer Service Center or your
local Nordson representative. Use the following parts list to describe and
locate parts correctly. See Figure E 1-6.

Item Part Description Quantity Note

247 261 Service kit, standard l/O board, Vista
239 494 Seruice kit, enhanced l/O board, Vista
1 302202 . Bracket, l/O board 1

2 . Circuit board, standard l/O 1 A

2 . Circuit board, enhanced l/O 1 B
3 982 971 . Screw, hex head, M4 x 12 mm 1

4 982341 . Screw, pan head, M3 x 10 mm 2

5 983 400 . Washer, lock, split, M3 2
6 983 411 . Washer, flat, narrow, M3 2
NS 185 071 . lnductor, bead, 1.41 in. diameter (fenite) 2
NOTE A: lncluded in service kil247 261.
B: lncluded in service kit 239 494.
NS: NotShown

s
@

41

Fig. E 1-6 l/O Board Service Kit Parts

@ 2000 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v EI EN-02-[3V-1OI-3

All dghts reserved
lssued 5/00
E 1-12 Series 3000V lnput/Output Board

El EN-02-[3V-rOl-3 41-3000v @000 Nordson Coporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Part E, Section 2

Low Level lndicator

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model 3400v
3500v
3700v
3800v
3900v
Voltage Ail
Pump AI
Manifold Ail
Control Ail

€E)97 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v E2EN{3-[3V-LLrl-4

All rights reserved
lssued 6/97
E 2-O Low Level lndicator

E2EN{3-[3V-LLr]-4 41-3000v €D997 Nordson Corporation

lssued 6/97 All rights reserved
 Low Level lndicator E 2-1

Section E 2
Low Level lndicator

WARNING: Allow only qualified personnelto perform the

following tasks. Observe and follow the safety instructions in
this document and all other related documentation.

1. lntroduction The low level indicator sends a signal to an external device when the
adhesive level in the applicator's tank is low. The external device can be
a Nordson vacuum hopper feeder that automatically adds more adhesive,
or a customer-supplied light that warns operators when the adhesive
level is low.

The low level indicator consists of a float, counterweight, lever rod,

mercury switch and terminal block. The float is balanced by the
counterweight to ride half in and half out of the hot melt material. As the
adhesive level drops, the float attached to the lever rod drops down. The
mercury switch attached to the lever rod tilts forward. This action causes
the mercury switch to close and activates the terminal block.

The indicator is intended for 30 VAC maximum, Class 2 circuit operation

as defined in Article 725 ot the National ElectricalCode.

Gtr)97 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v E2EN-03-[3V-LLll-4

All ,ights reserved
lssued 6/97
E 2-2 Low Level lndicator

2. lnstallation WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

@ safety goggles, and heat-protective gloves. Hot melt material

may be released forcefully.

@
@
1. Drain the tank of all hot melt material.

WARNING: The applicator contains energized electrical

components with potentials that could be fatal. Disconnect and
lock out input electrical power to the unit before proceeding
further. Only qualified personnel should install and operate this
equipment.

2. Remove the pump enclosure.

3. Remove the electrical enclosure and rear cover from the unit.

4. Remove the screws holding the pump pan to the tank cover.

5. Knock out the lever rod opening on the tank cover.

E2EN-03-[3V-LLr]-4 41-3000v @tr)97 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 6/97
 Low Level lndicator E 2-3

2. lnstallation@ontd.)

II

Fig. E 2-1
1. lndicator assembly 4. Center frame 7. Terminalblock
2. Float 5. Wires to customer-supplied remote device 8. Counterweight
3. Tank barrier 6. Wires to Low Level lndicator

Gtr)97 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v E2EN-03-[3V-LLrl-4

All rights reseryed
lssued 6/97
E 2-4 Low Level lndicator

2. lnstallation@ontd.) 6. Clean the tank of any debris before filling with fresh hot melt material.

7. Remove the float from the lever rod and slide the lever rod through
the opening in the pump pan.

8. lVlount the indicator to the pump pan and secure with the screws
removed in step 4.

9. Attach the float to the lever rod. The mercury switch activates when
the lever rod drops below horizontal.

10. Loosen the locking nut above the float and screw the float up or down
the lever rod to the position that will produce the desired low level
warning point.

NOTE: The X distance in Figure E2-2is the distance between the

low level warning point (reference groove) and the top of the tank
strainer. The recommended X distance is 63mm (2.50 in).
Recommended Y distance is 36mm (1.41 in).

11. Tighten the locking nut when the float is at the desired position
X
12. Place the tank barrier in position around the float.

13. Fasten the terminal block bracket to the center frame.

dtoiq2s 14. Secure the terminal block to the bracket.

Fig.E2-2

E2EN-03-[3V-LLrl-4 41-3000v @97 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 6/97
 Low Level lndicator E 2-s

2. lnstallation@ontd.) 15. Connect the indicator wires to the porcelain connector on the
indicator.

16. Route the wires behind the tank and through the recess in the center
frame, then bring them up to the terminal block.

17. Connect the indicator wire ends to the terminal block.

4130d,32

Fig. E 2-3 Connecting wires to the terminal block

1. Wires to low level indicator 2. Wires to customer-supplied
remote device

18. The low level indicator can now be connected to a remote device
provided by the customer. Connect the wires from the remote device
to the terminal block directly across from the wires to the low level
indicator.

19. Replace the electrical enclosure and the front cover. Replace the
pump enclosure and tighten the locking screw

@897 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v E2EN-03-[3V-LL1]-4

All rights reserved
lssued 6/97
E 2-6 Low Level lndicator

3. Setup WARNING: Hot! Risk of burns. Wear heat-protective clothing,

@ safety goggles, and heat-protective gloves.

@
@
A CAUTION: Remove the retaining rubberband from the float
assembly before proceeding to prevent the melted rubberband
from falling into the tank.

1. Fill the applicator with hot melt material and begin operation
according to lhe Operafion section of the manual.

2. When the low level warning indicator comes on, open the tank cover
and remove the tank barrier.

3. Observe where the float rides on the surface of the hot melt material.

4. lf the reference groove is below the adhesive surface, remove the

pump enclosure, loosen the locknut on the counterweight and turn the
countenareight so that it moves away from the pivot point of the lever
rod. Continue turning the counteruveight until the groove floats at the
surface.

5. lf the reference groove is above the surface, turn the counteiweight

so that it moves closer to the pivot point of the lever rod. Continue
turning the counterweight until the groove floats at the surface.
ADHESIVE
LEVEL
NOTE: lf the hot melt material is changed to one with a different
specif ic gravity, readjust the counteruveight.
4130/.23

Fig. E2-4 Float Reference Groove

6. Tighten the locknut against the counterweight.

7. To adjust the low levelwarning time, re-position the float up or down

on the lever rod.

NOTE: Tank capacity must be at least 50% when the mercury switch
activates.

8. Replace the pump enclosure. The low level indicator is ready for
operation.

E2EN-03-[3V-LL!]-4 41-3000v @897 Nodson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 6/97
 Low Level lndicator E 2-7

4. Parts List

Part Description Quantity Note

302 891 Service kit, Level lndicator
119 164 . Level assembly indicator 1 A
120 576 . Tank barrier 1

983 005 . Washer, flat, 0.094 x 0.250 x 0.020 inch 2

2BB 160 . Screw, Hi Lo, Pan Hd, Rec, 2-18 x 1.00 inch 2

100 661 . 4 station marker strip 1

249 791 . Terminal block bracket 1

100 664 . 4 station terminal control block 1

982 430 . Screw, Pan Hd, Slt, M3 x 16 mm 2

302 BB3 . Wire group 1

NOTE A: The level assembly indicator includes a mercury switch (P/N 126 674)

O 1997 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v E2EN-03-[3V-LLll-4

All dghts reserved
lssued 6/97
E 2-8 Low Level lndicator

E2EN{3-[3V-LLU-4 41-3000v @897 Nordson Corporation

All dghts reserved
lssued 6/97
 Part F, Section 1

Nordson Glossary

GD994 Nordson Corporatlon Fl EN-02-[3X-XXXXI-1

All rights reserved
lssued 4/94
F 1-0 Glossary

F1 EN-02-[3X-XXXX]-1 Gq)94 Nordson CoDoralion

All rights reseNed
lssued 4/94
 Glossary F 1-l

Section F 1
Nordson Glossary

Adhesive Any material that can be used to adhere or "sticK'one surface to another,

Angel Hair Fine threads of adhesive caused by incomplete transfer of the adhesive
mass from applicator to substrate, followed by elongation of the
connecting bridges. May be caused by improper nozzle shutoff with a
high viscosity adhesive.

Applicator That part of the hot melt system that is used to heat adhesive to its
required application temperature and pump it to the hose(s) and gun(s).
It consists of a tank or reservoir, pump, filter, distribution manifold and
temperature controlled heating system.

Ball Check Valve An automatically actuated valve which is opened by fluid flow in one
direction and closed by flow in the opposite direction.

Bead Thickness The width of an adhesive bead which has been deposited on a substrate.
The measurement is taken before the bead has been flattened by
adhering it to another surface.

Cartridge Heater See Heater Cartridge.

Cast-in Resistive Heating A non-replaceable heating element specifically shaped to provide a

Element uniform thermal profile in the heated object.

Charring in Tank The degradation of a fluid that occurs as a result of time and exposure to
atmospheric air and/or heat.

Circuit Breaker An electronic device that acts to shut down a powered AC circuit when
current draw (amps) exceeds some preselected value or when certain
fault conditions exist.

Cl ose-on-rise Thermostat A temperature control device that closes, completing an electronic circuit
upon reaching a specific temperature

Crossover Tube The tube that connects the outlet port of a pump to the distribution
manifold of a hot melt applicator.

@994 Nordson Corporation F1 EN-02-[3X-XXXX]-1

All rights reseryed
lssued 4/94
F 1-2 Glossary

Drop-out Time The time between when the gun is signaled to stop and when the
adhesive flow actually does stop.

Dual-acting Piston Pump A pump that delivers material on both the upstroke and the downstroke

Enclosure Rating A manufacturer's statement of the maximum level of some external

condition, such as water or dust level, that the enclosure is capable of
withstanding.

Encoder A speed-sensing device which outputs a frequency of pulses proportional

to the measured line speed.

Ertrusion Gun A spring-loaded triggering device for dispensing or depositing material.

There are two basic types of guns, the manual gun which is actuated by
hand and the automatic gun which is actuated by process controls.

Filter Bung That part of a filter assembly external to the unit to which the filtering
element is attached, or contained within the unit. lt is also used for
access or cleaning.

Flow Rate The amount of material flowing through the system per unit of time. The
amount may be expressed in gravimetric (weight) or volumetric terms.
Examples: grams/minute, ml/min, lb/hour, gallons/hour.

Four-way Air Valve A valve typically used to pressurize one side of a double acting cylinder
while opening a exhaust path for the opposite side.

Gear-to-line See Key-to-line.

Gel A cross-linked, insoluble material which can form in a hot melt applicator
under extended thermal stress.

Ground Wire A wire that connects allAC powered devices to earth ground.

Gun The device that dispenses a material (adhesive) onto a substrate or

product.

Heater Cartridge A replaceable resistive heating element, tubular in shape, designed to fit
in a machined hole in the object to be heated.

Heating Bong The volume that is heated and thermally controlled by a single control
device.

Hopper A container allowing non-melted adhesive to be supplied on a continuous

basis to a melt zone.

FlEN{2-[3X-XXXX]-1 Gtr194 Nordson Corporation

lssued 4/94 All rights reserved
 Glossary F 1-3

Hot Melt Material The adhesive or thermoplastic material dispensed by the hot melt
system.

Hot Melt System The applicator, hose(s), gun(s) and timing mechanism.

Key-to-line A system that regulates flow rate in proportion to the substrate (line)
speed.

Level lndicator A device that shows the level of material in a tank, reservoir or hopper.

Light Emitting Diode (LED) A device that converts applied voltage to light. LEDs appear as colored
lights that indicate operating conditions.

Low Level lndicator See Level lndicator.

Manifold The device that distributes fluid and/or air.

Maximum Operating Gun The highest cycle rate of the gun that produces a repeatable pattern.
Speed

Maximum Pumping Rate The maximum adhesive flow rate achievable without exceeding any
operating limits. The maximum pumping rate is measured at the
manifold outlet. The rate is based on an adhesive with a given viscosity.

Melt Rate The rate at which a materialcan be melted continuously on a long-term

basis while maintaining the output fluid temperature within a desired
temperature band. Commonly expressed in units of grams/minute,
grams/hour, lb/min or lb/hr.

Nozzle The extrusion tip, the point at which the adhesive exits the gun. The
nozzle controls the adhesive stream's volume, shape and direction.
Nozzles may have single or multiple orifices.

Open Time The time after adhesive is applied during which a seruiceable bond can
be made. Many factors affect open time, including temperature,
substrate, the adhesive used and the amount of adhesive applied.

Operating Air Pressure The pressure at which the pump and/or guns are operated. See product
specifications.

Operating Temperature Range The range of temperatures in which the specific material or adhesive in
use functions satisfactorily in a particular application.

Ove rte m p e ratu re P rotecti o n A product feature that shuts down the unit or produces an alarm when
temperatures are outside a specified band.

@894 Nordson Corporation FIEN{2-[3X-XXXX]-1

All rights reserved
lssued 4/94
F 1-4 Glossary

Parent Machine lnterlock (PMI) A product feature that prevents the parent machine from operating before
the hot melt system is ready.

Pattern Control A device that controls the dispensing of material

P ress u re-S en sitive Ad hes ive An adhesive that remains tacky after curing or setting.

Pull-in Time The time between when the gun is signaled to start and when the
adhesive flow actually begins.

Pulses Per Minute Output signal frequency, often from an encoder, tach generator or similar
device.

Pumping Rate The amount of material a pump can deliver per unit of time

Rebuild and Exchange (RBX) A Nordson program which offers factory rebuilt equipment at a reduced
cost in exchange for the customer's old equipment.

Regulator An adjustable device for maintaining pressure at the preset valve

Relief Valve A safety device designed to release pressure if it exceeds a preset level

Resistance Temperatu re A temperature-sensing device that changes resistance at a

Detector (RTD) predetermined rate in response to changes in temperature.

Run-up A specialcase of Key-to-line or Gear-to-line, often applied to air control

for piston pumps.

Seruice Block Part of an automatic extrusion gun, the seruice block supplies the needed
air, adhesive and heat to make the gun operate.

Setting Time The time required for a materialto reach a set state after being applied in
a fluid state.

Shifter Assembly A mechanical or electrical device used to switch a 4-way air valve

SIafs A common shape of adhesive

Slot Nozzle Anozzle that applies a film of adhesive instead of a bead.

Solenoid Valve An air control valve actuated by an electromagnetic coil.

F1 EN-02-[3X-XXXX]-1 @U194 Nordson Corporation

All rights reseNed
lssued 4/94
 Glossary F 1-5

Solid Sfate Circuitry An electronic circuit whose operation depends upon any combination of
optical, electrical or magnetic phenomena within a solid. Specifically
excluded are circuits that depend upon physical movement, as well as
those requiring either contact with or avoidance of other solids, liquids,
gases or plasmas.

Solid Sfafe Device A device whose electricalfunctions are performed by semiconductors or

otherwise completely static components such as resistors and capacitors.
The device may contain components that do not depend on electronic
conduction in a vacuum or gas.

Solvent ln the Nordson context, a material used to dissolve hot melt adhesive to
facilitate system cleaning.

Stringing A defect in adhesive application characterized by hair-like fibers of

adhesive emanating from the trailing edge of the bead. Stringing may
produce continuous fibers attached to the nozzle. lt is most often caused
by the gun temperature being too cold.

Substrate The material or product on which the adhesive is applied.

Tank Capacity The amount of material that the tank can hold with the fluid level 25 mm
(1 inch) from the top of the hopper or tank.

Tank Strainer A product feature that helps keep large pieces of foreign material out of
the pump.

TanR Volume The volume that the tank can hold when it is filled. The displacement of
the pump is taken into account in this measurement.

Temperature Sensor That part of a temperature control system that detects the temperature
and feeds this information to the control device.

Temperature Setback A product feature by which the system temperature may be automatically
reduced to a preset number of degrees.

Thermopl astic Material A synthetic materialwhich is solid at room temperature, becomes soft
when heated, and returns to solid form upon cooling.

Timing Device See Pattern Control

Touch Pad Operator interface.

Unlubricated Air Air free of oil.

Viscosity A physical measurement of resistance to flow.

€1894 Nordson Corporation Fl EN-02-[3X-XXXX]-1

All riqhts reserved
lssued 4/94
F 1-6 Glossary

F1 EN-02-[3X-XXXX]-1 @994 Nordson Corporation

AU dghts reseNed
lssued 4/94
 Part F, Section 2

Wiring Diagrams

This section covers the following unit congifurations.

Model All
Voltage Ail
Pump All
Manifold Ail
Control Ail

@000 Nordson Corporation 4't-3000y FSEN-04-[3V-A-AAAXI-4

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
F 2-O Wiring Diagrams

F3EN{/I-[3V-A-AAAXI-4 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporation

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Wiring Diagrams F 2-1

Section F 2
Wiring Diagrams

1. lntroduction The wiring diagrams contained in this section are based on the voltage
code of your unit. Refer to the following table to determine the voltage
code of your unit; then refer to the appropriate wiring diagram in this
section.

Table F 2-1 Unit Voltage Codes and Applicable Wiring Diagrams

Unit Specification Type of service you can connect to the unit: Part of this section
Voltage (See Note A) to refer to:
Code
1 200-240Vac 200-240Yac 1A (two wire seruice without a neutral) Voltage Code 1 and
or 2 Wiring Diagram
3AC 230
or
3/PE AC 200-240V
200-240Yac3A (three wire seruice without a neutral)
2 3/N/PE AC 400/230V 230 Vac 1A $wo wire service, including a neutral) Voltage Code 1 and
2 Wiring Diagram
4001230 Yac 3A (four wire service, including a
neutral)
3 3 AC 400V 400 Vac 3A $hree wire service without a neutral) Voltage Code'3
Wiring Diagram
4 3AC48OV 480 Vac 3A $hree wire service without a neutral) Voltage Code 4
Wiring Diagram
NOTE A: This specification is printed in the VOLTS (ac) portion of the identification plate on your unit

2. Use of Wiring Diagrams Each wiring diagram is contained on two facing pages. Sometimes a
wire shown on one page id connected to terminals or components shown
on the facing page. ln these cases, the connecting wiring is labeled on
each page with the same letters. For example, if you want to trace a.wire
or harness labeled BL on the left page, look for a wire or harness labeled
BL on the right page.

Each wiring diagram shows all of the options or special features the unit
can be equipped with. Options and specialfeatures are indicated by
dotted lines. To determine the features and options of your unit, refer to
Explanation of Configuration Code at the end ol lhe Descripfion section.

@000 Nordson Corpoiation 41-3000y F3EN-04-[3V-A-AAAXI-4

All dghls reserved
lssued 5/00
F 2-2 Wiring Diagrams

3. Voltage Code 1 and 2 This wiring diagram applies to voltage code 1 and 2 units only. Refer to
Table F 2-1 to determine the voltage code of your unit.
Wiring Diagram

KEYPAD BXPT
NO CONNECTION HC1
xP1
GUNl
G o :.|.-:::::1"
CONTROL 4t
BOARD Lul l,

o o
6 E HC2
F
o
6
c
o
DIGITAL PROCESSOR
CONTROL
frl-trdjl:
?41 I+,
o

o
o
U
z r
x o
zU x
W" L"l lo

NOTE: FOR AC
o
G
GEAR PUMP UNITS
JUMPER IS USED
ON J2
HC3

GUNs

xs4 f,lEiu
d) 4t
J llul t"
(o

Po\AIER
SUPPLY :i1 HC4

*$ffir GUN4

#@r
Yl
I,L
IL
o .Lol
l,
l" jl" *i
z ;-d-
.-t-r-
o
cc HG4
IIJ
3 TANI(RES RTD TANK/RES
o
(L KI
x1

ct
CH

PNEUMATIC
POWER BOARD SOLENOID G3
VALVE
'15 (NOT USED WITH
'AC GEAR PUMP
REAR PANELG2
3 oPTroN)
TANK
3 I v OVEHTEMP
eQ
ZFE
THERMOSTAT EXPANSION BASE PLATE G6
x4
5de
E] 1

TSIAT
1

@
<600 ts J2
o@@@ BC GND
FFFF (PE)
BA
iSSz (PE)
METAL
PARTS IN DOTTED LINESARE OPTIONAL
4130615A

Fig. F 2-1 Wiring Diagram for Voltage Code 1 and 2 Units (1 of 2)

F3EN-O'|-[3V-A-AAAX]-4 4't-3000v @000 Nordson Corporation

All ,ights reserued
lssued 5/0O
 Wiring Diagrams F 2-g

x1c & x2c coNNEcTtoNS MOTOH

AC MOTOR
2OO.24O V1 PHASE 2OO.24OV3PHASE OVERTEMPERATURE
xlc x2c xlc ,12C THERMOSTAT
1 I G9
MI
o o oo
o
o
o oo AC MOTOR S
12 CONTROL BOABD
,5
xsrM
230V1 4OOVI23O V 3 PHASE --
xs4c
ORBM -
1 I MOTOR
xs3c F1
OFI BL--.- -V

GUN 1 GUN 2 Y'Y

BK SOLENOID SOLENOID cl c H G8
VALVE VALVE cRUil
TRIGGER IN ^
'0t--------{+ Y.
ENABLE IN
X ooo DETATLA
x4P liTil
swncn
(ssw)
x2P Fu2l
BLOR Y r CSTART 2
XS3B POWEB PATTERN CONTROL
<+D-l*J
GUNs
SUPPLY sax
DRIVER BOARD
AC MOTOR RUN/START
xlP

12 3
VUN
-l*r
4 x7P
BOARD E_
BJ H
F1 It HG5
BA il
CONTACTOR BOARD F2 I HC6
x2}t
F-l
xsBc
-t++-r GUN6
F4

't2
L+
----.l 12345
;.|--j'q1"
Yl
l,r" 'Lol
l+<

2 l;ll l,'
cc
BC JUMPEB WHEN HG6
GRID NOT
GBOUND STACK LIST PRESENT
BD GRID
SOUFCE WRE LOCATION

CONTROL
Gl 1A
XlGR
FRAME
TSTAT
REAR
G2 2A
PANEL
XSlGF XS2GB
I-UGI HG1 20
HtG2 HG2 30 GRID
TANI(RES G3 3A G7
PARTS IN DOTTED LINES ARE OPTIONAL
FRONT
G4 3B
PANEL
TOP D x3 & x4 ooNNECT|ONS
COVEH G5 28 A 2OO.24O V1 PHASE 2OO-24OV3PHASE G7
c tX31xg

ffi
EXP.
G6 5D
BASEPLATE
I-UG3 HG3 2C
B
t-uG4 HG4 LEVEL 5 15 15
3
IUG5 HG5 4C LEVEL4 4OOVI2SOV3PHASE 230V1 PHASE
FUG6 HG6 4D LEVEL 3
tX3 ,X3
GRID G7 5B
LEVEL2
MOTOR G9 4C
MOTOR
LEVEL 1
CONTFOL G8 4A 3
BFIA(iKFT
HOPPEH
Gl0 4B
COVER x4 xql 41306164
Fig. F 2-2 Wiring Diagram for Voltage Code 1 and 2 Units (2 of Z)

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y F3EN-04-[3V-A-AAAXI-4

AU righls reseNed
lssued 5/00
F 2-4 Wiring Diagrams

4. Voltage Code 3 Wiring This wiring diagram applies to voltage code 3 units only. Refer to
Table F 2-1 to determine the voltage code of your unit.
Diagram

KEYPAD

BF
GUNl
CONTROL r-
a
o
o BOARD
ll
iljffiti
)41 l!
m 5
I
o
x x LUI I"
Io t-

ct)
J o
E
3ii
-,

oz o
o
l\ 6
o
c
x iil
>v I
I

a DIGITAL PBOCESSOR
CONTROL ill-ffi5}fl
]4tt
lul l"
)u d d
dI x x

t-
GUNs
Pll
IT 4
POWEB
SUPPLY -l

t;
T I ++ T + J I ;4 "l
'-
HC4

IHEATEC

t :g+^n^-r
:$k@, rr
Sf-".rejj;
GUN4

TL
LL
o \o Ht I

-r0I t"
z
o F--
(r i
ut sotrNor0 HG4
3 ]'.r
o
TL
PNEUMATIC
o SOLENOID
POWER BOARD VALVE
J4
15 FRONT PANELG4
F9 B82
x3 3
BB1 EXPANSION
cc TANK
Eo U
k e? 3
2 2 OVERTEMP
THERMOSTAT
o ZFE
EJ
o
z
x4
5 de 1

TSTAT
i

GND
TBl <oo o @
F J2
ooo
FFF
o
F
BC
GND
(PE)
BA =33
GND F PARTS IN DOTTED LINESARE OPTIONAL 413(N48A

Fig. F 2-3 Wiring Diagram for Voltage Code 3 Units (1 of 2)

F3 E N{/I-[3V-A-AAA Xl-4 41-3000y @00 Nordson Corporation

All rlghts reserved
lssued 5/00
 Wiring Diagrams F 2-5

GUN5

-l*r
400:230 TRANSFORMER 5/6 HOSE/GUN rd--
't!

HG5

coM 23I)v BB1 BB2 F2

SUBGE uo
GUARO OE
E<
lf
ao GUN6
F4
BA
f,l_md'i1:
-t2345 :Yl I+<
K1 .L'l l"

HG6
H
BXPS BE BD
Jlc
CONTACTOR BOARD 2 4OO V TANK
21 21
x

BC
GROUND STACK LIST
SOURCE WIHE LOCATION
CONTROL G1 1 D
FRAME
REAR G2 2A
c
PANEL
H/G.I HG1 2D G3,HCs,HC6
B
HIG2 HG2 3D
TANK G3 3A LEVEL 5
GUN 1 GUN2
FRONT LEVEL4
G4 3B
PANEL LEVEL 3
TOP LEVEL2 BK
COVER G5 28
LEVEL 1
TRIGGEB I

EXP. ENABLE
G6 5D x6P
BASEPLATE
vcP
H/G3 HG3 2C
HIG4 HG4 3C 400:230 TRANSFORMER
PATTERN CONTROL
H/G5 HG5 4C POWEB
DRIVER BOARD
SUPPLY
XS4B
coM
H/G6 HG6 4D xrP
coM
230V
400v
x7P
o o 'I 2S 4
4

BJ

PARTS IN DOTTED LINES ARE OPTIONAL

41s0449A

Fig. F 2-4 Wiring Diagram for Voltage Code 3 Units (2 of 2)

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v F3EN-0'|-[3V-A-AAAX]-4

All dghls reserved
lssued 5/00
F 2-6 Wiring Diagrams

5. Voltage Code 4 Wiring This wiring diagram applies to voltage code 4 units only. Refer to
Table F 2-1 to determine the voltage code of your unit.
Diagram

KEYPAD
D

XP2B
GUNl
CONTROL
o BOARD t-rtEiSft*
riq.- a I
@
? so 5 lAt I

3*r
J
dt c c c x
a lul l"
o
BD
sE-
't!

U) R
J o
a= o o BF
-(, U)
@
o
x
OIGITAL PROCESSOR
CONTBOL

Y
(D L

t-
GUN3

BL
ffi
ftl--
'tr
)
POWER
SUPPLY

HC4
7
-l

GUN4

IL 3r}---'q1"
TL qtt
o lol l" *r\
z
o
tE
uJ
F HG4
o
=
(L _L PNEUMATIC
SOLENOID
J 15
POWER BOARD
2
VALVE PANEL
FRONT PANEL G4
3 3
TANK EXPANSION BASE PLATE G6
3
OVERTEMP
9?
ztsE
2
THEBMOSTAT
E=
o x4
5#e TSTAT
HOSE/GUN 6 HG6
<@oo o
@60@ F
FFFF AA
<o GND
41308464

Fig. F 2-5 Wiring Diagram for Voltage Code 4 Units (1 of 2)

F3 EN-04-[3V-A-AAAXI-4 41-3000y @000 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 5/00
 Wiring Diagrams F 2-7

N
s3
NU CM CL
o
@
lr3
o+
INPUT

i OUTPUT

480 Vac J1
x4D
DISTBIBUTloN
BOARD
A,|

TB1 ,|

F3 L1 12 C
L3
F2 X5DA 12 z
INCOMING L3 7 @
POWER
480 Vac
t2
T4 123 CL
o
CM l,
-L o
L,I
x2D 123 x
T xEl
12345 678
Y
x3D 5432-l

480
XFMR
230 V t
METAL
ENB+FAME
2g
coM coM cHASSt52
48ol2@
G3

:<
z
F
C)

E | '6L 'l-';k;'l.l o o
o
@
rf -o /c$b$ C
zo) I
o
C
z
Ol
o) (n
GROUND STACK LIST
SOURCE WIRE LOCATION
CONTROL G1 1A
FRAME G3,HCs,HC6

BEAR G2 2A
PANEL GUN 1 GUN 2
H/G1 HG1 2D
D
HIG2 HG2 3D A
c BK
TANK G3 3A
THIGGER
FRONT 3B ENABLE I
G4 B
PANEL 45678 x3P x4P
x2P
TOP
COVER G5 28 LEVEL 4

EXP. LEVEL 3 PATTEBN CONTBOL

G6 4B AL
BASEPLATE POWER DHIVER BOARD
LEVEL 2 BM
SUPPLY
H/G3 HG3 2C xtP
LEVEL 1

HIG4 HG4 3C
H/G5 HG5 4C x7P

H/G6 HG6 4D
BJ
EXP. XFMB
T1 4A
BRACKET

4130847A

Fig. F 2-6 Wiring Diagram for Voltage Code 4 Units (2 of 2)

@000 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y FsEN-04-[3V-A-AAAX]-4

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
F 2-8 Wiring Diagrams

FsEN{4-[3V-A-AAAX]-4 41-3000v @000 Nordson Corporatlon

All righls reserved
lssued 5/00
 Part F, Section 3

Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

This section covers the following unit configurations.

Model AI
Voltage Alt
Pump AI
Manifold Alt
Control Ail

€1999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y F4EN{5-[3V-PWR]-1

All rights reserued
lssued 3/99
F 3-0 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

F4EN-o$[3V-PWRI-l 41-3000y GD999 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserued
lssued 3/99
 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity F 3-1

Section F 3
Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

1. lntroduction When you connect hoses and guns to your hot melt unit, you must make
sure the electrical power requirements of those hoses and guns do not
exceed the maximum wattages allowed for your system. Exceeding the
allowed maximum wattage can damage your equipment or keep your
system from functioning properly.

For every Series 3000Vsystem, there are three maximum wattages you
must not exceed:

The single-component maximum wattage: the wattage of any

single hose or gun connected to your unit must not exceed this
wattage.

a The hose/gun pair maximum wattage: the wattage of any hose

and gun (hose/gun pair) connected to your unit must not exceed this
wattage.

a The total hose/gun maximum wattage: the wattage of all hoses

and guns connected to your unit must not exceed this wattage.

To make sure your system does not exceed any of these maximum
wattages, someone (either you or your Nordson representative) must
calculate the hose/gun capacity for your system. lf your Nordson
representative has already made this calculation for the actual hoses and
guns you plan to use, you do not need to repeat the calculation now.
However, you must make this calculation

a if the hose/gun capacity has not been calculated for your system

a if you have reconfigured your system since the calculations were

made

a whenever you add new hoses or guns to an existing system

a whenever you replace an existing hose with a longer one or an

existing gun with a larger one

@ 1999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y F4EN-05-[3V-PWB]-1

All rights reserued
lssued 3/99
F g-2 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

2. Procedure for Use this procedure to calculate the hose/gun capacity for your system.
Throughout this procedure there are places for you to record important
Calculating Hose/Gun information. These records provide you with a quick reference and make
Capacity recalculations easier.

1. See Figure F 3-1. Locate the identification plate above the hose ports
on your unit and then locate the unit number (UNIT NO.) portion of
the identification plate.

654321
o

@@ @@
\

NORDSON CORP AMHERST, OHIO, POWER REQUIREMENTS

UNIT NO. VOLTS (ac)
TEMP: HZ AMPS (Max.) @
SERIAL NO. 0 WATTS (Max,)

4130667

Fig. F 3-1 Location of UNIT NO. on ldentification Plate

F4EN-O5-[3V-PWRI-l 41-3000v @1899 Nordson Corporation

All rights reserved
lssued 3/99
 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity F 3-3

2. See Figure F 3-2. Note that the UNIT NO. is a series of numbers and
letters, each in a code position. The numbers and letters in each
code position provide important information about your system. You
will need to refer to these code positions for some steps in this
procedure.

lilI.riEI

[-----E
trre ffi ffi ffi ffi ffi n
OIIEE

I D F] 4l 5 ra
L' v 8En
Fig. F 3-2 Unit Number Code Positions

3. Look at code position 1 of your unit number and record the model of
your unit in the space below (for example: 3100t2).

Model

4. Look at code position 3 of your unit number to determine whether you

have a piston pump or a constant-speed gear pump:

a lf code position 3 is a D, E, F, or G, you have a piston pump

a lf code position 3 is a K or L, you have a constant-speed gear

pump.

lf you have a piston pump, write PP in the space below. lf you have a
constant-speed gear pump, write CG in the space below.

Pump (PP or CG):

5. Look at code position 6 of your unit number and record the hose/gun
electrical capacity of your unit in the space below (for example: 2).

Hose/gun electrical capacity (2,4, or 6l=

@ 1999 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v F4EN-05-[3V-PWR]-1

All riqhts reserved
lssued 3/99
F 3-4 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

2. Procedure for 6. Determine which of the following types of electrical seruice you are
supplying to your unit and record the type of electrical service in the
Calculating HoselGun
space below:
Capacity (contd.)
o 200Yac1Aor3A
o 24OYac 1A or 4151240 Vac (with neutra\ 3A
o 240 Yac 1A or 240 Vac (without neutral) 30
o 230 Vac 1A or 400/230 Vac (with neutral) 30
o 23O Vac 1A or 230 Vac (without neutral) 3Z
o 400Vac3A
o 480 YacS@
Electrical service

7. Using the electricalservice information you recorded in step 6, refer

to the following table to determine the maximum wattage of any single
hose or gun you can use in your system. Record this wattage in the
last column of the table.

Table F 3-1 Single-Component Maximum

Electrical Service Single-Component Record of Single-Component
Maximum Wattage Maximum Wattage for Your System
200 Vac 1A or 3A 870
24OYac 1A or 4151240 Vac (with neutral) 32 1 000
240Yac 1A or 240 Vac (without neutral) 30 1000
230 Vac 1@ or 4001230 Vac (with neutral) 30 1 000
230 Vac 1A or 230 Vac (without neutral) 30 1 000
400Yac3A 1 000
480Vac3A 1 000

F4EN-05-[3V-PWR]-1 41 -3000y @ 1999 Nordson Corporalion

lssued 3/99 All rights reserved
 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity F 3-5

8. Using the electrical service information you recorded in step 6, refer

to the following table to determine the maximum wattage of any
hose/gun pair you can use in your system. Record this wattage in the
last column of the table.

Table F 3-2 Hose/Gun Pair Maximum Wattage

Electrical Service Hose/Gun Pair Record of Hose/Gun Pair Maximum
Maximum Wattage Wattage for Your System
200 Vac 1A or 3A 1000
24OYac 1A or 4151240 Vac (with neutral) 3Z 1 200
240Yac 1A or 240 Vac (without neutral) 30 1200
230 Vac 1A or 4001230 Vac (with neutral) 3Z 1200
230 Vac 1A or 230 Vac (without neutral) 30 1200
400Yac3A 1200
48OVac3A 1 200

9. Using the electrical service information you recorded in step 6, refer

to the following table to determine which table inthe Power Data
Tables portion of this procedure you will use to determine the
maximum wattage of all hoses and guns you can use in your system.
Record the correct table for your system in the last column of the
table.

Table F 3-3 Correct Table in Power Data Tables for Your System
Electrical Service Table in Power Data Record of Correct Table in Power Data,
Tables Tables for Your System
200 Vac 1A or 3A TableF 4-7
240 Yac 1A or 4151240 Vac (with neutral) 3Z Table F 4-8
240Yac 1A or 240 Vac (without neutral) 3Z Table F 4-B
230 Vac 1A or 4001230 Vac (with neutral) 3Z Table F 4-9
230 Vac 10 or 23O Vac (without neutral) 30 Table F 4-9
4OOYac3A Table F 4-10
48OYac30 Table F 4-11

€tr)99 Nordson Corporation 41-3000y F4EN-05-[3V-PWR]-1

All rights reserued
lssued 3/99
F 3-6 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

2. Procedure for 10. Using the information you recorded in steps 3 and 4, find the correct
row in the correct table (which you recorded in step 9) based on the
Calculating Hose/Gun model of your unit and the type of pump your unit has. ln the table,
Capacity (contd.) PP stands for piston pump and CG stands for constant-speed gear
pump. Then find the correct sub-row within the row based on the
hose/gun electrical capacity of your system (which you recorded in
step 6) and the type of electrical service connected to your unit
(A or 3O). Then read across the table to the column titled lofal
Hose/Gun Maximum Wattage to determine the maximum wattage for
your system's hoses and guns. Record the total hose/gun maximum
wattage for your system in the space below:

Table F 3-4 Total Hose/Gun Maximum Wattage

Record of Total Hose/Gun Maximum Wattage
for Your System

NOTE: You do not need to use the data in the remaining columns of
the table. This data is for reference only.

11. ln the table below, record the total maximum wattages you recorded
in Tables F 3-1, F 3-2, and F 3-4.

Table F 3-5 Maximum Wattages for Your

Type of Maximum Wattage Refer to Record of
Maximum
Wattage for
Your System
Single-component maximum wattage Table F 3-1
Hose/gun pair maximum wattage Table F 3-2
Total hose/gun maximum wattage Table F 3-4

F4EN-05-[3V-PWR]-1 41-3000v @tr)99 Nordson Corporation

All righls reserved
lssued 3/99
 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity F 3-7

12. Refer to Table F 3-12in Power Data Tables and determine the actual
required wattage for each hose and gun in your system. Use the
column in Table F 3-12 that matches the type of electrical seruice
connected,to your unit (which you recorded in step 6). Using the data
from Table F 3-12, complete the following table.

NOTE: Table F 3-12 lists the power requirements for only the most
common Nordson hoses and guns. lf you do not find the hose or gun
you are using in the table, contact your Nordson representative for
wattage information.

Table F 3-6 Actual Hose/Gun Wattages for Your System

Hoses and ActualWattage of Each ActualCombined
Guns Single Hose or Gun from Wattage of Each
Table F 3-12 Hose/Gun Pair
Hose 1

Gun 1

Hose 2
Gun 2
Hose 3
Gun 3
Hose 4
Gun 4
Hose 5
Gun 5
Hose 6
Gun 6
Actua! Wattage Totalfor All Hoses and
Guns in Your System (sum of above
entries)

13. Compare the maximum wattages you recorded in Table F 3-5 to the
actual wattages you recorded in Table F 3-6 for each of the following:
o Wattage of each individual hose and gun
. Combined wattage of each hose/gun pair
o Total wattage of all hoses and guns
lf your actual wattages exceed your maximum wattages in any
category you will need to reconfigure your system or order ditferent
hoses or guns. Contact your Nordson representative for assistance.

@ 1999 Nordson Corporation 41-3000v F4EN{5-[3V-PWRI-1

All rights reserved
lssued 3/99
F 3-8 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

3. Power Data Tables Use these tables as directed in Procedure for Calculating Hose/Gun
Capacity.

Table F3-7 200 Vac 1A or 30 (Used Primarily in Japan)

Model Hose/Gun Type of Total lnternal System Current
(See Note A) Electrical Power Hose/Gun Component Power
Capacity Maximum Power (W) Maximum la @) 3a (A)
(w) (See Note B) (w) 200 Vac 200 Vac
3100v/PP 2 1 3@ 't740 1 303 3043 15 1 3
4 1 3a 3480 1 303 4783 24 21

3100v/cc 2 1 a 3 1740 1 61 5 3355 17 15

4 1 a 3 3480 1 61 5 5095 25 23
340ov/PP 2 1 3 a
, 1740 1530 3270 16 14
4 1 t 3 a 3480 1530 5010 25 22
3400vicG 2 1 3 a 1740 1842 3582 18 16
4 1 3 a 3480 1842 5322 27 23
35OOV/]P 2 1 ,34 1740 21 35 3875 19 17
4 1 ,34 3480 2135 561 5 28 25
6 3A 5220 2135 7355 32

3700V/PP 2 1 3A 't740 2891 4631 23 20

4 1, 3A 3480 2891 6371 32 28
6 3a 5220 2891 8111 35

3830V/CG 2 1 3 a 1740 2145 3885 19 17

4 1 3 a 3480 2145 5625 28 25
386oV/PP 2 1,34 1740 2891 4631 23 20
and 4 1,34 3480 2891 6371 32 28
6 3A 5220 2891 8111 35
389oV/PP
386oV/CG 2 3 a 1740 3203 4943 22
and 4 3 a 3480 3203 6683 29
389oV/CG
3930V/PP 2 3a 1740 2853 4593 14
4 3a 3480 2853 6333 22
3930ViCG 2 3A 1740 3166 4906 15
4 3A 3480 3166 6646 23
396OViPP 2 3a 1740 5159 6899 22
4 3a 3480 5159 8639 28
6 3a 5220 5159 10379 32

NOTE A: PP stands for pistoh pump. CG stands for constant-speed gear pump.
B: The internal component power is the combined wattage of any of the following components your unit
has: a tank, a motor, a grid, and a reservoir.

F4EN-05-[3V-PWR]-1 41-3000v G1999 Nordson Corporalion

All rights reserved
lssued 3/99
 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity F 3-9

Table F 3-8 240Yac1@ or 4151240 Vac (With Neutral)30 (Used Primarily in the British Commonwealth)
or 240Yac 1A or 240 Vac (Without Neutral) 30 (Used Primarily in North America)
Model Hose/Gun Type of Total Internal System Current
(See Electrical Power Hose/Gun Component Power
Note A) Capacity Maximum Power (W) Maximum 1a @l 3a @l 3a @)
(w) (See Note B) (w) 24OYac 4151240 24OYac
Vac
3100v/PP 2 1 a 3 2086 1 876 3962 17 9 14
4 1 a 3 4172 1876 6048 25 17 22
3100v/cc 2 1 t3a 2086 2327 4413 18 10 16
4 1 3 a 4172 2327 6499 27 17 24
3400v/PP 2 1 t3a 2086 2203 4289 18 I 15
4 1 3a 4',t72 2203 6375 27 17 23
3400v/cG 2 1, 3 a 2086 2654 4740 20 11 17
4 1 ,3a 4172 2654 6826 28 17 25
3500V/PP 2 ,34 2086 3074 51 60 22 13 19
4 ,34 4172 3074 7246 30 17 26
6 3A 6258 3074 9332 21 33
3700V/PP 2 ,34 2086 41 63 6249 26 17 23
4 ,34 4172 4163 8335 36 17 30
6 3A 6258 4163 10421 26 38
3830V/CG 2 1 3 o 2086 3089 5175 22 13 19
4 1 3 o 4172 3089 7261 30 17 26
3860V/PP 2 1,3 A 2086 41 63 6249 26 17 23
and 4 1,3 A 4172 41 63 8335 - 17 30
6 3A 6258 4163 10421 26 38
3BgOV/PP

3860V/CG 2 3A 2086 4614 6700 19 25

and 4 3A 4172 4614 8786 19 32
3890V/CG
3930V/PP 2 30 2086 41 08 6194 9 15
4 3A 4172 41 08 8280 17 23
3930V/CG 2 3A 2086 4559 6645 11 17
4 3A 4172 4559 8731 17 24
396OV,/FP 2 3a 2086 7429 951 5 1B 27
4 3 a 4172 7429 1'1601 18 31
6 3 a 6258 7429 1 3687 21 34
NOTE A: PP stands for piston pump. CG stands for constant-speed gear pump.
B: The internal component power is the combined wattage of any of the following components your unit
has: a tank, a motor, a grid, and a reseruoir.

@999 Nordson Corporalion 41-3000v F4EN-05-[3V-PWR]-l

All rights reserved
lssued 3/99
F 3-10 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

Table F 3-9 230 VaclA or 4001230 Vac (With Neutral)30 (Used Primarily in Europe) or
230 Vac 1A or 230 Vac (Without Neutral) 30 (Used Primarily in North America)
Model Hose/Gun Type of Tota! lnternal System Current
(See Electrical Power Hose/Gun Component Power
Note A) Capacity Maximum Power (W) Maximum 1a @) 3@ (A) 3A (Al
(w) (See Note B) (w) 230 Vac 4001230 230 Vac
Vac
3100v/PP 2 1 a 3 2000 1723 3723 16 9 14
4 1 a 3 4000 1723 5723 25 I 22
3100v/cc 2 1 3a 2000 2137 4137 1B 9 16
4 1 3a 4000 2137 6137 27 17 23
3400v/PP 2 1 3 a 2000 2023 4023 17 o 15
4 1, 3 a 4000 2023 6023 26 17 23
340ov/cG 2 1 3a 2000 2437 4437 19 10 17
4 1 t3a 4000 2437 6437 28 17 24
3500V/PP 2 1 ,34 2000 2823 4823 21 12 1B
4
6
1

3A
,34 4000
6000
2823
2823
6823
8823 i 17
21
26
33
37OOV,PP 2 1 3At 2000 3823 5823 25 17 22
4 1, 3A 4000 3823 7823
6 3 a 6000 3823 9823 v 17
25
29
37
3830V/CG 2 t 3@ 2000 2837 4837 21 1 2 18
4 3a 4000 2837 6837 30 1 7 26
3860V/PP 2 1,3 A 2000 3823 5823 25 17 22
and 4 1,3 A 4000 3823 4823
3890V/PP 6 3A 6000 3823 9823 v 17
25
29
37
3860V/CG 2 3a 2000 4237 6237 18 24
and 4 3@ 4000 4237 8237 18 31
389oV/CG
3930V/PP 2 3 a 2000 3773 5773 I 15
4 3 a 4000 3773 7773 17 23
3930V/CG 2 3 a 2000 4187 61 87 1 0 18
4 3 a 4000 4187 6187 1 7 24
396OVPP 2 3 a 2000 6823 BB23 17 26
4 3a 4000 6823 10823 17 30
6 3a 6000 6823 12823 21 33
NOTE A: PP stands for piston pump. CG stands for constant-speed gear pump.
B: The internal component power is the combined wattage of any of the following components your unit
has: a tank, a motor, a grid, and a reservoir.

F4EN-05-[3V-PWB]-1 41-3000v €tr)99 Nordson Corporatlon

All rights reserved
lssued 3/99
 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity F 3-11

Table F 3-10 400 Yac 3A (Used Primarily in France)

Model Hose/Gun Type of Total lnternal System Current
(See Note A) Electrical Power Hose/Gun Component Power 3a(A)
Capacity Maximum (W) Power (W) Maximum (W) 400 Vac
(See Note B)
3100v/PP 2 3A 1 000 1507 2507 4
3400v/PP 2 3A 2000 2239 4239 7
4 3A 2000 2239 4239 7
3500V/PP 2 3A 2000 3125 5125 I
4 3A 2000 3125 5125 B

6 3A 2000 3125 5125 8

NOTE A: PP stands for piston pump.
B: The internal component power is the combined wattage of any of the following components your unit
has: a tank, a motor, a grid, and a reseruoir.

Table F 3-11 480 Yac 3A (Used Primarily in North America)

Model Hose/Gun Type of Total lnternal System Current
(See Note A) Electrical Power Hose/Gun Component Power 3a( )
Capacity Maximum (W) Power (W) Maximum (W) 480 Vac
(See Note B)
3100v/PP 2 3A 1 000 2161 3161 6
3400v/PP 2 3A 2000 3215 5215 o

4 3A 2000 3215 5215 o

3500ViPP 2 3A 2000 4491 6491 12

4 3A 2000 4491 6491 12
6 3A 2000 4491 6491 12
NOTE A: PP stands for piston pump.
B: The internal component power is the combined wattage of any of the following components your unit
has: a tank, a motor, a grid, and a reservoir.

@099 Nordson Corporatlon 41-3000v F4EN-05-[3V-PWR]-1

All rights reserued
lssued 3/99
F 3-12 Calculating Hose/Gun Capacity

Table F 3-12 Actual Power Requirements (Wattages) for Nordson Hoses and Guns
Hose or Gun Type Type of Electrical Service (See Note A)
200 Vac 24OYac 240Vac 230 Vac 230 Vac 400 Vac
1A or 3A 1A or 1A or 1A or 1A or 3A or
(See 4151240 24OYac 4001230 230 Vac 480 Vac
Note B) Vac (with (without Vac (with (without 3@
neutral) neutral) neutra!) neutral)
3A 3A 3A 3A
Auto hose (0.6 m, 2 ft) 45 49 49 45 45 45
Auto hose (1.2 m, 4 ft) 100 109 109 100 100 100
Auto hose (1.8 m, 6 ft) 155 169 169 155 155 '155

Auto hose (2.4 m, 8 ft) 205 223 223 205 205 205
Auto hose (3 m, 10 ft) 265 289 289 265 265 265
Auto hose (3.6 m, 12 ft) 315 343 343 315 315 315
Auto hose (4.8 m, 16 ft) 420 457 457 420 420 420
Auto hose (7.2 m,24 fi) 691 691 635 635 635
Manual hose (2.4 m, 8 ft) 205 223 223 205 205 205
Manual hose (4.8 m, 16 ft) 420 457 457 420 420 420
H-201 gun (TorT-L) 125 152 152 140 140 140
H-202 gun (T or T-L) 210 229 229 210 210 210
H-204 gun (T or T-L) 235 283 283 260 260 260
H-208 gun (T orT-L) 365 440 440 405 405 405
H-202 gun (T-E orT-E-L) 330 365 365 335 335 335
H-204 gun (T-E orT-E-L) 320 381 381 350 350 350
H-202 gun (T-LP or T-LP-L) 170 201 201 185 185 185
H-204 gun (T-LP or T-LP-L) 260 310 310 285 285 285
H-208 gun (T-LP or T-LP-L) 350 424 424 390 390 390
H-20 gun (T or T-L0 180 147 147 135 135 135
H-20 gun w/ micro (T) 150 174 174 160 160 160
NOTE A: Actual line voltage in a plant may vary from nominal voltage by as much as +15%. To calculate the
actual power requirements at other line voltages, use the following formula:

PL ,' ^
= PN,I&1,
LEN]
ln this formula, PL is the wattage at line voltage, PN is the wattage at nominal voltage, EL is the line
voltage, and EN is the nominalvoltage.
.
B: The wattages in bold-face type are for hoses or guns specifically designed for 200 Vac operation.

F4EN-05-[3V-PWR]-1 41-3000v Gr899 Nordson Corporation

All rights reseNed
lssued 3/99
 DECLARATION of CON FORMITY
(For CE Certified Systems)

PRODUCT

Model 3000V Series Hot Melt Application Systems

APPLICABLE DIRECTIVES:
98137/EC (Machinery)
73l23lEEC (Low Voltage Directive)
89i336/EEC (Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive)

STANDARDS USED TO VERIFY COMPLIANCE:

EN292 EN50082-2
EN563 EN55011
EN983 EN60204-1

PRINCIPLES:

This product has been manufactured according to good engineering practice.

The product specified conforms to the directive and standards described above

Date: 24 tt/arch 00
Donald J. Senior Vice President

Nordson"

Nordson Corporation . Westlake, Ohio

DOC004